CN4093 Command Reference For Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 393 CR 8 2

User Manual: 393

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 652

DownloadCN4093 Command Reference For Lenovo Networking OS 8.2 393 CR 8-2
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Lenovo Flex System CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch

ISCLI—Industry Standard CLI
Command Reference
For Networking OS 8.2

Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in the Safety information and
Environmental Notices and User Guide documents on the Lenovo Documentation CD and the Warranty Information document that comes
with the product.

First Edition (April 2015)
© Copyright Lenovo 2015
Portions © Copyright IBM Corporation 2014.
LIMITED AND RESTRICTED RIGHTS NOTICE: If data or software is delivered pursuant a General Services
Administration “GSA” contract, use, reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set forth in Contract No.
GS‐35F‐05925.
Lenovo and the Lenovo logo are trademarks of Lenovo in the United States, other countries, or both.

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . .
Who Should Use This Book .
How This Book Is Organized .
Typographic Conventions . .

.
.
.
.

. .
. . .
. . .
. . .

Chapter 1. ISCLI Basics . . . .
ISCLI Command Modes . . . . .
Global Commands . . . . . . .
Command Line Interface Shortcuts
CLI List and Range Inputs . .
Command Abbreviation . . .
Tab Completion . . . . . .
User Access Levels . . . . . . .
Idle Timeout . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
. .
. .
. .

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. .
. .
. .
. .

. .
. . .
. . .
. . .

. .
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.

. 15
. .16
. .17
. .18

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 21
.22
.26
.28
.28
.28
.28
.29
.30

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 31
.33
.34
.35
.36
.37
.38
.39
.40
.40
.41
.42
.43
.44
.45
.46
.47
.48
.49
.50
.52
.53
.53
.53
.54
.54
.55
.56
.59
.60
.61
.61

Chapter 2. Information Commands . . . . . . .
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLI Display Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Disable and Recovery Information . . . . .
SNMPv3 System Information . . . . . . . . . .
SNMPv3 USM User Table Information . . . .
SNMPv3 View Table Information . . . . . .
SNMPv3 Access Table Information . . . . .
SNMPv3 Group Table Information. . . . . .
SNMPv3 Community Table Information . . .
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information . .
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information
SNMPv3 Notify Table Information. . . . . .
SNMPv3 Dump Information . . . . . . . .
General System Information . . . . . . . . . .
Show Software Version Brief . . . . . . . .
Show Recent Syslog Messages . . . . . . . . .
Show Security Audit Log Messages . . . . . . .
User Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stacking Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stacking Switch Information . . . . . . . . . .
Attached Switches Information . . . . . . . . .
Stack Name Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stack Backup Switch Information . . . . . . . .
Stack Version Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Stack Packet Path Information . . . . . . . . .
Stack Push Status Information . . . . . . . . .
Layer 2 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FDB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show All FDB Information . . . . . . . . .
Show FDB Multicast Address Information . .
Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Contents

3

Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol . . . .
Layer 2 Failover Information Commands . . .
Layer 2 Failover Information . . . . . . .
Hot Links Information. . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge Control Protocol Information . . . . . .
LLDP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LLDP Remote Device Information . . . . .
Unidirectional Link Detection Information . . .
UDLD Port Information . . . . . . . . .
OAM Discovery Information . . . . . . . . .
OAM Port Information. . . . . . . . . .
vLAG Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vLAG Trunk Information . . . . . . . .
802.1X Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spanning Tree Information. . . . . . . . . .
RSTP/PVRST Information . . . . . . . .
Spanning Tree Bridge Information. . . . .
Spanning Tree Root Information . . . . .
Multiple Spanning Tree Information . . . .
Trunk Group Information . . . . . . . . . .
VLAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layer 3 Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Routing Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Show All IP Route Information . . . . . .
ARP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Show All ARP Entry Information . . . . .
ARP Address List Information . . . . . .
BGP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BGP Peer information . . . . . . . . . .
BGP Summary Information . . . . . . . .
BGP Aggregation Information . . . . . .
Dump BGP Information . . . . . . . . .
OSPF Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSPF General Information . . . . . . . .
OSPF Interface Loopback Information . . .
OSPF Interface Information . . . . . . . .
OSPF Information Route Codes . . . . . .
OSPF Database Information . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Information Dump. . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Interface Information. . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Routes Information . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Database Information . . . . . .
Routing Information Protocol . . . . . . . .
RIP Routes Information . . . . . . . . .
RIP Interface Information . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Routing Information . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Routing Table . . . . . . . . . . .

4

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 62
. 62
. 63
. 63
. 65
. 66
. 67
. 68
. 69
. 69
. 70
. 70
. 71
. 71
. 72
. 74
. 79
. 81
. 82
. 83
. 85
. 86
. 88
. 91
. 92
. 94
. 95
. 95
. 96
. 96
. 97
. 97
. 97
. 98
. 99
100
100
100
101
103
104
105
105
106
107
107
107
108
109

IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Information . .
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Information
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Information . .
ECMP Static Route Information . . . . . . . .
ECMP Hashing Result . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Querier Information . . . . . . . .
IGMP Group Information. . . . . . . . .
IGMP Multicast Router Information . . . .
IPMC Group Information . . . . . . . . .
MLD information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MLD Mrouter Information . . . . . . . .
VRRP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Interface Information . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Path MTU Information . . . . . . . . .
IP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IKEv2 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IKEv2 Information Dump. . . . . . . . .
IPsec Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPsec Manual Policy Information . . . . .
PIM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIM Component Information . . . . . . .
PIM Interface Information . . . . . . . .
PIM Neighbor Information . . . . . . . .
PIM Multicast Route Information Commands
PIM Multicast Route Information . . . . .
Quality of Service Information . . . . . . . . . .
802.1p Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WRED and ECN Information . . . . . . . . .
Access Control List Information Commands . . . .
Access Control List Information . . . . . . . .
RMON Information Commands . . . . . . . . .
RMON History Information . . . . . . . . .
RMON Alarm Information . . . . . . . . . .
RMON Event Information . . . . . . . . . .
Link Status Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Transceiver Status . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VM Ready Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VM Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VM Check Information . . . . . . . . . . .
VMware Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMware Host Information . . . . . . . .
EVB Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vNIC Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual NIC (vNIC) Information. . . . . . . .
vNIC Group Information. . . . . . . . . . .
SLP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UFP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

110
110
111
112
112
113
115
116
117
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
146
148
149
149
150
150
151
152
153
154
155
156

Contents

5

6

Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDCP Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QoS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TLV Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
VLAN Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TLV Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCBX Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . .
Converged Enhanced Ethernet Information . . . . .
DCBX Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCBX Control Information . . . . . . . . . . .
DCBX Feature Information . . . . . . . . . . .
DCBX ETS Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCBX PFC Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCBX Application Protocol Information . . . . .
ETS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PFC Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCoE Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIP Snooping Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel Information. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fabric Login Database Information . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel Name Server Database Information
Fabric Configuration Status Database Information.
Fibre Channel Forwarding Information . . . . .
NPV Traffic Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zone Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . .
FC Port Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Topology Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Chapter 3. Statistics Commands .
Forwarding Database Statistics . . .
Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . .
802.1X Authenticator Statistics .
802.1X Authenticator Diagnostics
Bridging Statistics. . . . . . .
Ethernet Statistics . . . . . . .
Interface Statistics. . . . . . .
Interface Protocol Statistics . . .
Link Statistics . . . . . . . .
RMON Statistics . . . . . . .
QoS Queue Statistics . . . . .
Trunk Group Statistics . . . . . .
Trunk Group Interface Statistics
Layer 2 Statistics . . . . . . . . .
LACP Statistics . . . . . . . .
Hotlinks Statistics . . . . . . .
LLDP Port Statistics . . . . . .
OAM Statistics . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

157
158
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
172
173
174
174
176
178
178
179
179
180
180
181
182
183

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

185
186
187
189
190
193
194
197
200
200
201
204
208
208
209
210
211
212
213

vLAG Statistics . . . . . . . . . . .
vLAG ISL Statistics . . . . . . .
vLAG Statistics . . . . . . . . .
Layer 3 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv4 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv4 Route Statistics . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Route Statistics . . . . . . . . .
ARP statistics . . . . . . . . . . . .
DNS Statistics . . . . . . . . . . .
ICMP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . .
UDP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . .
MLD Statistics . . . . . . . . . . .
MLD Global Statistics . . . . . .
OSPF Statistics . . . . . . . . . . .
OSPF Global Statistics . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Statistics . . . . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Global Statistics . . . . .
VRRP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . .
PIM Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Information Protocol Statistics.
Management Processor Statistics . . . . .
Packet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . .
MP Packet Statistics . . . . . . . . .
Packet Statistics Log . . . . . . . . .
Packet Log example . . . . . . .
Packet Statistics Last Packet . . . . .
Packet Statistics Dump. . . . . . . .
Logged Packet Statistics . . . . . . .
TCP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . .
UDP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Statistics History . . . . . .
Access Control List Statistics . . . . . . .
ACL Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . .
ACL Meter Statistics . . . . . . . . .
VMAP Statistics. . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel over Ethernet Statistics . . .
SNMP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . .
NTP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SLP Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Statistics Dump. . . . . . . . . . . . .

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

214
214
214
216
220
223
228
229
230
231
232
234
236
237
239
240
242
243
247
248
251
252
253
254
255
255
260
260
261
261
262
266
267
267
269
270
271
271
271
272
273
277
279
280

Contents

7

Chapter 4. Configuration Commands . . . . . . .
Viewing and Saving Changes . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Error Disable and Recovery Configuration .
Link Flap Dampening Configuration. . . . . .
System Host Log Configuration. . . . . . . . . .
SSH Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
RADIUS Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
TACACS+ Server Configuration . . . . . . . . .
LDAP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
NTP Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
NTP MD5 Key Commands . . . . . . . . . .
System SNMP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
SNMPv3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Security Model Configuration . . . . . .
SNMPv3 View Configuration . . . . . . . . .
View‐based Access Control Model Configuration
SNMPv3 Group Configuration . . . . . . . .
SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration . . .
SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration. .
SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration
SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration . . . . .
System Access Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
Management Network Configuration . . . . .
User Access Control Configuration . . . . . .
System User ID Configuration . . . . . . . .
Strong Password Configuration . . . . . . . .
HTTPS Access Configuration . . . . . . . . .
Custom Daylight Saving Time Configuration . . . .
sFlow Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
sFlow Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Error Disable and Recovery Configuration . . .
Port Link Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporarily Disabling a Port . . . . . . . . . . .
Unidirectional Link Detection Configuration . . . .
Port OAM Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port ACL Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port WRED Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port WRED Transmit Queue Configuration . . .
Management Port Configuration . . . . . . . . .
Stacking Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stacking Switch Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Management Interface Configuration . . . . . . .
Quality of Service Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
802.1p Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSCP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Plane Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

281
283
283
284
287
288
289
292
294
296
300
302
304
305
307
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
319
320
321
322
323
325
326
326
327
332
333
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
343
344
345

Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration . . . .
WRED Transmit Queue Configuration . . . . . . .
Access Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access Control List Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Filtering Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv4 Filtering Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
Packet Format Filtering Configuration . . . . . . . . .
ACL IPv6 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Filtering Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration . . . . . . .
IPv6 Metering Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
Management ACL Filtering Configuration . . . . . . .
TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
VMAP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACL Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACL Metering Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACL Re‐Mark Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Re‐Marking In‐Profile Configuration . . . . . . . .
Re‐Marking Out‐Profile Configuration . . . . . . .
IPv6 Re‐Marking Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Re‐Marking In‐Profile Configuration . . . . .
IPv6 Re‐Marking Out‐Profile Configuration . . . . .
Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Mirroring Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layer 2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.1X Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
802.1X Global Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . .
802.1X Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spanning Tree Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSTP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RSTP/PVRST Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . .
Forwarding Database Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Static Multicast MAC Configuration . . . . . . . .
Static FDB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ECP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LLDP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LLDP Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LLDP Optional TLV configuration . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Trunk Hash Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FCoE Trunk Hash Configuration . . . . . . . . .
Layer 2 Trunk Hash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layer 3 Trunk Hash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration
vLAG Health Check Configuration . . . . . . . .
vLAG ISL Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration . . . .
LACP Port Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

346
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
366
367
368
369
369
370
371
371
372
373
374
375
375
377
378
380
383
386
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
398
399
400
401
402
403
405
405
406
407

Contents

9

Layer 2 Failover Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Failover Trigger Configuration . . . . . . . .
Auto Monitor Configuration . . . . . . . . .
Failover Manual Monitor Port Configuration . .
Failover Manual Monitor Control Configuration
Hot Links Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot Links Trigger Configuration . . . . . . .
Hot Links Master Configuration. . . . . . . .
Hot Links Backup Configuration . . . . . . .
VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol‐Based VLAN Configuration . . . . .
Private VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . .
Layer 3 Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Gateway Configuration. . . . . . . . . .
IPv4 Static Route Configuration. . . . . . . . . .
IP Multicast Route Configuration . . . . . . . . .
ARP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ARP Static Configuration. . . . . . . . . . .
IP Forwarding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
Network Filter Configuration. . . . . . . . . . .
Routing Map Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Access List Configuration . . . . . . . . .
Autonomous System Filter Path Configuration .
Routing Information Protocol Configuration . . . .
RIP Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . .
RIP Route Redistribution Configuration . . . .
Open Shortest Path First Configuration . . . . . .
Area Index Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
OSPF Summary Range Configuration . . . . .
OSPF Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . .
OSPF Virtual Link Configuration . . . . . . .
OSPF Host Entry Configuration . . . . . . . .
OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration . . .
OSPF MD5 Key Configuration . . . . . . . .
Open Shortest Path First Version 3 Configuration . .
OSPFv3 Area Index Configuration. . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Summary Range Configuration . . . .
OSPFv3 AS‐External Range Configuration . . .
OSPFv3 Interface Configuration . . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 over IPSec Configuration . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Virtual Link Configuration . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Host Entry Configuration . . . . . . .
OSPFv3 Redistribute Entry Configuration . . .
OSPFv3 Redistribute Configuration . . . . . .
Border Gateway Protocol Configuration . . . . . .
BGP Peer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
BGP Aggregation Configuration . . . . . . .
BGP Neighbor Redistribution Configuration . .
Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Configuration
MLD Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . .

10

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

409
410
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
419
421
422
424
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
435
436
437
437
439
440
441
443
444
446
447
448
448
449
451
453
454
455
457
459
461
461
462
463
464
467
468
469
469

IGMP Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Snooping Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
IGMPv3 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Relay Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Filtering Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Relay Multicast Router Configuration . . . .
IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration . . . .
IGMP Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Querier Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
IKEv2 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IKEv2 Proposal Configuration. . . . . . . . . . .
IKEv2 Preshare Key Configuration. . . . . . . . .
IKEv2 Identification Configuration . . . . . . . .
IPsec Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPsec Transform Set Configuration . . . . . . . . .
IPsec Traffic Selector Configuration . . . . . . . .
IPsec Dynamic Policy Configuration . . . . . . . .
IPsec Manual Policy Configuration . . . . . . . .
Domain Name System Configuration . . . . . . . . .
Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration . . . . . . . .
BOOTP Relay Broadcast Domain Configuration . . .
VRRP Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Router Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration . . .
Virtual Router Group Configuration . . . . . . . .
Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration
VRRP Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
VRRP Tracking Configuration. . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol Independent Multicast Configuration . . . . .
PIM Component Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
RP Candidate Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
RP Static Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIM Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Default Gateway Configuration . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Static Route Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Configuration . . . . .
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Configuration . . . . .
IPv6 Prefix Policy Table Configuration . . . . . . . . .
IPv6 Path MTU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Loopback Interface Configuration. . . . . . . . . .
Converged Enhanced Ethernet Configuration . . . . . . .
ETS Global Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ETS Global Priority Group Configuration . . . . . .
Priority Flow Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . .
Global Priority Flow Control Configuration . . . . .
Port‐level 802.1p PFC Configuration . . . . . . . .
DCBX Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FC Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FC VLAN Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FC Zone Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

471
472
473
474
474
476
477
478
479
481
481
482
482
483
483
484
484
485
488
489
489
490
492
494
495
497
498
499
500
501
501
501
502
504
505
506
506
508
509
510
511
512
512
514
514
515
516
517
518
518
520

Contents

11

FC Zoneset Configuration . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel over Ethernet Configuration .
FIPS Port Configuration . . . . . . . .
Remote Monitoring Configuration . . . . .
RMON History Configuration . . . . .
RMON Event Configuration . . . . . .
RMON Alarm Configuration . . . . . .
Virtualization Configuration . . . . . . .
VM Policy Bandwidth Management . . .
Virtual NIC Configuration . . . . . . .
vNIC Port Configuration . . . . . .
Virtual NIC Group Configuration . .
VM Group Configuration . . . . . . .
VM Check Configuration . . . . . . .
VM Profile Configuration . . . . . . .
VMWare Configuration . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous VMready Configuration .
UFP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
Edge Virtual Bridge Configuration . . . . .
Edge Virtual Bridge Profile Configuration
Switch Partition (SPAR) Configuration . . .
Service Location Protocol Configuration . . .
Configuration Dump . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Active Switch Configuration . . .
Restoring the Active Switch Configuration. .

12

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

521
522
523
524
524
525
526
528
530
531
531
532
534
537
538
539
540
541
544
546
547
549
550
551
552

Chapter 5. Operations Commands . . . . . . .
Operations‐Level Port Commands . . . . . . . .
Operations‐Level Port 802.1X Commands . . . . .
Operations‐Level VRRP Commands. . . . . . . .
Operations‐Level BGP Commands . . . . . . . .
Protected Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMware Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VMware Distributed Virtual Switch Operations .
VMware Distributed Port Group Operations . .
Edge Virtual Bridge Operations. . . . . . . . . .
Feature on Demand Key Options . . . . . . . . .

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 553
554
555
556
557
558
560
562
563
564
565

Chapter 6. Boot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stacking Boot Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scheduled Reboot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Netboot Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Port Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
QSFP Port Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating the Switch Software Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading New Software to Your Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Software Image to Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Configuration Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rebooting the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Boot Management Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boot Recovery Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recover from a Failed Image Upgrade using TFTP. . . . . . . . .
Recovering from a Failed Image Upgrade using XModem Download
Physical Presence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 567
568
570
571
572
573
574
574
575
575
577
578
579
580
581
583
585

Chapter 7. Maintenance Commands . . .
Forwarding Database Maintenance . . . . .
Debugging Commands . . . . . . . . . .
IP Security Debugging . . . . . . . . .
ARP Cache Maintenance. . . . . . . . . .
IP Route Manipulation . . . . . . . . . .
LLDP Cache Manipulation . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Group Maintenance . . . . . . . . .
IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance . . . .
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Manipulation
IPv6 Route Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .
Uuencode Flash Dump . . . . . . . . . .
TFTP, SFTP or FTP System Dump Copy . . .
Clearing Dump Information . . . . . . . .
Unscheduled System Dumps . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. 587
589
591
593
594
595
596
597
598
600
601
602
603
604
605

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Contents

13

Appendix A. Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages
LOG_ALERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOG_CRIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOG_ERR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOG_INFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOG_NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOG_WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

607
608
610
611
613
617
621

Appendix B. Getting help and technical assistance. . . . . . . . . . 625
Appendix C. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recycling Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Particulate Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telecommunication Regulatory Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Emission Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement . . . . . .
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement . . . . .
Avis de Conformité à la Réglementation dʹIndustrie Canada . . . .
Australia and New Zealand Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . .
European Union EMC Directive Conformance Statement. . . . . .
Germany Class A Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Japan VCCI Class A Statement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association
(JEITA) Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Korea Communications Commission (KCC) Statement . . . . . .
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A Statement . . . . .
People’s Republic of China Class A electronic emission Statement . . .
Taiwan Class A compliance Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

627
629
630
631
632
633
634
634
634
634
634
634
635
636

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

637
637
638
639
640

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641

14

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Preface
The Lenovo Flex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch ISCLI
Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Lenovo N/OS 8.2
software with your Lenovo Flex System CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch
(referred to as CN4093 throughout this document). This guide lists each command,
together with the complete syntax and a functional description, from the IS
Command Line Interface (ISCLI).
For documentation on installing the switches physically, see the Installation Guide
for your CN4093. For details about the configuration and operation of the CN4093,
see the Lenovo N/OS 8.2 Application Guide.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Preface

15

Who Should Use This Book
This book is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in
configuring and maintaining a network. The administrator should be familiar with
Ethernet concepts, IP addressing, the Spanning Tree Protocol and SNMP
configuration parameters.

16

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

How This Book Is Organized
Chapter 1, “ISCLI Basics,” describes how to connect to the switch and access the
information and configuration commands. This chapter provides an overview of
the command syntax, including command modes, global commands, and
shortcuts.
Chapter 2, “Information Commands,” shows how to view switch configuration
parameters.
Chapter 3, “Statistics Commands,” shows how to view switch performance
statistics.
Chapter 4, “Configuration Commands,” shows how to configure switch system
parameters, ports, VLANs, Spanning Tree Protocol, SNMP, Port Mirroring, IP
Routing, Port Trunking, and more.
Chapter 5, “Operations Commands,” shows how to use commands which affect
switch performance immediately, but do not alter permanent switch
configurations (such as temporarily disabling ports). The commands describe how
to activate or deactivate optional software features.
Chapter 6, “Boot Options,” describes the use of the primary and alternate switch
images, how to load a new software image, and how to reset the software to factory
defaults.
Chapter 7, “Maintenance Commands,” shows how to generate and access a dump
of critical switch state information, how to clear it, and how to clear part or all of the
forwarding database.
Appendix A, “Lenovo N/OS System Log Messages,” lists Lenovo N/OS System
Log Messages.
Appendix B, “Getting help and technical assistance,” contains information on how
to get help, service, technical assistance, o more information about Lenovo
products.
Appendix C, “Notices,” displays Lenovo legal information.
“Index” includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the
book.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Preface

17

Typographic Conventions
The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book.
Table 1. Typographic Conventions
Typeface or Symbol

Meaning

plain fixed­width
text

This type is used for names of commands, files, and
directories used within the text. For example:
View the readme.txt file.
It also depicts on‐screen computer output and prompts.

bold fixed­width
text

This bold type appears in command examples. It shows
text that must be typed in exactly as shown. For
example:
show sys­info

bold body text

This bold type indicates objects such as window names,
dialog box names, and icons, as well as user interface
objects such as buttons, and tabs.

italicized body text

This italicized type indicates book titles, special terms,
or words to be emphasized.

angle brackets < >

Indicate a variable to enter based on the description
inside the brackets. Do not type the brackets when
entering the command.
Example: If the command syntax is
ping 
you enter
ping 192.32.10.12

braces {}

Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions
where there is more than one option. You must choose
only one of the options. Do not type the braces when
entering the command.
Example: If the command syntax is
show portchannel
{<1‐128>|hash|information}
you enter:
show portchannel <1‐128>
or
show portchannel hash
or
show portchannel information

18

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 1. Typographic Conventions
Typeface or Symbol

Meaning

brackets []

Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions. Do
not type the brackets when entering the command.
Example: If the command syntax is
show interface ip [<1‐128>]
you enter
show interface ip
or
show interface ip <1‐128>

vertical line |

Separates choices for command keywords and
arguments. Enter only one of the choices. Do not type
the vertical line when entering the command.
Example: If the command syntax is
show portchannel
{<1‐128>|hash|information}
you must enter:
show portchannel <1‐128>
or
show portchannel hash
or
show portchannel information

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Preface

19

20

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Chapter 1. ISCLI Basics
Your CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch (CN4093) is ready to perform basic
switching functions right out of the box. Some of the more advanced features,
however, require some administrative configuration before they can be used
effectively.
This guide describes the individual ISCLI commands available for the CN4093.
The ISCLI provides a direct method for collecting switch information and
performing switch configuration. Using a basic terminal, the ISCLI allows you to
view information and statistics about the switch, and to perform any necessary
configuration.
This chapter explains how to access the IS Command Line Interface (ISCLI) for the
switch.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 1: ISCLI Basics

21

ISCLI Command Modes
The ISCLI has three major command modes listed in order of increasing privileges,
as follows:


User EXEC mode
This is the initial mode of access. By default, password checking is disabled for
this mode, on console.



Privileged EXEC mode
This mode is accessed from User EXEC mode. This mode can be accessed using
the following command: enable



Global Configuration mode
This mode allows you to make changes to the running configuration. If you save
the configuration, the settings survive a reload of the CN4093. Several
sub‐modes can be accessed from the Global Configuration mode. For more
details, see Table 1. This mode can be accessed using the following command:
configure terminal

Each mode provides a specific set of commands. The command set of a
higher‐privilege mode is a superset of a lower‐privilege mode—all lower‐privilege
mode commands are accessible when using a higher‐privilege mode.
Table 1 lists the ISCLI command modes.
Table 1. ISCLI Command Modes
Command Mode/Prompt

Command used to enter or exit

User EXEC

Default mode, entered automatically on console

CN 4093>

Exit: exit or logout

Privileged EXEC

Enter Privileged EXEC mode, from User EXEC mode: enable

CN 4093#

Exit to User EXEC mode: disable
Quit ISCLI: exit or logout

Global Configuration
CN 4093(config)#

Enter Global Configuration mode, from Privileged EXEC
mode:
configure terminal
Exit to Privileged EXEC: end or exit

Interface IP
CN 4093(config­ip­if)#

Enter Interface IP Configuration mode, from Global
Configuration mode: interface ip 
Internal Management IP interface is reachable only by
Management Module.
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

22

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 1. ISCLI Command Modes (continued)
Command Mode/Prompt

Command used to enter or exit

Interface Loopback

Enter Interface Loopback Configuration mode, from Global
Configuration mode: interface loopback <1‐5>

CN 4093(config­ip­loopback)#

Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end
Interface Port
CN 4093(config­if)#

Enter Port Configuration mode, from Global Configuration
mode:
interface port 
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: exit
Exit to Global Configuration mode: end

Interface PortChannel
CN 4093(config­PortChannel)#

Enter PortChannel (trunk group) Configuration mode, from
Global Configuration mode:
interface portchannel {|lacp }
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: exit
Exit to Global Configuration mode: end

VLAN
CN 4093(config­vlan)#

Enter VLAN Configuration mode, from Global Configuration
mode:
vlan 
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

Router OSPF
CN 4093(config­router­ospf)#

Enter OSPF Configuration mode, from Global Configuration
mode:
router ospf
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

Router OSPFv3
CN 4093(config­router­ospf3)#

Enter OSPFv3 Configuration mode, from Global Configuration
mode:
ipv6 router ospf
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

Router BGP
CN 4093(config­router­bgp)#

Enter BGP Configuration mode, from Global Configuration
mode:
router bgp
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 1: ISCLI Basics

23

Table 1. ISCLI Command Modes (continued)
Command Mode/Prompt

Command used to enter or exit

Router RIP

Enter RIP Configuration mode, from Global Configuration
mode:
router rip

CN 4093(config­router­rip)#

Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end
Route Map
CN 4093(config­route­map)#

Enter Route Map Configuration mode, from Global
Configuration mode:
route­map <1‐32>
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

Router VRRP
CN 4093(config­vrrp)#

Enter VRRP Configuration mode, from Global Configuration
mode:
router vrrp
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

IKEv2 Proposal
CN 4093(config­ikev2­prop)#

Enter IKEv2 Proposal Configuration mode, from Global
Configuration mode:
ikev2 proposal
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

MLD Configuration
CN 4093(config­router­mld)#

Enter Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Configuration
mode, from Global Configuration mode:
ipv6 mld
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

MST Configuration
CN 4093(config­mst)#

Enter Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration mode,
from Global Configuration mode:
spanning­tree mst configuration
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

VSI Database
CN 4093(conf­vsidb)#

Enter Virtual Station Interface Database Configuration mode,
from Global Configuration mode:
virt evb vsidb 
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

24

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 1. ISCLI Command Modes (continued)
Command Mode/Prompt

Command used to enter or exit

EVB Profile

Enter Edge Virtual Bridging Profile Configuration mode, from
Global Configuration mode:
virt evb profile <1‐16>

CN 4093(conf­evbprof)#

Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end
UFP Virtual Port Configuration
CN 4093(config_ufp_vport)#

Enter Unified Fabric Port Virtual Port Configuration mode,
from Global Configuration mode:
ufp port  vport <1‐4>
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

SPAR Configuration
CN 4093(config­spar)#

Enter Switch Partition Configuration mode, from Global
Configuration mode:
spar <1‐8>
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

FC Port Configuration
CN 4093(config­fc)#

Enter Fibre Channel Port Configuration mode, from Global
Configuration mode:
interface fc 
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

FC Zone Configuration
CN 4093(config­zone)#

Enter Fibre Channel Zone Configuration mode, from Global
Configuration mode:
zone name <1‐64 characters>
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

FC Zoneset Configuration
CN 4093(config­zoneset)#

Enter Fibre Channel Zoneset Configuration mode, from Global
Configuration mode:
zoneset name <1‐64 characters>
Exit to Global Configuration mode: exit
Exit to Privileged EXEC mode: end

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 1: ISCLI Basics

25

Global Commands
Some basic commands are recognized throughout the ISCLI command modes.
These commands are useful for obtaining online help, navigating through the
interface, and for saving configuration changes.
For help on a specific command, type the command, followed by help.
Table 2. Description of Global Commands
Command

Action

?

Provides more information about a specific command or lists
commands available at the current level.

list

Lists the commands available at the current level.

exit

Go up one level in the command mode structure. If already at
the top level, exit from the command line interface and log
out.

copy
running­config
startup­config

Write configuration changes to non‐volatile flash memory.

logout

Exit from the command line interface and log out.

ping

Use this command to verify station‐to‐station connectivity
across the network. The format is as follows:
ping | [­n ]
[­w ] [­l ] [­s ] [­v ]
[­f] [­t]
Where:


­n: Sets the number of attempts (optional).



­w: Sets the number of milliseconds between attempts
(optional).



­l: Sets the ping request payload size (optional).



­s: Sets the IP source address for the IP packet
(optional).



­v: Sets the Type Of Service bits in the IP header.



­f: Sets the don’t fragment bit in the IP header (only for
IPv4 addresses).



­t: Pings continuously (same as ­n 0).

Where the IP address or hostname specify the target device.
Use of a hostname requires DNS parameters to be configured
on the switch.
Tries (optional) is the number of attempts (1‐32), and msec
delay (optional) is the number of milliseconds between
attempts.

26

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 2. Description of Global Commands (continued)
Command

Action

traceroute

Use this command to identify the route used for
station‐to‐station connectivity across the network. The format
is as follows:
traceroute {|} [
[]]
Where hostname/IP address is the hostname or IP address of
the target station, max‐hops (optional) is the maximum
distance to trace (1‐32 devices), and msec‐delay (optional) is
the number of milliseconds to wait for the response.
As with ping, the DNS parameters must be configured if
specifying hostnames.

telnet

This command is used to form a Telnet session between the
switch and another network device. The format is as follows:
telnet {|} []
Where IP address or hostname specifies the target station. Use
of a hostname requires DNS parameters to be configured on
the switch.
Port is the logical Telnet port or service number.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

show history

This command displays the last ten issued commands.

show who

Displays a list of users who are currently logged in.

show line

Displays a list of users who are currently logged in, in table
format.

Chapter 1: ISCLI Basics

27

Command Line Interface Shortcuts
The following shortcuts allow you to enter commands quickly and easily.

CLI List and Range Inputs
For VLAN and port commands that allow an individual item to be selected from
within a numeric range, lists and ranges of items can now be specified. For
example, the vlan command permits the following options:
# vlan 1,3,4095
# vlan 1­20
# vlan 1­5,90­99,4090­4095
# vlan 1­5,19,20,4090­4095

(access VLANs 1, 3, and 4095)
(access VLANs 1 through 20)
(access multiple ranges)
(access a mix of lists and ranges)

The numbers in a range must be separated by a dash: ­
Multiple ranges or list items are permitted using a comma: ,
Do not use spaces within list and range specifications.
Ranges can also be used to apply the same command option to multiple items. For
example, to access multiple ports with one command:
# interface port 1­4

(Access ports 1 though 4)

Command Abbreviation
Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which
distinguish the command from the others in the same mode. For example, consider
the following full command and a valid abbreviation:
CN 4093(config)#show mac­address­table interface port 12

or:
CN 4093(config)#sh ma i p 12

Tab Completion
By entering the first letter of a command at any prompt and pressing , the
ISCLI displays all available commands or options that begin with that letter.
Entering additional letters further refines the list of commands or options
displayed. If only one command fits the input text when  is pressed, that
command is supplied on the command line, waiting to be entered.

28

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

User Access Levels
To enable better switch management and user accountability, three levels or classes
of user access have been implemented on the CN4093. Levels of access to CLI, Web
management functions, and screens increase as needed to perform various switch
management tasks. Conceptually, access classes are defined as follows:


user
Interaction with the switch is completely passive—nothing can be changed on
the CN4093. Users may display information that has no security or privacy
implications, such as switch statistics and current operational state information.



oper
Operators can make temporary changes on the CN4093. These changes are lost
when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators have access to the switch
management features used for daily switch operations. Because any changes an
operator makes are undone by a reset of the switch, operators cannot severely
impact switch operation.



admin
Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the
switch configuration—changes that are persistent across a reboot or reset of the
switch. Administrators can access switch functions to configure and
troubleshoot problems on the CN4093. Because administrators can also make
temporary (operator‐level) changes as well, they must be aware of the
interactions between temporary and permanent changes.

Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and
passwords. Once you are connected to the switch via local Telnet, remote Telnet, or
SSH, you are prompted to enter a password. The default user names/password for
each access level are listed in the following table.
Note: It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial
configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies.
Table 3. User Access Levels
User Account

Description and Tasks Performed

Password

User

The User has no direct responsibility for switch
management. He or she can view all switch status
information and statistics, but cannot make any
configuration changes to the switch.

Operator

The Operator can make temporary changes that are
lost when the switch is rebooted/reset. Operators
have access to the switch management features
used for daily switch operations.

The superuser Administrator has complete access to admin
all
command modes, information, and
Administrator
configuration commands on the CN4093, including
the ability to change both the user and
administrator passwords.
Note: With the exception of the “admin” user, access to each user level can be
disabled by setting the password to an empty value.
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 1: ISCLI Basics

29

Idle Timeout
By default, the switch will disconnect your Telnet session after ten minutes of
inactivity. This function is controlled by the following command, which can be set
from 1 to 60 minutes, or disabled when set to 0:
system idle <0‐60>
Command mode: Global Configuration

30

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Chapter 2. Information Commands
You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and
administrator command modes. This chapter discusses how to use the command
line interface to display switch information.
Table 4. Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show interface status 
Displays configuration information about the selected port(s), including:


Port alias and number



Port speed



Duplex mode (half, full, or auto)



Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or both)



Link status (up, down, or disabled)

For details, see page 143.
Command mode: All
show interface trunk 
Displays port status information, including:


Port alias and number



Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not



Port VLAN ID (PVID)



Port name



VLAN membership



FDB Learning status



Flooding status

For details, see page 144.
Command mode: All
show interface transceiver
Displays the status of the port transceiver module on each external port. For
details, see page 146.
Command mode: All
show software­key
Displays the enabled software features.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

31

Table 4. Information Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show information­dump
Dumps all switch information available (10K or more, depending on your
configuration).
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software
on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump
commands.
Command mode: All

32

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

System Information
The information provided by each command option is briefly described in Table 5
on page 33, with pointers to where detailed information can be found.
Table 5. System Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show sys­info
Displays system information, including:


System date and time



Switch model name and number



Switch name and location



Time of last boot



MAC address of the switch management processor



IP address of management interface



Hardware version and part number



Software image file and version number



Configuration name



Log‐in banner, if one is configured



Internal temperatures

For details, see page 45.
Command mode: All
show logging [severity <0‐7>] [reverse]
Displays the current syslog configuration, followed by the most recent 2000
syslog messages, as displayed by the show logging messages command.
For details, see page 47.
Command mode: All
show access user
Displays configured user names and their status.
Command mode: Privileged EXEC

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

33

CLI Display Information
These commands allow you to display information about the number of lines per
screen displayed in the CLI.
Table 6. CLI Display Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show terminal­length
Displays the number of lines per screen displayed in the CLI for the current
session. A value of 0 means paging is disabled.
Command mode: All
show line console length
Displays the current line console length setting. For details, see
page 284.
Command mode: All
show line vty length
Displays the current line vty length setting. For details, see page 284.
Command mode: All

34

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Error Disable and Recovery Information
These commands allow you to display information about the Error Disable and
Recovery feature for interface ports.
Table 7. Error Disable Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show errdisable [information]
Displays all Error Disable and Recovery information.
Command mode: All
show errdisable link­flap [information]
Displays the current Link Flap Dampening parameters. The information
option displays ports that have been disabled due to excessive link flaps.
Command mode: All
show errdisable recovery
Displays a list of ports with their Error Recovery status.
Command mode: All
show errdisable timers
Displays a list of active recovery timers, if applicable.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

35

SNMPv3 System Information
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements
the SNMPv2 framework by supporting the following:


a new SNMP message format



security for messages



access control



remote configuration of SNMP parameters

For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276.
Table 8. SNMPv3 Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show snmp­server v3 user
Displays User Security Model (USM) table information. To view the table, see
page 37.
Command mode: All
show snmp­server v3 view
Displays information about view, subtrees, mask and type of view. To view a
sample, see page 38.
Command mode: All
show snmp­server v3 access
Displays View‐based Access Control information. To view a sample, see
page 39.
Command mode: All
show snmp­server v3 group
Displays information about the group, including the security model, user
name, and group name. To view a sample, see page 40.
Command mode: All
show snmp­server v3 community
Displays information about the community table information. To view a
sample, see page 40.
Command mode: All
show snmp­server v3 target­address
Displays the Target Address table information. To view a sample, see page 41.
Command mode: All
show snmp­server v3 target­parameters
Displays the Target parameters table information. To view a sample, see
page 42.
Command mode: All

36

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 8. SNMPv3 Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show snmp­server v3 notify
Displays the Notify table information. To view a sample, see page 43.
Command mode: All
show snmp­server v3
Displays all the SNMPv3 information. To view a sample, see page 44.
Command mode: All

SNMPv3 USM User Table Information
The User‐based Security Model (USM) in SNMPv3 provides security services such
as authentication and privacy of messages. This security model makes use of a
defined set of user identities displayed in the USM user table. The following
command displays SNMPv3 user information:
show snmp­server v3 user
Command mode: All
The USM user table contains the following information:
the user name
 a security name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Secu‐
rity Model
 an authentication protocol, which is an indication that the messages sent on
behalf of the user can be authenticated
 the privacy protocol


usmUser Table:
User Name
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
adminmd5
adminsha
v1v2only

Protocol
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY
HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY
NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY

Table 9. USM User Table Information Parameters

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Field

Description

User Name

This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can
use to access the switch.

Protocol

This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are
protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol. Lenovo
N/OS supports DES algorithm for privacy. The software also
supports two authentication algorithms: MD5 and
HMAC‐SHA.

Chapter 2: Information Commands

37

SNMPv3 View Table Information
The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of
the management information in the management domain that the group can access
within each context by specifying the group’s rights in terms of a particular MIB
view for security reasons.
The following command displays the SNMPv3 View Table:
show snmp­server v3 view
Command mode: All
View Name
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
iso
v1v2only
v1v2only
v1v2only
v1v2only

Subtree
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
1
1
1.3.6.1.6.3.15
1.3.6.1.6.3.16
1.3.6.1.6.3.18

Mask
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

Type
­­­­­­­­
included
included
excluded
excluded
excluded

Table 10. SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters

38

Field

Description

View Name

Displays the name of the view.

Subtree

Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string. A view subtree is the
set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object
Identifier prefix to their names.

Mask

Displays the bit mask.

Type

Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or
excluded from the MIB view.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

SNMPv3 Access Table Information
The access control subsystem provides authorization services.
The vacmAccessTable maps a group name, security information, a context, and a
message type, which could be the read or write type of operation or notification
into a MIB view.
The View‐based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application
can use for checking access rights of a group. This groupʹs access rights are
determined by a read‐view, a write‐view and a notify‐view. The read‐view
represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the
objects. The write‐view represents the set of object instances authorized for the
group when writing objects. The notify‐view represents the set of object instances
authorized for the group when sending a notification.
The following command displays SNMPv3 access information:
show snmp­server v3 access
Command mode: All
Group Name
­­­­­­­­­­
v1v2grp
admingrp

Model
­­­­­­­
snmpv1
usm

Level
­­­­­­
noAuthNoPriv
authPriv

ReadV
­­­­­­
iso
iso

WriteV
­­­­­­
iso
iso

NotifyV
­­­­­­­­
v1v2only
iso

Table 11. SNMPv3 Access Table Information

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Field

Description

Group Name

Displays the name of group.

Model

Displays the security model used, for example, SNMPv1, or
SNMPv2 or USM.

Level

Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights
of access. For example, noAuthNoPriv, authNoPriv, or authPriv.

ReadV

Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read
access.

WriteV

Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write
access.

NotifyV

Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the
notify access.

Chapter 2: Information Commands

39

SNMPv3 Group Table Information
A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the
access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group. The group
is identified by a group name.
The following command displays SNMPv3 group information:
show snmp­server v3 group
Command mode: All
Sec Model
­­­­­­­­­­
snmpv1
usm
usm
usm

User Name
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
v1v2only
adminmd5
adminsha
adminshaaes

Group Name
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
v1v2grp
admingrp
admingrp
admingrp

Table 12. SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters
Field

Description

Sec Model

Displays the security model used, which is any one of: USM,
SNMPv1, SNMPv2, and SNMPv3.

User Name

Displays the name for the group.

Group Name

Displays the access name of the group.

SNMPv3 Community Table Information
This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP
engine.The following command displays SNMPv3 community information:
show snmp­server v3 community
Command mode: All
Index
Name
User Name
Tag
­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­
trap1
public
v1v2only
v1v2trap

Table 13. SNMPv3 Community Table Information Parameters
Field

Description

Index

Displays the unique index value of a row in this table.

Name

Displays the community string, which represents the
configuration.

User Name

Displays the User Security Model (USM) user name.

Tag

40

Displays the community tag. This tag specifies a set of transport
endpoints from which a command responder application
accepts management requests and to which a command
responder application sends an SNMP trap.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information
The following command displays SNMPv3 target address information:
show snmp­server v3 target­address
Command mode: All
This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information, which is
stored in the SNMP engine.
Name
Transport Addr
Port Taglist
Params
­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
trap1
47.81.25.66
162 v1v2trap
v1v2param

Table 14. SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Field

Description

Name

Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated
with this snmpTargetAddrEntry.

Transport
Addr

Displays the transport addresses.

Port

Displays the SNMP UDP port number.

Taglist

This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select
target addresses for a particular SNMP message.

Params

The value of this object identifies an entry in the
snmpTargetParamsTable. The identified entry contains SNMP
parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to
this transport address.

Chapter 2: Information Commands

41

SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information
The following command displays SNMPv3 target parameters information:
show snmp­server v3 target­parameters
Command mode: All
Name
MP Model
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­
v1v2param
snmpv2c

User Name
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
v1v2only

Sec Model
­­­­­­­­­
snmpv1

Sec Level
­­­­­­­­­
noAuthNoPriv

Table 15. SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information

42

Field

Description

Name

Displays the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated
with this snmpTargeParamsEntry.

MP Model

Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating
SNMP messages using this entry.

User Name

Displays the securityName, which identifies the entry on whose
behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry.

Sec Model

Displays the security model used when generating SNMP
messages using this entry. The system may choose to return an
inconsistentValue error if an attempt is made to set this
variable to a value for a security model which the system does
not support.

Sec Level

Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP
messages using this entry.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

SNMPv3 Notify Table Information
The following command displays the SNMPv3 Notify table:
show snmp­server v3 notify
Command mode: All
Name
Tag
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
v1v2trap
v1v2trap

Table 16. SNMPv3 Notify Table Information

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Field

Description

Name

The locally arbitrary, but unique identifier associated with this
snmpNotifyEntry.

Tag

This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries
in the snmpTargetAddrTable. Any entry in the
snmpTargetAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the
value of this entry, is selected. If this entry contains a value of
zero length, no entries are selected.

Chapter 2: Information Commands

43

SNMPv3 Dump Information
The following command displays SNMPv3 information:
show snmp­server v3
Command mode: All
usmUser Table:
User Name
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
adminmd5
adminsha
v1v2only
vacmAccess Table:
Group Name Prefix Model
­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­
v1v2grp
snmpv1
admingrp
usm

Protocol
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
HMAC_MD5, DES PRIVACY
HMAC_SHA, DES PRIVACY
NO AUTH, NO PRIVACY

Level
­­­­­­­­­­­­
noAuthNoPriv
authPriv

vacmViewTreeFamily Table:
View Name
Subtree
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
iso
1
v1v2only
1
v1v2only
1.3.6.1.6.3.15
v1v2only
1.3.6.1.6.3.16
v1v2only
1.3.6.1.6.3.18

Match
­­­­­­
exact
exact

ReadV
­­­­­­­
iso
iso

Mask
­­­­­­­­­­­­

vacmSecurityToGroup Table:
All active SNMPv3 groups are listed below:
Sec Model User Name
­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
snmpv1
v1v2only
usm
adminmd5
usm
adminsha

WriteV
­­­­­­­
iso
iso

NotifyV
­­­­­­­
v1v2only
iso

Type
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
included
included
excluded
excluded
excluded

Group Name
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
v1v2grp
admingrp
admingrp

snmpCommunity Table:
Index
Name
User Name
Tag
­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­
snmpNotify Table:
Name
Tag
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
snmpTargetAddr Table:
Name
Transport Addr Port Taglist
Params
­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
snmpTargetParams Table:
Name
MP Model User Name
Sec Model Sec Level
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­

44

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

General System Information
The following command displays system information:
show sys­info
Command mode: All
System Information at 13:15:04 Tue Mar 17, 2015
Time zone: No timezone configured
Daylight Savings Time Status: Disabled
Lenovo Flex System Fabric CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch
Switch has been up for 0 days, 0 hours, 53 minutes and 20 seconds.
Last boot: 12:26:24 Tue Mar 17, 2015 (reset from console)
IP (If 1) address: 0.0.0.0
MAC address: 74:99:75:8a:94:00
Internal Management Port MAC Address: 74:99:75:8a:94:ef
Internal Management Port IP Address (if 128): 10.241.9.130
External Management Port MAC Address: 74:99:75:8a:94:fe
External Management Port IP Address (if 127):
Software Version 8.2.1 (FLASH image2), active configuration.
Boot kernel version 8.2.1

Chassis MTM
Chassis Serial Num
Hardware Part Number
Hardware Revision
Serial Number
Manufacturing Date (WWYY)
PCBA Part Number
PCBA Revision
PCBA Number
Board Revision
PLD Firmware Version

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

8721A1G
06MBGH4
00FM512
05
Y010CM319030
1113
BAC­00107­01
0
00
05
0.14

Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature
Temperature

:
:
:
:
:
:

45
44
34
44
50
54

Warning
Shutdown
Inlet
Exhaust
Asic Max
FCM Max

Power Consumption

C (Warning at 70 C / Recover at 65 C)
C (Shutdown at 82 C / Recover at 77 C)
C
C
C (Warning at 100 C / Shutdown at 108 C)
C

: 102.960 W (12.232 V

8.417 A)

Switch is in I/O Module Bay 1

Note: The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of
the sensors exceeds the temperature threshold. There will be a warning from the
software if any of the sensors exceeds this temperature threshold. The switch will
shut down if the power supply overheats.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

45

System information includes:











System date and time
Switch model
Switch name and location
Time of last boot
MAC address of the switch management processor
Software image file and version number, and configuration name.
IP address of the management interface
Hardware version and part number
Log‐in banner, if one is configured
Internal temperatures

Show Software Version Brief
Table 17 lists commands used for displaying specific entries from the general
system information screen.
Table 17. Specific System Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show version brief
Displays the software version number, image file, and configuration name.
Command mode: All
Sample output for command show version brief:
Software Version 8.2.1 (FLASH image2), active configuration.

Displays the software version number, image file, and configuration name.

46

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Show Recent Syslog Messages
The following command displays system log messages:
show logging [messages] [severity <0‐7>] [reverse]
Command mode: All
Current syslog configuration:
host 0.0.0.0 via MGT port, severity 7, facility 0
host2 0.0.0.0 via MGT port, severity2 7, facility2 0
console enabled
severity level of console output 6
severity level of write to flash 7
syslogging all features
Syslog source loopback interface not set

Date
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul
Jul

8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

Time
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:41
17:25:42
17:25:42
17:25:42
17:25:42

Criticality level
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:
NOTICE
system:

Message
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on
link up on

port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port
port

INT1
INT8
INT7
INT2
INT1
INT4
INT3
INT6
INT5
EXT4
EXT1
EXT3
EXT2
INT3
INT2
INT4
INT3
INT6

Each syslog message has a severity level associated with it, included in text form as
a prefix to the log message. One of eight different prefixes is used, depending on
the condition for which the administrator is being notified.









EMERG
ALERT
CRIT
ERR
WARNING
NOTICE
INFO
DEBUG

Indicates the system is unusable
Indicates action should be taken immediately
Indicates critical conditions
Indicates error conditions or errored operations
Indicates warning conditions
Indicates a normal but significant condition
Indicates an information message
Indicates a debug‐level message

The severity option filters only syslog messages with a specific severity level
between 0 and 7, from EMERG to DEBUG correspondingly.
The reverse option displays the output in reverse order, from the newest entry to
the oldest.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

47

Show Security Audit Log Messages
The following commands display security audit log messages:
Table 18. Security Audit Log Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show sal [reverse]
Displays the most recent security audit log messages. The reverse option
displays the output in reverse order, from the newest entry to the oldest.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
show sal sequence 
Displays the security audit log messages associated with the specified
sequence number or range.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
show sal severity <1‐6> [reverse]
Displays only the security audit log messages with a specific severity level
between 1 and 6, from FATAL to INFORMATION correspondingly. The
reverse option displays the output in reverse order, from the newest entry to
the oldest.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
Note: Security Audit Log commands are not available in Stacking mode.
Command sample output for show sal:
2014 Jul 16 12:40:39 2000:30:0:0:0:0:2:95 000004DC 0x00000004 Warning
1B33D6C833832DA17E020817F40A2000 2EBBCC63AF754E04A21449CE49BFF70A 4 : IP:
New Management IP Address 10.30.2.95 configured
2014 Jul 16 12:40:39 2000:30:0:0:0:0:2:95 000004DD 0x00000004 Warning
1B33D6C833832DA17E020817F40A2000 2EBBCC63AF754E04A21449CE49BFF70A 4 : IP:
New Management Gateway 10.30.1.1 configured
2014 Jul 16 12:42:40 2000:30:0:0:0:0:2:95 000004DE 0x00000004 Warning
1B33D6C833832DA17E020817F40A2000 2EBBCC63AF754E04A21449CE49BFF70A 4 : IP:
New Management IP Address 10.30.2.95 configured
2014 Jul 16 12:42:40 2000:30:0:0:0:0:2:95 000004DF 0x00000004 Warning
1B33D6C833832DA17E020817F40A2000 2EBBCC63AF754E04A21449CE49BFF70A 4 : IP:
New Management Gateway 10.30.1.1 configured

Each security audit log message has a severity level associated with it, included in
text form as a prefix to the log message. One of six different prefixes is used,
depending on the condition for which the administrator is being notified.







48

FATAL
CRITICAL
MAJOR
MINOR
WARNING
INFORMATION

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Indicates the system is unusable
Indicates critical conditions
Indicates action should be taken immediately
Indicates error conditions or errored operations
Indicates warning conditions
Indicates an information message

User Status
The following command displays user status information:
show access user
Command mode: All except User EXEC
Usernames:
user
­ disabled
­ offline
oper
­ disabled
­ offline
admin
­ enabled
­ online
Current User ID table:
1: name USERID , ena, cos admin

1 session.
, password valid, offline

Current strong password settings:
strong password status: disabled

This command displays the status of the configured usernames.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

49

Stacking Information
Table 19 lists the Stacking information options.
Table 19. Stacking Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show stack switch
Displays information about each switch in the stack, including:


Configured Switch Number (csnum)



Attached Switch Number (asnum) when run on master switch



MAC address



Stacking state



UUID



Bay number

Command mode: All
show stack attached­switches
Displays information about each attached switch in the stack. Available only
on the master switch.
Command mode: All
show stack link
Displays link information for each switch in the stack, listed by attached
switch number.
Command mode: All
show stack name
Displays the name of the stack.
Command mode: All
show stack backup
Displays the unit number of the backup switch.
Command mode: All
show stack version
Displays the firmware version number for all attached switches.
Command mode: All
show stack path­map [csnum <1‐8>]
Displays the path used to send known unicast packets from one switch of the
stack to another.
Command mode: All

50

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 19. Stacking Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show stack push­status
Displays the status of the most recent firmware and configuration file push
from the master to member switches.
Command mode: All
show stack dynamic
Displays all stacking information.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

51

Stacking Switch Information
The following command displays Stacking switch information:
show stack switch
Command mode: All
Stack name: STK
Local switch is the master.
Local switch:
csnum
MAC
UUID
Bay Number
Switch Type
Chassis Type
Switch Mode (cfg)
Priority
Stack MAC

­
­
­
­
­
­
­
­
­

1
74:99:75:21:8d:00
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d
1
14
6 (Flex Enterprise)
Master
250
74:99:75:21:8d:1f

Master switch:
csnum
MAC
UUID
Bay Number

­
­
­
­

1
74:99:75:21:8d:00
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d
1

Backup switch:
csnum
MAC
UUID
Bay Number

­
­
­
­

5
74:99:75:21:8c:00
98c587636548429aba5010f8c62d4e27
1

Configured Switches:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
csnum
UUID
Bay
MAC
asnum
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
C1
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 1 74:99:75:21:8d:00 A1
C2
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 2 08:17:f4:84:34:00 A3
C3
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 3 08:17:f4:0a:2d:00 A2
C4
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 4 74:99:75:1c:77:00 A4
C5
98c587636548429aba5010f8c62d4e27 1 74:99:75:21:8c:00 A5
Attached Switches in Stack:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
asnum
UUID
Bay
MAC
csnum
State
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
A1
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 1 74:99:75:21:8d:00 C1 IN_STACK
A2
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 3 08:17:f4:0a:2d:00 C3 IN_STACK
A3
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 2 08:17:f4:84:34:00 C2 IN_STACK
A4
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 4 74:99:75:1c:77:00 C4 IN_STACK
A5
98c587636548429aba5010f8c62d4e27 1 74:99:75:21:8c:00 C5 IN_STACK

Stack switch information includes the following:
Stack name
Details about the local switch from which the command was issued
 Configured switch number and MAC of the Stack Master and Stack Backup
 Configured switch numbers and their associated assigned switch numbers
 Attached switch numbers and their associated configured switch numbers



52

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Attached Switches Information
The following command displays information about attached switches, when run
on master switch:
show stack attached­switches
Command mode: All
Attached Switches in Stack
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
asnum
UUID
Bay
MAC
csnum
State
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
A1
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 1 74:99:75:21:8d:00 C1 IN_STACK
A2
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 3 08:17:f4:0a:2d:00 C3 IN_STACK
A3
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 2 08:17:f4:84:34:00 C2 IN_STACK
A4
534c8ca1605846299148305adc9a1f6d 4 74:99:75:1c:77:00 C4 IN_STACK
A5
98c587636548429aba5010f8c62d4e27 1 74:99:75:21:8c:00 C5 IN_STACK

Stack Name Information
The following command displays the name of the stack:
show stack name
Command mode: All
Stack name: STK

Stack Backup Switch Information
The following command displays the unit number for the backup switch:
show stack backup
Command mode: All
Current config Backup unit number = 5

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

53

Stack Version Information
The following command displays firmware version information for each switch in
the stack:
show stack version
Command mode: All
Switch Firmware Versions:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
asnum csnum
MAC
S/W
Version
­­­­­ ­­­­­
­­­­­
­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
A1
C1
74:99:75:21:8d:00
image1 7.7.1.10
A2
C3
08:17:f4:0a:2d:00
image1 7.7.1.10
A3
C2
08:17:f4:84:34:00
image1 7.7.1.10
A4
C4
74:99:75:1c:77:00
image1 7.7.1.10
A5
C5
74:99:75:21:8c:00
image1 7.7.1.10

Serial #
­­­­­­­­­­­­
Y250CM28Y653
US7049000Y
Y010CM161680
Y010CM28E857
Y250CM28Y639

Stack Packet Path Information
The following command displays information about the path used to send known
unicast packets between the switches of a stack.
show stack path­map
Command mode: All
Packet path Information:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
To­>
Swu 1 |Swu 2 |Swu 3 |Swu 4 |Swu 5 |Swu 6 |Swu 7 |Swu 8 |
Swu 1 |
0 | 1:45 | 1:45 | 1:49 | 1:49 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
Swu 2 | 2:61 |
0 | 2:61 | 2:57 | 2:57 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
Swu 3 | 3:57 | 3:61 |
0 | 3:57 | 3:61 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
Swu 4 | 4:57 | 4:61 | 4:57 |
0 | 4:61 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
Swu 5 | 5:45 | 5:49 | 5:49 | 5:45 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
Swu 6 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
Swu 7 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
Swu 8 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |
0 |

54

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Stack Push Status Information
The following command displays the status of the most recent firmware and
configuration file push from the master to member switches:
show stack push­status
Command mode: All
Image 1 transfer status info:
Switch 08:17:f4:0a:2d:00:
not received ­ file
Switch 08:17:f4:84:34:00:
not received ­ file
Switch 74:99:75:1c:77:00:
not received ­ file
Switch 74:99:75:21:8c:00:
not received ­ file
Image 2 transfer status info:
Switch 08:17:f4:0a:2d:00:
not received ­ file
Switch 08:17:f4:84:34:00:
not received ­ file
Switch 74:99:75:1c:77:00:
not received ­ file
Switch 74:99:75:21:8c:00:
not received ­ file
Boot image transfer status info:
Switch 08:17:f4:0a:2d:00:
not received ­ file
Switch 08:17:f4:84:34:00:
not received ­ file
Switch 74:99:75:1c:77:00:
not received ­ file
Switch 74:99:75:21:8c:00:
not received ­ file

not sent or transfer in progress
not sent or transfer in progress
not sent or transfer in progress
not sent or transfer in progress

not sent or transfer in progress
not sent or transfer in progress
not sent or transfer in progress
not sent or transfer in progress

not sent or transfer in progress
not sent or transfer in progress
not sent or transfer in progress
not sent or transfer in progress

Config file transfer status info:
Switch 08:17:f4:0a:2d:00:
last receive successful
Switch 08:17:f4:84:34:00:
last receive successful
Switch 74:99:75:1c:77:00:
last receive successful
Switch 74:99:75:21:8c:00:
last receive successful

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

55

Layer 2 Information
The following commands display Layer 2 information.
Table 20. Layer 2 Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show dot1x information
Displays 802.1X Information. For details, see page 72.
Command mode: All
show spanning­tree
Displays Spanning Tree information, including the status (on or off), Spanning
Tree mode (RSTP, PVRST, or MSTP), and VLAN membership.
In addition to seeing if spanning tree groups (STGs) are enabled or disabled,
you can view the following STG bridge information:


Priority



Hello interval



Maximum age value



Forwarding delay



Aging time

You can also see the following port‐specific STG information:


Port alias and priority



Cost



State

For details, see page 74.
Command mode: All
show spanning­tree stp <1‐128> information
Displays information about a specific Spanning Tree Group. For details, see
page 79.
Command mode: All

56

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 20. Layer 2 Information Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show spanning­tree mst <0‐32> [information]
Displays Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) information for the
specified instance, including the MSTP digest and VLAN membership.
MSTP port information includes:


Port number and priority



Cost



State



Role



Designated bridge and port



Type

For details, see page 83.
Command mode: All
show spanning­tree mst configuration
Displays the current MSTP settings.
Command mode: All
show portchannel information
Displays the state of each port in the various static or LACP trunk groups. For
details, see page 85.
Command mode: All
show vlan
Displays VLAN configuration information for all configured VLANs,
including:


VLAN Number



VLAN Name



Status



Port membership of the VLAN

For details, see page 86.
Command mode: All
show failover trigger [|information]
Displays Layer 2 Failover information. For details, see page 63.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

57

Table 20. Layer 2 Information Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show hotlinks information
Displays Hot Links information. For details, see page 65.
Command mode: All
show layer2 information
Dumps all Layer 2 switch information available (10K or more, depending on
your configuration).
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software
on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump
commands.
Command mode: All

58

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

FDB Information
The forwarding database (FDB) contains information that maps the media access
control (MAC) address of each known device to the switch port where the device
address was learned. The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames
destined for a particular MAC address.
Note: The master forwarding database supports up to 128K MAC address entries
on the MP per switch.
Table 21. FDB Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show mac­address­table
Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database.
Command mode: All
For more information, see page 60.
show mac­address­table address 
Displays a single database entry by its MAC address. You are prompted to
enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC address using the format,
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. For example, 08:00:20:12:34:56.
You can also enter the MAC address using the format, xxxxxxxxxxxx.
For example, 080020123456.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table all
Displays both unicast (static and dynamic) and multicast (static) entries in the
Forwarding Database.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table configured static
Displays all configured static MAC entries in the FDB.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table interface port 
Displays all FDB entries for a particular port.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table multicast
Displays all Multicast MAC entries in the FDB.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table portchannel 
Displays all FDB entries for a particular trunk group (portchannel).
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table private­vlan 
Displays all FDB entries on a single private VLAN.
Command mode: All
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

59

Table 21. FDB Information Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show mac­address­table state {unknown|forward|trunk}
Displays all FDB entries for a particular state.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table static
Displays all static MAC entries in the FDB.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table vlan 
Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN.
Command mode: All

Show All FDB Information
The following command displays Forwarding Database information:
show mac­address­table
Command mode: All
MAC address
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
00:04:38:90:54:18
00:09:6b:9b:01:5f
00:09:6b:ca:26:ef
00:0f:06:ec:3b:00
00:11:43:c4:79:83

VLAN
­­­­
1
1
4095
4095
1

Port Trnk
­­­­ ­­­­
EXT4
INT13
MGT1
MGT1
EXT4

State
­­­­­
FWD
FWD
FWD
FWD
FWD

Permanent
­­­­­­­­­

P

An address that is in the forwarding (FWD) state, means that it has been learned by
the switch. When in the trunking (TRK) state, the port field represents the trunk
group number. If the state for the port is listed as unknown (UNK), the MAC address
has not yet been learned by the switch, but has only been seen as a destination
address.
When an address is in the unknown state, no outbound port is indicated, although
ports that reference the address as a destination will be listed under “Reference
ports”.

60

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Show FDB Multicast Address Information
The following commands display Multicast Forwarding Database information:
Table 22. Multicast FDB Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show mac­address­table multicast
Displays all Multicast MAC entries in the FDB.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table multicast address 
Displays a single FDB multicast entry by its MAC address. You are prompted
to enter the MAC address of the device. Enter the MAC address using the
format, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx. For example, 03:00:20:12:34:56.
You can also enter the MAC address using the format, xxxxxxxxxxxx.
For example, 030020123456.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table multicast interface
port 
Displays all FDB multicast entries for a particular port.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table multicast vlan 
Displays all FDB multicast entries on a single VLAN.
Command mode: All

Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database
To clear the entire FDB, refer to “Forwarding Database Maintenance” on page 589.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

61

Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information
Use these commands to display LACP status information about each port on the
CN4093.
Table 23. LACP Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show lacp aggregator 
Displays detailed information about the LACP aggregator.
Command mode: All
show lacp information
Displays a summary of LACP information. For details, see page 62.
Command mode: All
show interface port  lacp information
Displays LACP information about the selected port.
Command mode: All

Link Aggregation Control Protocol
The following command displays LACP information:
show lacp information
Command mode: All
port
mode
adminkey operkey
selected
prio aggr trunk status minlinks
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
1
active
1000
1000
individual 32768
­­
­­
down
1
2
active
2000
2000
suspended 32768
­­
­­
down
1
3
active
3000
2000
yes
32768
1
65*
up
1
4
active
3000
2000
suspended 32768
­­
65*
down
1
...
(*) LACP PortChannel is statically bound to the admin key

LACP dump includes the following information for each external port in the
CN4093:

62



mode

Displays the port’s LACP mode (active, passive, or off).



adminkey

Displays the value of the port’s adminkey.



operkey

Shows the value of the port’s operational key.



selected

Indicates whether the port has been selected to be part of a Link
Aggregation Group.



prio

Shows the value of the port priority.



aggr

Displays the aggregator associated with each port.



trunk

This value represents the LACP trunk group number.



status

Displays the status of LACP on the port (up, down or standby).



minlinks

Displays the minimum number of active links in the LACP trunk.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Layer 2 Failover Information Commands
The following command displays Layer 2 Failover information:
Table 24. Layer 2 Failover Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show failover trigger  [information]
Displays detailed information about the selected Layer 2 Failover trigger.
Command mode: All
show failover trigger [information]
Displays a summary of Layer 2 Failover information. For details, see page 63.
Command mode: All

Layer 2 Failover Information
The following command displays Layer 2 Failover information:
show failover trigger
Command mode: All
trunk 1
EXT2
EXT3

Operational
Operational

Control State: Auto Disabled
Member
Status
­­­­­­­­­
­­­­­­­­­­­
INT1
Operational
INT2
Operational
INT3
Operational
INT4
Operational
Trigger 2 Manual Monitor: Enabled
Trigger 2 limit: 0
Monitor State: Down
Member
Status
­­­­­­­­­
­­­­­­­­­­­
adminkey 62
EXT20
Failed
Control State: Auto Disabled
Member
Status
­­­­­­­­­
­­­­­­­­­­­
Physical ports
INTC1
Failed
Virtual ports
INTB1.2
Failed
INTB2.2
Failed
INTB3.2
Failed
INTB4.2
Failed
INTB5.2
Failed
...

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

63

A monitor port’s Failover status is Operational only if all the following conditions
hold true:


Port link is up.



If Spanning‐Tree is enabled, the port is in the Forwarding state.



If the port is a member of an LACP trunk group, the port is aggregated.

If any of these conditions are not true, the monitor port is considered to be failed.
A control port is considered to be operational if the monitor trigger state is Up. Even
if a port’s link status is Down, Spanning‐Tree status is Blocking, and the LACP
status is Not Aggregated, from a teaming perspective the port status is
Operational, since the trigger is Up.
A control portʹs status is displayed as Failed when the monitor trigger state is
Down or when the controlled port is a vPort which is not properly configured (UFP
feature is not enabled in switch, port is not configured as UFP port, vport is not
enabled or physical port is not enabled).

64

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Hot Links Information
The following command displays Hot Links information:
show hotlinks information
Command mode: All
Hot Links Info: Trigger
Current global Hot Links setting: ON
Hot Links BPDU flood: disabled
Hot Links FDB update: disabled
FDB update rate (pps): 500
Current Trigger 12 setting: enabled
name "TG­12", preempt enabled, fdelay 30 sec
Active state: None
Master settings:
port EXT2
Backup settings:
port EXT3

Hot Links information includes the following:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



Hot Links status (on or off)



Status of BPDU flood option



Status of FDB send option



Status and configuration of each Hot Links trigger

Chapter 2: Information Commands

65

Edge Control Protocol Information
The following commands display Edge Control Protocol (ECP) information.
Table 25. ECP Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show ecp channels
Displays all Edge Control Protocol (ECP) channels.
Command mode: All
show ecp retransmit­interval
Displays Edge Control Protocol (ECP) retransmit interval.
Command mode: All
show ecp upper­layer­protocols
Displays all registered Upper‐Level Protocols (ULPs).
Command mode: All

66

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

LLDP Information
The following commands display LLDP information.
Table 26. LLDP Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show lldp [information]
Displays LLDP information.
Command mode: All
show lldp port []
Displays Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) port information.
Command mode: All
show lldp port <1‐16> tlv evb
Displays Edge Virtual Bridge (EVB) type‐length‐value (TLV) information.
Command mode: All
show lldp port <1‐16> vport <1‐4> tlv evb
Displays Edge Virtual Bridge (EVB) type‐length‐value (TLV) information for
the specifiec virtual port.
Command mode: All
show lldp receive
Displays information about the LLDP receive state machine.
Command mode: All
show lldp remote­device [<1‐256>|detail|
|port []]
Displays information received from LLDP‐capable devices. To view a sample
display, see page 68.
Command mode: All
show lldp transmit
Displays information about the LLDP transmit state machine.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

67

LLDP Remote Device Information
The following command displays LLDP remote device information:
show lldp remote­device [<1‐256>|detail|port []]
Command mode: All
LLDP Remote Devices Information
Legend(possible values in DMAC column) :
NB
­ Nearest Bridge
­ 01­80­C2­00­00­0E
NnTB ­ Nearest non­TPMR Bridge ­ 01­80­C2­00­00­03
NCB ­ Nearest Customer Bridge ­ 01­80­C2­00­00­00
Total number of current entries: 1
LocalPort|Index|Remote Chassis ID|Remote Port|Remote System Name|DMAC
­­­­­­­­­|­­­­­|­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­|­­­­­­­­­­­|­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­|­­­­
EXTM
| 1
|74 99 75 df 88 00|2
|G8052­11
|NB

LLDP remote device information provides a summary of information about
remote devices connected to the switch. To view detailed information about a
device, as shown below, follow the command with the index number of the remote
device. To view detailed information about all devices, use the detail option.
Local Port Alias: EXT1
Remote Device Index
Remote Device TTL
Remote Device RxChanges
Chassis Type
Chassis Id
Port Type
Port Id
Port Description

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

15
99
false
Mac Address
00­18­b1­33­1d­00
Locally Assigned
23
EXT1

System Name
:
System Description : Lenovo Networking Operating System
RackSwitch G8264, Lenovo Networking OS: version 7.8.0.24,
Boot image: version 7.8.0.24
System Capabilities Supported : bridge, router
System Capabilities Enabled
: bridge, router
Remote Management Address:
Subtype
Address
Interface Subtype
Interface Number
Object Identifier

68

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

:
:
:
:
:

IPv4
10.100.120.181
ifIndex
128

Unidirectional Link Detection Information
The following commands show unidirectional link detection information.
Table 27. UDLD Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show interface port  udld
Displays UDLD information about the selected port.
Command mode: All
show udld
Displays all UDLD information.
Command mode: All

UDLD Port Information
The following command displays UDLD information for the selected port:
show interface port  udld
Command mode: All
UDLD information on port EXT1
Port enable administrative configuration setting: Enabled
Port administrative mode: normal
Port enable operational state: link up
Port operational state: advertisement
Port bidirectional status: bidirectional
Message interval: 15
Time out interval: 5
Neighbor cache: 1 neighbor detected
Entry #1
Expiration time: 31 seconds
Device Name:
Device ID: 00:da:c0:00:04:00
Port ID: EXT1

UDLD information includes the following:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



Status (enabled or disabled)



Mode (normal or aggressive)



Port state (link up or link down)



Bi‐directional status (unknown, unidirectional, bidirectional, TX‐RX loop,
neighbor mismatch)

Chapter 2: Information Commands

69

OAM Discovery Information
The following commands display OAM Discovery information.
Table 28. OAM Discovery Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show interface port  oam
Displays OAM information about the selected port.
Command mode: All
show oam
Displays all OAM information.
Command mode: All

OAM Port Information
The following command displays OAM information for the selected port:
show interface port  oam
Command mode: All
OAM information on port EXT1
State enabled
Mode active
Link up
Satisfied Yes
Evaluating No
Remote port information:
Mode active
MAC address 00:da:c0:00:04:00
Stable Yes
State valid Yes
Evaluating No

OAM port display shows information about the selected port and the peer to
which the link is connected.

70

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

vLAG Information
The following table lists the information commands for Virtual Link Aggregation
Group (vLAG) protocol.
Table 29. vLAG Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show vlag adminkey <1‐65535>
Displays vLAG LACP information.
Command mode: All
show vlag portchannel 
Displays vLAG static trunk group information.
Command mode: All
show vlag isl
Displays vLAG Inter‐Switch Link (ISL) information.
Command mode: All
show vlag information
Displays all vLAG information.
Command mode: All

vLAG Trunk Information
The following command displays vLAG information for the trunk group:
show vlag portchannel 
Command mode: All
vLAG is enabled on trunk 3
Protocol ­ Static
Current settings: enabled
ports: 60
Current L2 trunk hash settings:
smac
Current L3 trunk hash settings:
sip dip
Current ingress port hash: disabled
Current L4 port hash: disabled

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

71

802.1X Information
The following command displays 802.1X information:
show dot1x information
Command mode: All
System capability
System status
Protocol version
Guest VLAN status
Guest VLAN

:
:
:
:
:

Authenticator
disabled
1
disabled
none

Authenticator
Backend
Assigned
Port
Auth Mode
Auth Status
PAE State
Auth State
VLAN
­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­
*INT1 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*INT2 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
INT3 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*INT4 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*INT5 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*INT6 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*INT7 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
INT8 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
INT9 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*INT10 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*INT11 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*INT12 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
EXT1 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
EXT2 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*EXT3 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*EXT4 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
*EXT11 force­auth
unauthorized initialize
initialize
none
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
* ­ Port down or disabled

Note: The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from
the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of
Lenovo Switch that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are
installed.
The following table describes the IEEE 802.1X parameters.
Table 30. 802.1X Parameter Descriptions
Parameter

Description

Port

Displays each port’s alias.

Auth Mode

Displays the Access Control authorization mode for the
port. The Authorization mode can be one of the following:

Auth Status

72

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2



force‐unauth



auto



force‐auth

Displays the current authorization status of the port, either
authorized or unauthorized.

Table 30. 802.1X Parameter Descriptions (continued)
Parameter

Description

Authenticator
PAE State

Displays the Authenticator Port Access Entity State. The
PAE state can be one of the following:

Backend Auth
State

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



initialize



disconnected



connecting



authenticating



authenticated



aborting



held



forceAuth

Displays the Backend Authorization State. The Backend
Authorization state can be one of the following:


initialize



request



response



success



fail



timeout



idle

Chapter 2: Information Commands

73

Spanning Tree Information
The following command displays Spanning Tree information:
show spanning­tree
Command mode: All
Note: Based on the Spanning Tree mode enabled, the command output differs:


VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree mode (pvrst):

Pvst+ compatibility mode enabled
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Spanning Tree Group 2: On (PVRST)
VLANs: 4000
Current Root:
8002 74:99:75:bd:b6:00
Parameters:

Priority
32770

Path­Cost
0
Hello
2

MaxAge
20

Port
0

Hello
2

FwdDel
15

MaxAge
20

Aging
300

FwdDel
15

Topology Change Counts
0

Port
Prio
Cost
State Role Designated Bridge
Des Port Type
­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­
EXT13
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8036 P2P
EXT14
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8036 P2P
EXT15
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8036 P2P
EXT16
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8036 P2P
EXT17
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8047 P2P
EXT20
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8047 P2P
EXT21
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8047 P2P
EXT22
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8047 P2P
! = Automatic path cost.
+ = Portchannel cost, not the individual port cost.
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Spanning Tree Group 32: On (PVRST)
VLANs: 1
Current Root:
8020 74:99:75:bd:b6:00
Parameters:

Priority
32800

Path­Cost
0
Hello
2

MaxAge
20

Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel
0
2
20
15
FwdDel
15

Aging
300

Topology Change Counts
0

Port
Prio
Cost
State Role Designated Bridge
Des Port Type
­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­
Note: There is no active STP port in Spanning Tree Group 32.
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Spanning Tree Group 128: Off (PVRST), FDB aging timer 300
VLANs: 4095
Port
Prio
Cost
­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­
MGT1
0
0
* = STP turned off for this

74

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

State Role Designated Bridge
Des Port Type
­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­
FWD *
port.



Rapid Spanning Tree mode (rstp)

Pvst+ compatibility mode enabled
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Spanning Tree Group 1: On (RSTP)
VLANs: 1 4000 4095
Current Root:
0000 74:99:75:bd:c4:00
Parameters:

Priority
32768

Path­Cost Port
990
EXT15
Hello
2

MaxAge
20

Hello
2

FwdDel
15

MaxAge
20

Aging
300

FwdDel
15

Topology Change Counts
1

Port
Prio
Cost
State Role Designated Bridge
Des Port Type
­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­
EXT13
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8036 P2P
EXT14
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8036 P2P
EXT15
128
990!+ FWD
ROOT 0000­74:99:75:bd:c4:00
8046 P2P
EXT16
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8036 P2P
EXT17
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8047 P2P
EXT20
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8047 P2P
EXT21
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8047 P2P
EXT22
128
4990!+ DISC DESG 8002­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8047 P2P
MGT1
0
0
FWD *
* = STP turned off for this port.
! = Automatic path cost.
+ = Portchannel cost, not the individual port cost.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

75



Multiple Spanning Tree mode (mstp)

Pvst+ compatibility mode enabled
Mstp Digest: 0x5e5b21c3e2cb4f144cabc50e88b9bdea
Common Internal Spanning Tree:
VLANs MAPPED:
VLANs: 4095

2­3999 4001­4094

Current Root:
0000 74:99:75:bd:c4:00

Path­Cost Port
0
EXT15

Cist Regional Root:
0000 74:99:75:bd:c4:00

MaxAge
20

FwdDel
15

Path­Cost
990

Parameters:

Priority MaxAge FwdDel Hops
4096
20
15
20
Des Port Hello Type
Port
Prio
Cost
State Role Designated Bridge
­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­
EXT13
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8056
2
P2P
EXT14
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8056
2
P2P
EXT15
128
990!+ FWD
ROOT 0000­74:99:75:bd:c4:00
8046
2
P2P
EXT16
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8056
2
P2P
EXT17
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
2
P2P
EXT20
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
2
P2P
EXT21
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
2
P2P
EXT22
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
2
P2P
MGT1
0
0
FWD *
* = STP turned off for this port.
! = Automatic path cost.
+ = Portchannel cost, not the individual port cost.
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Spanning Tree Group 2: On (MSTP)
VLANs MAPPED: 4000
VLANs: 4000
Current Root:
8000 74:99:75:bd:b6:00
Parameters:

Priority
32768

Path­Cost
0
Aging
300

Port
0

Topology Change Counts
3

Port
Prio
Cost
State Role Designated Bridge
Des Port Type
­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­
EXT13
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8056
P2P
EXT14
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8056
P2P
EXT15
128
990!+ FWD
ROOT 0000­74:99:75:bd:c4:00
8046
P2P
EXT16
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8056
P2P
EXT17
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
P2P
EXT20
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
P2P
EXT21
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
P2P
EXT22
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
P2P
! = Automatic path cost.
+ = Portchannel cost, not the individual port cost.

76

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

In addition to seeing if Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) is enabled or
disabled, you can view the following CIST bridge information:
Table 31. CIST Parameter Descriptions
Parameter

Description

CIST Root

The CIST Root shows information about the root bridge for
the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). Values on this
row of information refer to the CIST root.

CIST Regional
Root

The CIST Regional Root shows information about the root
bridge for this MSTP region. Values on this row of
information refer to the regional root.

Priority (bridge)

The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the
network will become the STP root bridge.

MaxAge

The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the
maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a
configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure
the STP network.

FwdDel

The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the
amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it
changes from discarding to learning and from learning state
to forwarding state.

Hops

The maximum number of bridge hops a packet can traverse
before it is dropped. The default value is 20.

The following port‐specific CIST information is also displayed:
Table 32. CIST Parameter Descriptions

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Parameter

Description

Prio (port)

The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge
port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that
has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the
port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated
port for the segment.

Cost

The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the
designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster
the port, the lower the path cost. A setting of 0 indicates that
the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link
speed has been auto negotiated.

State

The state field shows the current state of the port. The state
field can be either Discarding (DISC), Learning (LRN), or
Forwarding (FWD).

Role

The Role field shows the current role of this port in the
Spanning Tree. The port role can be one of the following:
Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT), Alternate (ALTN), Backup
(BKUP), Disabled (DSB), Master (MAST), or Unknown (UNK).

Chapter 2: Information Commands

77

Table 32. CIST Parameter Descriptions (continued)

78

Parameter

Description

Designated
Bridge

The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge
connected to each port, if applicable. Information includes
the priority (in hexadecimal notation) and MAC address of
the Designated Bridge.

Designated Port

The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which
this port is connected.

Hello

The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the
root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the
root bridge hello value.

Type

Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an
edge port. Link type values are AUTO, P2P, or SHARED.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

RSTP/PVRST Information
The following command displays RSTP/PVRST information:
show spanning­tree stp <1‐128> information
Command mode: All
Spanning Tree Group 1: On (RSTP)
VLANs: 1
Current Root:
ffff 00:13:0a:4f:7d:d0
Parameters:

Priority
61440

Path­Cost
0
Hello
2

Port Prio Cost
State
­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­
INT1
0
0 DSB *
INT2
0
0 DSB *
INT3
0
0 FWD *
INT4
0
0 DSB *
INT5
0
0 DSB *
INT6
0
0 DSB *
INT7
0
0 DSB *
INT8
0
0 DSB *
INT9
0
0 DSB *
INT10
0
0 DSB *
INT11
0
0 DSB *
INT12
0
0 DSB *
INT13
0
0 DSB *
INT14
0
0 DSB *
EXT1
128
2000 FWD
EXT2
128
2000 DISC
EXT3
128
2000 FWD
EXT4
128
20000 DISC
...
* = STP turned off for this

MaxAge
20

Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel
EXT4
2
20
15
FwdDel
15

Aging
300

Role Designated Bridge
Des Port
­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­

DESG
BKUP
DESG
BKUP

8000­00:11:58:ae:39:00
8000­00:11:58:ae:39:00
8000­00:11:58:ae:39:00
8000­00:11:58:ae:39:00

8011
8011
8013
8013

Type
­­­­­

P2P
P2P
P2P
Shared

port.

Note: The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from
the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of
Flex System unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are
installed.
You can configure the switch software to use the IEEE 802.1D (2004) Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (PVRST)
or IEEE 802.1Q (2003) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP).

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

79

If RSTP/PVRST is turned on, you can view the following bridge information for the
Spanning Tree Group:
Table 33. RSTP/PVRST Bridge Parameter Descriptions
Parameter

Description

Current Root

The Current Root shows information about the root bridge
for the Spanning Tree. Information includes the priority (in
hexadecimal notation) and the MAC address of the root.

Priority (bridge)

The Bridge Priority parameter controls which bridge on the
network will become the STP root bridge.

Hello

The Hello Time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often
the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol
data unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses
the root bridge hello value.

MaxAge

The Maximum Age parameter specifies, in seconds, the
maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a
configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures
the STP network.

FwdDel

The Forward Delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the
amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it
changes from discarding to learning and from learning state
to forwarding state.

Aging

The Aging Time parameter specifies, in seconds, the amount
of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a
station before removing the station from the Forwarding
Database.

The following port‐specific information is also displayed:
Table 34. RSTP/PVRST Port Parameter Descriptions

80

Parameter

Description

Prio (port)

The Port Priority parameter helps determine which bridge
port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that
has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the
port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated
port for the segment.

Cost

The port Path Cost parameter is used to help determine the
designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster
the port, the lower the path cost. A setting of 0 indicates that
the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link
speed has been auto negotiated.

State

The State field shows the current state of the port. The State
field in RSTP mode can be one of the following: Discarding
(DISC), Learning (LRN), Forwarding (FWD), or Disabled (DSB).

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 34. RSTP/PVRST Port Parameter Descriptions (continued)
Parameter

Description

Role

The Role field shows the current role of this port in the
Spanning Tree. The port role can be one of the following:
Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT), Alternate (ALTN), Backup
(BKUP), Disabled (DSB), Master (MAST).

Designated
Bridge

The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge
connected to each port, if applicable. Information includes
the priority (in hexadecimal notation) and MAC address of
the Designated Bridge.

Designated Port

The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which
this port is connected.

Type

Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an
edge port. Link type values are AUTO, P2P, or SHARED.

Spanning Tree Bridge Information
The following command displays Spanning Tree bridge information:
show spanning­tree [vlan ] bridge
Command mode: All
Vlan
­­­­­­
1

Priority
­­­­­­­­
61440

Hello
­­­­­­
2

MaxAge
­­­­­­
20

FwdDel
­­­­­­
15

Protocol
­­­­­­­­
PVRST

Table 35. Bridge Parameter Descriptions

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Parameter

Description

VLANs

VLANs that are part of the Spanning Tree Group.

Priority

The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the
network will become the STP root bridge. The lower the
value, the higher the priority.

Hello

The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the
root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the
root bridge hello value.

MaxAge

The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the
maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a
configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure
the STP network.

FwdDel

The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the
amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it
changes from discaring to learning and from learning state to
forwarding state.

Protocol

The STP protocol run by the Spanning Tree Group.
Chapter 2: Information Commands

81

Spanning Tree Root Information
The following command displays information about the root switches in every STP
group:
show spanning­tree root
Command mode: All
Instance
­­­­­­­­­
1
3
6
17

Root ID
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
8001 08:17:f4:32:95:00
8003 08:17:f4:32:95:00
8001 08:17:f4:fb:d8:00
8011 08:17:f4:32:95:00

Path­Cost
­­­­­­­­­
0
0
20000
0

Hello
­­­­­
2
2
2
2

MaxAge
­­­­­­
20
20
20
20

FwdDel Root Port
­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­
15
0
15
0
15
27
15
0

Table 36. Bridge Parameter Descriptions

82

Parameter

Description

Instance

Spanning Tree instance

Root ID

Indicates the root switch MAC address and port number.

Path‐Cost

The port path cost is used to help determine the designated
port for a segment. Port path cost is based on the port speed.

Hello

The hello time parameter specifies, in seconds, how often the
root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data
unit (BPDU). Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the
root bridge hello value.

MaxAge

The maximum age parameter specifies, in seconds, the
maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a
configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure
the STP network.

FwdDel

The forward delay parameter specifies, in seconds, the
amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it
changes from discarding to learning and from learning state
to forwarding state.

Root Port

Port number allocated to the STP instance on the root switch.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Multiple Spanning Tree Information
The following command displays Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP) information:
show spanning­tree mst <0‐32> information
Command mode: All
Mstp Digest: 0x5e5b21c3e2cb4f144cabc50e88b9bdea
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Spanning Tree Group 2: On (MSTP)
VLANs MAPPED: 4000
VLANs: 4000
Current Root:
8000 74:99:75:bd:b6:00
Parameters:

Priority
32768

Path­Cost
0
Aging
300

Port
0

Topology Change Counts
3

Port
Prio
Cost
State Role Designated Bridge
Des Port Type
­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­
EXT13
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8056
P2P
EXT14
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8056
P2P
EXT15
128
990!+ FWD
ROOT 0000­74:99:75:bd:c4:00
8046
P2P
EXT16
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8056
P2P
EXT17
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
P2P
EXT20
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
P2P
EXT21
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
P2P
EXT22
128
200!+ FWD
DESG 1000­74:99:75:bd:b6:00
8066
P2P
! = Automatic path cost.
+ = Portchannel cost, not the individual port cost.

The following port‐specific MSTP information is also displayed:
Table 37. MSTP Parameter Descriptions

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Parameter

Description

Prio (port)

The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge
port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that
has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the
port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated
port for the segment.

Cost

The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the
designated port for a segment. Generally speaking, the faster
the port, the lower the path cost. A setting of 0 indicates that
the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link
speed has been auto negotiated.

State

The state field shows the current state of the port. The state
field can be either Discarding (DISC), Learning (LRN), or
Forwarding (FWD).

Chapter 2: Information Commands

83

Table 37. MSTP Parameter Descriptions (continued)

84

Parameter

Description

Role

The Role field shows the current role of this port in the
Spanning Tree. The port role can be one of the following:
Designated (DESG), Root (ROOT), Alternate (ALTN), Backup
(BKUP), Disabled (DSB), Master (MAST), or Unknown (UNK).

Designated
Bridge

The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge
connected to each port, if applicable. Information includes
the priority (in hexadecimal notation) and MAC address of
the Designated Bridge.

Designated Port

The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which
this port is connected.

Type

Type of link connected to the port, and whether the port is an
edge port. Link type values are AUTO, P2P, or SHARED.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Trunk Group Information
The following command displays Trunk Group information:
show portchannel information
Command mode: All
Trunk group 1: Enabled
Protocol ­ Static
Port state:
EXT1: STG 1 forwarding
EXT2: STG 1 forwarding

When trunk groups are configured, you can view the state of each port in the
various trunk groups.
Note: If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to
forwarding, the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

85

VLAN Information
The following commands display VLAN information.
Table 38. VLAN Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show vlan  [information]
Displays general VLAN information.
show vlan private­vlan [type]
Displays private VLAN information. The type option lists only the VLAN
type for each private VLAN: community, isolated or primary.
Command mode: All
show vlan information
Displays information about all VLANs, including:


VLAN number and name



Port membership



VLAN status (enabled or disabled)



Protocol VLAN status



Private VLAN status



Spanning Tree membership



VMAP configuration

Command mode: All
show protocol­vlan 
Displays protocol VLAN information.
Command mode: All

86

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

The following command displays VLAN information:
show vlan []
Command mode: All
VLAN
­­­­
1
10
4095

Name
Status MGT
Ports
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­ ­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Default VLAN
ena
dis INTA1­EXT22
VLAN 10
ena
dis empty
Mgmt VLAN
ena
ena EXTM MGT1

Primary
­­­­­­­

Secondary
­­­­­­­­­

Type
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

Ports
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

Note: The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from
the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of
Lenovo Switch that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are
installed.
This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that
have an active link state. Port membership is represented in slot/port format.
VLAN information includes:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



VLAN Number



VLAN Type



VLAN Name



Status



Management status of the VLAN



Port membership of the VLAN



Protocol‐based VLAN information



Private VLAN configuration

Chapter 2: Information Commands

87

Layer 3 Information
The following commands display Layer 3 information.
Table 39. Layer 3 Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show arp
Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) information. For details, see
page 94.
Command mode: All
show interface ip []
Displays IPv4 interface information. For details, see page 121.
Command mode: All
show ikev2
Displays IKEv2 information. For more information options, see page 125.
Command mode: All
show ip bgp information [] []
Displays Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) information. For details, see page 97.
Command mode: All
show ip dns
Displays the current Domain Name System settings.
Command mode: All
show ip ecmp
Displays ECMP static route information. For details, see page 112.
Command mode: All
show ip gateway <1‐4>
Displays the current gateway settings.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp
Displays IGMP Information. For more IGMP information options, see
page 113.
Command mode: All
show ip information
Displays all IP information.
Command mode: All

88

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 39. Layer 3 Information Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip interface brief
Displays IP Information. For details, see page 124.
IP information, includes:


IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, VLAN
number, and operational status.



Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured
gateway to use, gateway number, IP address, and health status.



IP forwarding settings, network filter settings, route map settings.

Command mode: All
show ip ospf information
Displays OSPF information. For more OSPF information options, see page 98.
Command mode: All
show ip pim component [<1‐2>]
Displays Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) component information. For
more PIM information options, see page 129.
Command mode: All
show ip rip interface
Displays RIP user’s configuration. For details, see page 107.
Command mode: All
show ip route
Displays all routes configured on the switch. For details, see page 92.
Command mode: All
show ip slp
Displays information about the Service Location Protocol (SLP) configuration.
For command options, see page 155.
Command mode: All
show ip vrrp information
Displays VRRP information. For details, see page 120.
Command mode: All
show ipsec manual­policy
Displays information about manual key management policy for IP security.
For more information options, see page 127.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 gateway6 <1,3‐4>
Displays the current IPv6 default gateway configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

89

Table 39. Layer 3 Information Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show ipv6 interface []
Displays IPv6 interface information. For details, see page 122.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld groups
Displays Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) information. For more MLD
information options, see page 118.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 neighbors
Displays IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache information. For more information
options, see page 110.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf information
Displays OSPFv3 information. For more OSPFv3 information options, see
page 103.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 pmtu []
Displays IPv6 Path MTU information. For details, see page 123.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 prefix
Displays IPv6 Neighbor Discovery prefix information. For details, see
page 111.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 route
Displays IPv6 routing information. For more information options, see
page 108.
Command mode: All
show layer3
Dumps all Layer 3 switch information available (10K or more, depending on
your configuration).
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software
on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump
commands.
Command mode: All

90

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IP Routing Information
Using the commands listed below, you can display all or a portion of the IP routes
currently held in the switch.
Table 40. Route Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip route [all]
Displays all routes configured in the switch. For more information, see
page 92.
Command mode: All
show ip route address 
Displays a single route by destination IP address.
Command mode: All
show ip route ecmphash
Displays the current ECMP hashing mechanism.
Command mode: All
show ip route gateway 
Displays routes to a single gateway.
Command mode: All
show ip route interface 
Displays routes on a single interface.
Command mode: All
show ip route static
Displays static routes configured on the switch.
Command mode: All
show ip route tag {address|bgp|broadcast|fixed|martian|
|multicast|ospf|rip|static}
Displays routes of a single tag. For a description of IP routing tags, see Table 42
on page 92.
Command mode: All
show ip route type {broadcast|direct|indirect|local|
|martian|multicast}
Displays routes of a single type. For a description of IP routing types, see
Table 41 on page 92.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

91

Show All IP Route Information
The following command displays IP route information:
show ip route
Command mode: All
Status code: * ­ best
Destination
Mask
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
* 12.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
* 12.0.0.1
255.255.255.255
* 12.255.255.255 255.255.255.255
* 12.0.0.0
255.0.0.0
* 12.0.0.1
255.255.255.255
* 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255
* 224.0.0.0
224.0.0.0
* 224.0.0.5
255.255.255.255

Gateway
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
11.0.0.1
11.0.0.1
11.255.255.255
12.0.0.1
12.0.0.1
12.255.255.255
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0

Type
­­­­­­­­­
direct
local
broadcast
direct
local
broadcast
martian
multicast

Tag
Metric If
­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­ ­­­
fixed
128
addr
128
broadcast
128
fixed
12
addr
12
broadcast
2
martian
addr

The following table describes the Type parameters.
Table 41. IP Routing Type Parameters
Parameter

Description

indirect

The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded
through a router at the Gateway address.

direct

Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet
attached to the switch.

local

Indicates a route to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.

broadcast

Indicates a broadcast route.

martian

The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out.
Packets to this destination are discarded.

multicast

Indicates a multicast route.

The following table describes the Tag parameters.
Table 42. IP Routing Tag Parameters

92

Parameter

Description

fixed

The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch.

static

The address is a static route which has been configured on the
CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch.

address

The address belongs to one of the switch’s IP interfaces.

rip

The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol
(RIP).

ospf

The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First (OSPF).

bgp

The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol (BGP).

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 42. IP Routing Tag Parameters (continued)

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Parameter

Description

broadcast

Indicates a broadcast address.

martian

The address belongs to a filtered group.

multicast

Indicates a multicast address.

Chapter 2: Information Commands

93

ARP Information
The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry, address
status flags (see Table 44 on page 95), VLAN and port for the address, and port
referencing information.
Table 43. ARP Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show [ip] arp [all]
Displays all ARP entries. including:


IP address and MAC address of each entry



Address status flag (see below)



The VLAN and port to which the address belongs



The elapsed time (in seconds) since the ARP entry was learned

For more information, see page 95.
Command mode: All
show [ip] arp find 
Displays a single ARP entry by IP address.
Command mode: All
show [ip] arp interface port 
Displays the ARP entries on a single port.
Command mode: All
show [ip] arp reply
Displays the ARP address list: IP address, IP mask, MAC address, and VLAN
flags.
Command mode: All
show [ip] arp static
Displays all static ARP entries.
Command mode: All
show [ip] arp vlan 
Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN.
Command mode: All

94

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Show All ARP Entry Information
The following command displays ARP information:
show arp
Command mode: All
IP address
Flags
MAC address
VLAN
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­
12.20.1.1
00:15:40:07:20:42 4095
12.20.20.16
00:30:13:e3:44:14 4095
12.20.20.18
00:30:13:e3:44:14 4095
12.20.23.111
00:1f:29:95:f7:e5 4095

Age Port
­­­ ­­­­­
0 INT8
2 INT8
2 INT6
6 INT6

The Port field shows the target port of the ARP entry.
The Flags field is interpreted as follows:
Table 44. ARP Dump Flag Parameters
Flag

Description

P

Permanent entry created for switch IP interface.

R

Indirect route entry.

U

Unresolved ARP entry. The MAC address has not been learned.

ARP Address List Information
The following command displays owned ARP address list information:
show arp reply
Command mode: All
IP address
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
205.178.18.66
205.178.50.1
205.178.18.64

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

IP mask
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255
255.255.255.255

MAC address
VLAN Pass­Up
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­
00:70:cf:03:20:04
P
00:70:cf:03:20:06
1
00:70:cf:03:20:05
1

Chapter 2: Information Commands

95

BGP Information
The following commands display BGP information.
Table 45. BGP Peer Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip bgp aggregate­address
Displays BGP peer routes. See page 97 for a sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip bgp information
Displays the BGP routing table. See page 97 for a sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip bgp neighbor information
Displays BGP peer information. See page 96 for a sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip bgp neighbor summary
Displays peer summary information such as AS, message received, message
sent, up/down, state. See page 97 for a sample output.
Command mode: All

BGP Peer information
Following is an example of the information provided by the following command:
show ip bgp neighbor information
Command mode: All
BGP Peer Information:
3: 2.1.1.1
, version 4, TTL 225
Remote AS: 100, Local AS: 100, Link type: IBGP
Remote router ID: 3.3.3.3,
Local router ID: 1.1.201.5
BGP status: idle, Old status: idle
Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0
Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0
Keepalive: 60, Holdtime: 180, MinAdvTime: 60
LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0)
Established state transitions: 1
4: 2.1.1.4
, version 4, TTL 225
Remote AS: 100, Local AS: 100, Link type: IBGP
Remote router ID: 4.4.4.4,
Local router ID: 1.1.201.5
BGP status: idle, Old status: idle
Total received packets: 0, Total sent packets: 0
Received updates: 0, Sent updates: 0
Keepalive: 60, Holdtime: 180, MinAdvTime: 60
LastErrorCode: unknown(0), LastErrorSubcode: unspecified(0)
Established state transitions: 1

96

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

BGP Summary Information
Following is an example of the information provided by the following command:
show ip bgp neighbor summary
Command mode: All
BGP Peer Summary Information:
Peer
V
AS
MsgRcvd MsgSent Up/Down
State
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­
1: 205.178.23.142 4
142
113
121 00:00:28 established
2: 205.178.15.148 0
148
0
0 never
connect

BGP Aggregation Information
Following is an example of the information provided by the following command:
show ip bgp aggregate­address
Command mode: All
Current BGP aggregation settings:
1: addr 4.2.0.0, mask 255.0.0.0, enabled
2: addr 5.5.0.0, mask 255.255.0.0, enabled

Dump BGP Information
Following is an example of the information provided by the following command:
show ip bgp information [ ]
Command mode: All
Status codes: * valid, > best, i ­ internal
Origin codes: i ­ IGP, e ­ EGP, ? ­ incomplete
Network
Mask
Next Hop
Metr LcPrf Wght Path
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­
*> 1.1.1.0
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
0 ?
*> 10.100.100.0
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
0 ?
*> 10.100.120.0
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
0 ?
The 13.0.0.0 is filtered out by rrmap; or, a loop detected.

The IPv4 network and mask options restrict the output to a specific network in the
BGP routing table.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

97

OSPF Information
The following commands display OSPF information.
Table 46. OSPF Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip ospf area <0‐2>
Displays area information for a particular area index.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf area information
Displays area information for all areas.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf area­virtual­link information
Displays information about all the configured virtual links.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf general­information
Displays general OSPF information. See page 99 for a sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf information
Displays OSPF information.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf interface 
Displays OSPF information for a particular IP interface. See page 100 for a
sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf interface loopback <1‐5>
Displays loopback information for a particular interface. If no parameter is
supplied, it displays loopback information for all the interfaces. See page 100
for a sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf neighbor
Displays the status of all the current neighbors.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf routes
Displays OSPF routing table. See page 105 for a sample output.
Command mode: All

98

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 46. OSPF Information Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip ospf summary­range <0‐2>
Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non‐NSSA areas.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf summary­range­nssa <0‐2>
Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas.
Command mode: All

OSPF General Information
The following command displays general OSPF information:
show ip ospf general­information
Command mode: All
OSPF Version 2
Router ID: 10.10.10.1
Started at 1663 and the process uptime is 4626
Area Border Router: yes, AS Boundary Router: no
LS types supported are 6
External LSA count 0
External LSA checksum sum 0x0
Number of interfaces in this router is 2
Number of virtual links in this router is 1
16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router
Total number of entries in the LSDB 10
Database checksum sum 0x0
Total neighbors are 1, of which
2 are >=INIT state,
2 are >=EXCH state,
2 are =FULL state
Number of areas is 2, of which 3­transit 0­nssa
Area Id : 0.0.0.0
Authentication : none
Import ASExtern : yes
Number of times SPF ran : 8
Area Border Router count : 2
AS Boundary Router count : 0
LSA count : 5
LSA Checksum sum : 0x2237B
Summary : noSummary

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

99

OSPF Interface Loopback Information
The following command displays OSPF interface loopback information:
show ip ospf interface loopback 
Command mode: All
Ip Address 5.5.5.5, Area 0.0.0.1, Passive interface, Admin Status UP
Router ID 1.1.1.2, State Loopback, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Ip Address 0.0.0.0
Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Ip Address 0.0.0.0
Timer intervals, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5, Transit delay 1
Neighbor count is 0 If Events 1, Authentication type none

OSPF Interface Information
The following command displays OSPF interface information:
show ip ospf interface 
Command mode: All
Ip Address 10.10.12.1, Area 0.0.0.1, Admin Status UP
Router ID 10.10.10.1, State DR, Priority 1
Designated Router (ID) 10.10.10.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.1
Backup Designated Router (ID) 10.10.14.1, Ip Address 10.10.12.2
Timer intervals, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 1663, Retransmit 5,
Neighbor count is 1
If Events 4, Authentication type none

OSPF Information Route Codes
The following command displays OSPF route information:
show ip ospf routes
Command mode: All
Codes: IA ­ OSPF inter area,
N1 ­ OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 ­ OSPF NSSA external type 2
E1 ­ OSPF external type 1, E2 ­ OSPF external type 2
IA 10.10.0.0/16 via 200.1.1.2
IA 40.1.1.0/28 via 20.1.1.2
IA 80.1.1.0/24 via 200.1.1.2
IA 100.1.1.0/24 via 20.1.1.2
IA 140.1.1.0/27 via 20.1.1.2
IA 150.1.1.0/28 via 200.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.1/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.2/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.3/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.4/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.5/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.6/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.7/32 via 30.1.1.2
E2 172.18.1.8/32 via 30.1.1.2

100

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPF Database Information
The following commands display OSPF Database information.
Table 47. OSPF Database Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip ospf database
Displays all the LSAs.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf database advertising­router 
Takes advertising router as a parameter. Displays all the Link State
Advertisements (LSAs) in the LS database that have the advertising router
with the specified router ID, for example: 20.1.1.1.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf database asbr­summary
[advertising­router |link­state­id |self]
Displays ASBR summary LSAs. The use of this command is as follows:


asbr­summary advertising­router 20.1.1.1 displays ASBR summary
LSAs having the advertising router 20.1.1.1.



asbr­summary link­state­id 10.1.1.1 displays ASBR summary LSAs
having the link state ID 10.1.1.1.



asbr­summary self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs.



asbr­summary with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs.

Command mode: All
show ip ospf database database­summary
Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format:


Number of LSAs of each type in each area.



Total number of LSAs for each area.



Total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined.



Total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined.

No parameters are required.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf database external [advertising­router |
|link­state­id |self]
Displays the AS‐external (type 5) LSAs with detailed information of each field
of the LSAs.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf database network [advertising­router |
|link­state­id |self]
Displays the network (type 2) LSAs with detailed information of each field of
the LSA.network LS database.
Command mode: All
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

101

Table 47. OSPF Database Information Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip ospf database nssa
Displays the NSSA (type 7) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the
LSAs.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf database router [advertising­router |
|link­state­id |self]
Displays the router (type 1) LSAs with detailed information of each field of the
LSAs.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf database self
Displays all the self‐advertised LSAs. No parameters are required.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf database summary [advertising­router |
|link­state­id |self]
Displays the network summary (type 3) LSAs with detailed information of
each field of the LSAs.
Command mode: All

102

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPFv3 Information
The following commands display OSPFv3 information.
Table 48. OSPFv3 Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show ipv6 ospf area 
Displays the area information.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf areas
Displays the OSPFv3 Area Table.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf area­range information
Displays OSPFv3 summary ranges.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf area­virtual­link
Displays information about all the configured virtual links.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf border­routers
Displays OSPFv3 routes to an ABR or ASBR.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf host
Displays OSPFv3 host configuration information.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf information
Displays all OSPFv3 information. To view a sample display, see page 104.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf interface 
Displays interface information for a particular interface. If no parameter is
supplied, it displays information for all the interfaces. To view a sample
display, see page 105.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf neighbor 
Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID. If no router ID is
supplied, it displays the information about all the current neighbors.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

103

Table 48. OSPFv3 Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show ipv6 ospf redist­config
Displays OSPFv3 redistribution information to be applied to routes learned
from the route table.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf request­list 
Displays the OSPFv3 request list. If no router ID is supplied, it displays the
information about all the current neighbors.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf retrans­list 
Displays the OSPFv3 retransmission list. If no router ID is supplied, it displays
the information about all the current neighbors.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf routes
Displays OSPFv3 routing table. To view a sample display, see page 105.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf summary­prefix 
Displays the OSPFv3 external summary‐address configuration information.
Command mode: All

OSPFv3 Information Dump
The following command displays OSPFv3 information:
show ipv6 ospf information
Command mode: All
Router Id: 1.0.0.1
ABR Type: Standard ABR
SPF schedule delay: 5 secs Hold time between two SPFs: 10 secs
Exit Overflow Interval: 0
Ref BW: 100000
Ext Lsdb Limit: none
Trace Value: 0x00008000
As Scope Lsa: 2
Checksum Sum: 0xfe16
Passive Interface: Disable
Nssa Asbr Default Route Translation: Disable
Autonomous System Boundary Router
Redistributing External Routes from connected, metric 10, metric type
asExtType1, no tag set
Number of Areas in this router 1
Area
0.0.0.0
Number of interfaces in this area is 1
Number of Area Scope Lsa: 7
Checksum Sum: 0x28512
Number of Indication Lsa: 0
SPF algorithm executed: 2 times

104

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPFv3 Interface Information
The following command displays OSPFv3 interface information:
show ipv6 ospf interface
Command mode: All
Ospfv3 Interface Information
Interface Id: 1
Instance Id: 0
Local Address: fe80::222:ff:fe7d:5d00
Network Type: BROADCAST Cost: 1
Designated Router Id: 2.0.0.2
fe80::218:b1ff:fea1:6c01

Area Id: 0.0.0.0
Router Id: 1.0.0.1
State: BACKUP

local address:

Backup Designated Router Id: 1.0.0.1
fe80::222:ff:fe7d:5d00

local address:

Transmit Delay: 1 sec
Priority: 1
IfOptions: 0x0
Timer intervals configured:
Hello: 10, Dead: 40, Retransmit: 5
Hello due in 6 sec
Neighbor Count is: 1, Adjacent neighbor count is: 1
Adjacent with neighbor 2.0.0.2

OSPFv3 Routes Information
The following command displays OSPFv3 route information:
show ipv6 ospf routes
Command mode: All
Dest/
Prefix­Length
3ffe::10:0:0:0
/80
3ffe::20:0:0:0
/80
3ffe::30:0:0:0
/80
3ffe::60:0:0:6
/128

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

NextHp/
Cost
IfIndex
fe80::290:69ff
30
fe90:b4bf /vlan1
fe80::290:69ff
20
fe90:b4bf /vlan1
::
/vlan2 10
fe80::211:22ff
fe33:4426 /vlan2

10

Rt. Type

Area

interArea

0.0.0.0

interArea

0.0.0.0

intraArea

0.0.0.0

interArea

0.0.0.0

Chapter 2: Information Commands

105

OSPFv3 Database Information
The following commands display OSPFv3 Database information.
Table 49. OSPFv3 Database Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show ipv6 ospf database [detail|hex]
Displays all the LSAs.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf database as­external [detail|hex]
Displays AS‐External LSAs database information. If no parameter is supplied,
it displays condensed information.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf database inter­prefix [detail|hex]
Displays Inter‐Area Prefix LSAs database information. If no parameter is
supplied, it displays condensed information.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf database inter­router [detail|hex]
Displays Inter‐Area router LSAs database information. If no parameter is
supplied, it displays condensed information.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf database intra­prefix [detail|hex]
Displays Intra‐Area Prefix LSAs database information. If no parameter is
supplied, it displays condensed information.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf database link [detail|hex]
Displays Link LSAs database information. If no parameter is supplied, it
displays condensed information.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf database network [detail|hex]
Displays Network LSAs database information. If no parameter is supplied, it
displays condensed information.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf database router [detail|hex]
Displays the Router LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs.
If no parameter is supplied, it displays condensed information.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf database nssa [detail|hex]
Displays Type‐7 (NSSA) LSA database information. If no parameter is
supplied, it displays condensed information.
Command mode: All

106

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Routing Information Protocol
The following commands display Routing Information Protocol (RIP) information.
Table 50. Routing Information Protocol Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip rip routes
Displays RIP routes. For more information, see page 107.
Command mode: All
show interface ip  rip
Displays RIP user’s configuration. For more information, see page 107.
Command mode: All

RIP Routes Information
The following command displays RIP route information:
show ip rip routes
Command mode: All
>> IP Routing#
30.1.1.0/24 directly connected
3.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.11 metric 4
4.0.0.0/16 via 30.1.1.11 metric 16
10.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.2 metric 3
20.0.0.0/8 via 30.1.1.2 metric 2

This table contains all dynamic routes learned through RIP, including the routes
that are undergoing garbage collection with metric = 16. This table does not contain
locally configured static routes.

RIP Interface Information
The following command displays RIP user information:
show ip rip interface 
Command mode: All
RIP USER CONFIGURATION :
RIP: ON, update 30
RIP on Interface
49 : 101.1.1.10,
enabled
version 2, listen enabled, supply enabled, default none
poison disabled, split horizon enabled, trigg enabled, mcast
enabled, metric 1
auth none,key none

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

107

IPv6 Routing Information
Table 51 describes the IPv6 Routing information options.
Table 51. IPv6 Routing Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ipv6 route
Displays all IPv6 routing information. For more information, see page 109.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 route address 
Displays a single route by destination IP address.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 route gateway 
Displays routes to a single gateway.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 route interface 
Displays routes on a single interface.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 route static
Displays all static IPv6 routes.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 route type {connected|static|ospf}
Displays routes of a single type.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 route summary
Displays a summary of IPv6 routing information, including inactive routes.
Command mode: All

108

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IPv6 Routing Table
The following command displays IPv6 routing information:
show ipv6 route
Command mode: All
IPv6 Routing Table ­ 3 entries
Codes : C ­ Connected, S ­ Static
O ­ OSPF
D ­ Data Gateway from RA
M ­ Management Gateway, E ­ Ext­Management Gateway
N ­ Management Gateway from RA
F ­ Ext­Management Gateway from RA
S
C
C

::/0 [1/20]
via 2001:2:3:4::1, Interface 2
2001:2:3:4::/64 [1/1]
via ::, Interface 2
fe80::20f:6aff:feec:f701/128 [1/1]
via ::, Interface 2

Note: The first number inside the brackets represents the metric and the second
number represents the preference for the route.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

109

IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Information
The following commands display IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache information.
Table 52. IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ipv6 neighbors
Shows all IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache entries. For more information, see
page 110.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 neighbors find 
Shows a single IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache entry by IP address.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 neighbors interface port 
Shows IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache entries on a single port.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 neighbors static
Displays static IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache entries.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 neighbors vlan 
Shows IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache entries on a single VLAN.
Command mode: All

IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Information
The following command displays a summary of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache
information:
show ipv6 neighbors
Command mode: All
IPv6 Address
Age
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­
2001:2:3:4::1
10
fe80::250:bfff:feb7:76b0
0

110

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Link­layer Addr
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
00:50:bf:b7:76:b0
00:50:bf:b7:76:b0

State
­­­­­­­­­
Reachable
Stale

IF
­­­
2
2

VLAN
­­­­
1
1

Port
­­­­
EXT1
EXT2

IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Information
The following command displays a summary of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery prefix
information:
show ipv6 prefix
Command mode: All
Codes: A ­ Address , P ­ Prefix­Advertisement
D ­ Default , N ­ Not Advertised
[L] ­ On­link Flag is set
[A] ­ Autonomous Flag is set
AD 10:: 64 [LA] Valid lifetime 2592000 , Preferred lifetime 604800
P 20:: 64 [LA] Valid lifetime 200 , Preferred lifetime 100

Neighbor Discovery prefix information includes information about all configured
prefixes.
The following command displays IPv6 Neighbor Discovery prefix information for
an interface:
show ipv6 prefix interface 
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

111

ECMP Static Route Information
The following command displays Equal Cost Multi‐Path (ECMP) route
information:
show ip ecmp
Command mode: All
Current ecmp static routes:
Destination
Mask
Gateway
If
GW Status
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­
10.10.1.1
255.255.255.255 100.10.1.1
1
up
200.20.2.2
1
down
10.20.2.2
255.255.255.255 10.233.3.3
1
up
10.20.2.2
255.255.255.255 10.234.4.4
1
up
10.20.2.2
255.255.255.255 10.235.5.5
1
up

ECMP route information shows the status of each ECMP route configured on the
switch.

ECMP Hashing Result
The following command displays the status of ECMP hashing on each switch:
show ip route ecmphash
Command mode: All
ECMP Hash Mechanism: dipsip

112

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IGMP Information
The following commands display IGMP information:
Table 53. IGMP Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip igmp
Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp filtering
Displays current IGMP Filtering parameters.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp groups
Displays information for all multicast groups. For a command sample output,
see page 116.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp groups address 
Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp groups detail 
Displays details about an IGMP multicast group, including source and timer
information.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp groups interface port 
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp groups portchannel 
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp groups vlan 
Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp ipmcgrp
Displays information for all IPMC groups. For details, see page 117.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp mrouter [information]
Displays IGMP Multicast Router information. For details, see page 117.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

113

Table 53. IGMP Information Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip igmp mrouter dynamic
Displays IGMP Multicast Router dynamic information.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp mrouter interface port 
Displays IGMP Multicast Router information the specified interface.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp mrouter portchannel 
Displays IGMP Multicast Router information the specified portchannel.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp mrouter static
Displays IGMP Multicast Router static information.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp mrouter vlan 
Displays IGMP Multicast Router information for the specified VLAN.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp profile <1‐16>
Displays information about the current IGMP filter.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp querier vlan 
Displays IGMP Querier information. For details, see page 115.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp snoop
Displays IGMP Snooping information.
Command mode: All

114

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IGMP Querier Information
The following command displays IGMP Querier information:
show ip igmp querier vlan 
Command mode: All
Current IGMP Querier information:
IGMP Querier information for vlan 1:
Other IGMP querier ­ none
Switch­querier enabled, current state: Querier
Switch­querier type: Ipv4, address 1.1.1.1,
Switch­querier general query interval: 125 secs,
Switch­querier max­response interval: 100 'tenths of secs',
Switch­querier startup interval: 31 secs, count: 2
Switch­querier robustness: 2
IGMP configured version is v3
IGMP Operating version is v3

IGMP Querier information includes:


VLAN number



Querier status



© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Other IGMP querier—none
IGMP querier present, address: (IP or MAC address)



Querier election type (IPv4 or MAC) and address



Query interval



Querier startup interval



Maximum query response interval



Querier robustness value



Other IGMP querier present, interval (minutes:seconds)



IGMP Querier current state: Querier/Non‐Querier



IGMP version number

Chapter 2: Information Commands

115

IGMP Group Information
The following command displays IGMP Group information:
show ip igmp groups
Command mode: All
Total entries: 5 Total IGMP groups: 2
Note: The  number is computed as
the number of unique (Group, Vlan) entries!
Note: Local groups (224.0.0.x) are not snooped/relayed
appear.
Source
Group
VLAN
Port
Version
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­
10.1.1.1
232.1.1.1
2
4
V3
10.1.1.5
232.1.1.1
2
4
V3
*
232.1.1.1
2
4
V3
10.10.10.43
235.0.0.1
9
1
V3
*
235.0.0.1
9
1
V3

IGMP Group information includes:

116



IGMP source address



IGMP Group address



VLAN and port



IGMP version



IGMPv3 filter mode



Expiration timer value



IGMP multicast forwarding state

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

and will not
Mode Expires Fwd
­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­
INC
4:16
Yes
INC
4:16
Yes
INC
­
No
EXC
2:26
No
EXC
­
Yes

IGMP Multicast Router Information
The following command displays Mrouter information:
show ip igmp mrouter information
Command mode: All
Total entries: 3
Total number of dynamic mrouters: 2
Total number of installed static mrouters:
SrcIP
VLAN
Port
Version
­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­
­­­­­­­­­
10.1.1.1
3
EXT4
V3
10.1.1.5
2
EXT6
V2
*
9
EXT7
V2

1
Expires
­­­­­­­­
4:09
4:09
static

MRT
­­­­­­­
128
125
­

QRV
­­­­
2
­
­

QQIC
­­­­
125
­
­

IGMP Mrouter information includes:








Source IP address
VLAN and port where the Mrouter is connected
IGMP version
Mrouter expiration
Maximum query response time
Querier’s Robustness Variable (QRV)
Querier’s Query Interval Code (QQIC)

IPMC Group Information
The following command displays IGMP IPMC group information:
show ip igmp ipmcgrp
Command mode: All
Total number of displayed ipmc groups: 4
Legend(possible values in Type column):
SH ­ static host
DR ­ dynamic registered
SP ­ static primary
DU ­ dynamic unregistered
SB ­ static backup
M ­ mrouter
O ­ other
­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­
Source
Group
Vlan
Port
=============== =============== ==== ============
*
232.0.0.1
1
­
*
232.0.0.2
1
­
*
232.0.0.3
1
­
*
232.0.0.4
1
­

­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­
Type Timeleft
==== ========
DU
6 sec
DU
6 sec
DU
6 sec
DU
6 sec

IGMP IPMC Group information includes:
IGMPv3 source address
Multicast group address
 VLAN and port
 Type of IPMC group
 Expiration timer value



© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

117

MLD information
Table 54 describes the commands used to view Multicast Listener Discovery
(MLD) information.
Table 54. MLD Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ipv6 mld groups
Displays MLD multicast group information.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld groups address 
Displays group information for the specified IPv6 address.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld groups interface port 
Displays MLD groups on a single interface port.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld groups portchannel 
Displays groups on a single port channel.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld groups vlan 
Displays groups on a single VLAN.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld mrouter
Displays all MLD Mrouter ports. See page 119 for sample output.
Command mode: All

118

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

MLD Mrouter Information
The following command displays MLD Mrouter information:
show ipv6 mld mrouter
Command mode: All
Source: fe80:0:0:0:200:14ff:fea8:40c9
Port/Vlan: 26/4
Interface: 3
QRV: 2 QQIC:125
Maximum Response Delay: 1000
Version: MLDv2 Expires:1:02

The following table describes the MLD Mrouter information displayed in the
output.
Table 55. MLD Mrouter

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistic

Description

Source

Displays the link‐local address of the reporter.

Port/Vlan

Displays the port/vlan on which the general query is received.

Interface

Displays the interface number on which the general query is
received.

QRV

Displays the Querier’s robustness variable value.

QQIC

Displays the Querier’s query interval code.

Maximum
Response
Delay

Displays the configured maximum query response time.

Version

Displays the MLD version configured on the interface.

Expires

Displays the amount of time that must pass before the multicast
router decides that there are no more listeners for a multicast
address or a particular source on a link.

Chapter 2: Information Commands

119

VRRP Information
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on CN4093 10Gb Converged
Scalable Switch provides redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is
accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on
each participating VRRP‐capable routing device. One of the virtual routers is then
elected as the master, based on a number of priority criteria, and assumes control of
the shared virtual router IP address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual
routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP
address.
The following command displays VRRP information:
show ip vrrp information
Command mode: All
VRRP
1:
2:
3:

information:
vrid 2, 205.178.18.210, if
vrid 1, 205.178.18.202, if
vrid 3, 205.178.18.204, if

1, renter, prio 100, master
1, renter, prio 100, backup
1, renter, prio 100, master

When virtual routers are configured, you can view the status of each virtual router
using this command. VRRP information includes:
Virtual router number
 Virtual router ID and IP address
 Interface number
 Ownership status




owner identifies the preferred master virtual router. A virtual router is the
owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the
same.



renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device.

Priority value. During the election process, the virtual router with the highest
priority becomes master.
 Activity status


120



master identifies the elected master virtual router.



backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode.



holdoff identifies that the virtual router is in holdoff state.



init identifies that the virtual router is waiting for a startup event.
For example, once it receives a startup event, it transitions to master if its
priority is 255, (the IP address owner), or transitions to backup if it is not the
IP address owner.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Interface Information
The following command displays interface information:
show interface ip
Command mode: All
Interface information:
126:
IP6 fd55:faaf:e1ab:1022:7699:75ff:fe91:a6ef/64 , vlan 4095, up
fe80::7699:75ff:fe91:a6ef
128:
IP4 9.37.78.51
255.255.252.0
9.37.79.255 , vlan 4095, up

For each interface, the following information is displayed:
IPv4 interface address and subnet mask
 IPv6 address and prefix
 VLAN assignment
 Status (up, down, disabled)


© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

121

IPv6 Interface Information
The following command displays IPv6 interface information:
show ipv6 interface []
Command mode: All
Interface information:
2: IP6 2001:0:0:0:225:3ff:febb:bb15/64
fe80::225:3ff:febb:bb15
Link local address:
fe80::225:3ff:febb:bb15
Global unicast address(es):
2001::225:3ff:febb:bb15/64
Anycast address(es):
Not Configured.
Joined group address(es):
ff02::1
ff02::2
ff02::1:ffbb:bb15
MTU is 1500
ICMP redirects are enabled
ND DAD is enabled, Number of DAD attempts: 1
ND router advertisement is disabled

, vlan 1, up

For each interface, the following information is displayed:








122

IPv6 interface address and prefix
VLAN assignment
Status (up, down, disabled)
Path MTU size
Status of ICMP redirects
Status of Neighbor Discovery (ND) Duplicate Address Detection (DAD)
Status of Neighbor Discovery router advertisements

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IPv6 Path MTU Information
The following command displays IPv6 Path MTU information:
show ipv6 pmtu []
Command mode: All
Path MTU Discovery info:
Max Cache Entry Number : 10
Current Cache Entry Number: 2
Cache Timeout Interval : 10 minutes
Destination Address
5000:1::3
FE80::203:A0FF:FED6:141D

Since
00:02:26
00:06:55

PMTU
1400
1280

Path MTU Discovery information provides information about entries in the Path
MTU cache. The PMTU field indicates the maximum packet size in octets that can
successfully traverse the path from the switch to the destination node. It is equal to
the minimum link MTU of all the links in the path to the destination node.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

123

IP Information
The following command displays Layer 3 information:
show ip interface brief
Command mode: All
IP information:
AS number 0
Interface information:
126: IP6 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0/0
fe80::200:ff:fe00:ef
128: IP4 9.43.95.121
255.255.255.0

, vlan 4095, up
9.43.95.255,

vlan 4095, up

Loopback interface information:
Default gateway information: metric strict
4: 9.43.95.254,
FAILED
Default IP6 gateway information:
Current BOOTP relay settings: OFF
Global servers:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Server 1 address 0.0.0.0
Server 2 address 0.0.0.0
Server 3 address 0.0.0.0
Server 4 address 0.0.0.0
Server 5 address 0.0.0.0
Current IP forwarding settings: ON, dirbr disabled, icmprd disabled
Current network filter settings:
none
Current route map settings:
RIP is disabled.
OSPF is disabled.
OSPFv3 is disabled.
BGP is disabled.

IP information includes:







124

IP interface information: Interface number, IP address, subnet mask, broadcast
address, VLAN number, and operational status.
Default gateway information: Metric for selecting which configured gateway to
use, gateway number, IP address, and health status.
BootP relay settings.
IP forwarding settings, including the forwarding status of directed broadcasts,
and the status of ICMP re‐directs.
Network filter settings, if applicable.
Route map settings, if applicable.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IKEv2 Information
The following table lists commands that display information about IKEv2.
Table 56. IKEv2 Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ikev2
Displays all IKEv2 information. See page 126 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ikev2 ca­cert
Displays the CA certificate.
Command mode: All
show ikev2 host­cert
Displays the host certificate.
Command mode: All
show ikev2 identity
Displays IKEv2 identity information.
Command mode: All
show ikev2 preshare­key
Displays the IKEv2 preshare key.
Command mode: All
show ikev2 proposal
Displays the IKEv2 proposal.
Command mode: All
show ikev2 retransmit­interval
Displays the IKEv2 retransmit interval.
Command mode: All
show ikev2 sa
Displays the IKEv2 SA.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

125

IKEv2 Information Dump
The following command displays IKEv2 information:
show ikev2
Command mode: All
IKEv2 retransmit time:

20

IKEv2 cookie notification:

disable

IKEv2 authentication method: Pre­shared key
IKEv2 proposal:
Cipher:
Authentication:
DH Group:

3des
sha1
dh­2

Local preshare key:

lenovo123

IKEv2 choose IPv6 address as ID type
No SAD entries.

IKEv2 information includes:

126



IKEv2 retransmit time, in seconds.



Whether IKEv2 cookie notification is enabled.



The IKEv2 proposal in force. This includes the encryption algorithm (cipher),
the authentication algorithm type, and the Diffie‐Hellman (DH) group, which
determines the strength of the key used in the key exchange process. Higher DH
group numbers are more secure but require additional time to compute the key.



The local preshare key.



Whether IKEv2 is using IPv4 or IPv6 addresses as the ID type.



Security Association Database (SAD) entries, if applicable.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IPsec Information
The following table describes the commands used to display information about
IPsec.
Table 57. IPsec Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ipsec dynamic­policy <1‐10>
Displays dynamic policy information.
Command mode: All
show ipsec manual­policy <1‐10>
Displays manual policy information. See page 128 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ipsec sa
Displays all security association information.
Command mode: All
show ipsec spd
Displays all security policy information.
Command mode: All
show ipsec traffic­selector <1‐10>
Displays IPsec traffic selector information.
Command mode: All
show ipsec transform­set <1‐10>
Displays IPsec transform set information.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

127

IPsec Manual Policy Information
The following command displays IPsec manual key management policy
information:
show ipsec manual­policy
Command mode: All
IPsec manual policy 1 ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
IP Address:
2002:0:0:0:0:0:0:151
Associated transform ID:
1
Associated traffic selector ID: 1
IN­ESP SPI:
9900
IN­ESP encryption KEY:
3456789abcdef012
IN­ESP authentication KEY:
23456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789
OUT­ESP SPI:
7700
OUT­ESP encryption KEY:
6789abcdef012345
OUT­ESP authentication KEY:
56789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abc
Applied on interface:
interface 1

IPsec manual policy information includes:

128



The IP address of the remote peer



The transform set ID associated with this policy



Traffic selector ID associated with this policy



ESP inbound SPI



ESP inbound encryption key



ESP inbound authentication key



ESP outbound SPI



ESP outbound encryption key



ESP outbound authentication key



The interface to which this manual policy has been applied

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

PIM Information
The following commands display PIM information.
Table 58. PIM Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip pim bsr []
Displays information about the PIM bootstrap router (BSR).
Command mode: All
show ip pim component []
Displays PIM component information. For details, see page 130.
Command mode: All
show ip pim elected­rp [group ]
Displays a list of the elected Rendezvous Points.
Command mode: All
show ip pim interface [|detail|port ]
Displays PIM interface information. To view sample output, see page 130.
Command mode: All
show ip pim mroute [|count|flags|
|group |interface {|
|port }|source ]
Displays information about PIM multicast routes. For more information about
displaying PIM multicast route information, see page 132.
Command mode: All
show ip pim neighbor [|port ]
Displays PIM neighbor information. To view sample output, see page 131.
Command mode: All
show ip pim neighbor­filters
Displays information about PIM neighbor filters.
Command mode: All
show ip pim rp­candidate []
Displays a list of the candidate Rendezvous Points configured.
Command mode: All
show ip pim rp­set []
Displays a list of the Rendezvous Points learned.
Command mode: All
show ip pim rp­static []
Displays a list of the static Rendezvous Points configured.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

129

PIM Component Information
The following command displays Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM)
component information:
show ip pim component []
Command mode: All
PIM Component Information
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Component­Id: 1
PIM Mode: sparse,
PIM Version: 2
Elected BSR: 1.1.1.1
Candidate RP Holdtime: 100
PIM Component Information
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Component­Id: 1
PIM Mode: dense,
PIM Version: 2
Graft Retry Count: 1

PIM component information includes the following:
Component ID
Mode (sparse, dense)
 PIM Version
 Elected Bootstrap Router (BSR) address
 Candidate Rendezvous Point (RP) hold time, in seconds



PIM Interface Information
The following command displays information about PIM interfaces:
show ip pim interface
Command mode: All
Address

IfName/IfId Ver/Mode

­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­
40.0.0.3
net4/4
2/Sparse
50.0.0.3
net5/5
2/Sparse

Nbr
Count
­­­­­
1
0

Qry
Interval
­­­­­­­­
30
30

DR­Address

DR­Prio

­­­­­­­­­­
40.0.0.3
50.0.0.3

­­­­­­­
1
1

PIM interface information includes the following for each PIM interface:








130

IP address
Name and ID
Version and mode
Neighbor count
Query interval
Designated Router address
Designated Router priority value

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

PIM Neighbor Information
The following command displays PIM neighbor information:
show ip pim neighbor
Command mode: All
Neighbour IfName/Idx Uptime/Expiry Ver DRPri/Mode CompId Override Lan
Address
Interval Delay
­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­
40.0.0.2
net4/4
00:00:37/79
v2
1/S
1
0
0
40.0.0.4
net1/160 00:03:41/92
v2
32/S
2
0
0

PIM neighbor information includes the following:










© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Neighbor IP address, interface name, and interface ID
Name and ID of interface used to reach the PIM neighbor
Up time (the time since this neighbor became the neighbor of the local router)
Expiry Time (the minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor expires)
Version number
Designated Router priority and mode
Component ID
Override interval
LAN delay interval

Chapter 2: Information Commands

131

PIM Multicast Route Information Commands
The following commands display PIM Multicast Route information.
Table 59. PIM Multicast Route Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip pim mroute
Displays information about all PIM multicast routes.
Command mode: All
show ip pim mroute []
Displays PIM multicast routes for the selected component.
Command mode: All
show ip pim mroute count
Displays a count of PIM multicast routes of each type.
Command mode: All
show ip pim mroute flags [s] [r] [w]
Displays PIM multicast routes based on the selected entry flags. Enter flags in
any combination:


S: Shortest Path Tree (SPT) bit



R: Rendezvous Point Tree (RPT) bit



W: Wildcard bit

Command mode: All
show ip pim mroute group 
Displays PIM multicast routes for the selected multicast group.
Command mode: All
show ip pim mroute interface 
Displays PIM multicast routes for the selected incoming IP interface.
Command mode: All
show ip pim mroute source 
Displays PIM multicast routes for the selected source IP address.
Command mode: All

132

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

PIM Multicast Route Information
The following command displays PIM multicast route information:
show ip pim mroute
Command mode: All
IP Multicast Routing Table
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Route Flags S: SPT Bit W: Wild Card Bit R: RPT Bit
Timers: Uptime/Expires
(8.8.8.111, 224.2.2.100) ,00:42:03/00:01:11
Incoming Interface : net44 ,RPF nbr : 44.44.44.1 ,Route Flags : S
Outgoing InterfaceList :
net17, Forwarding/Sparse ,00:42:03/­­­
(*, 224.2.2.100) ,00:45:15/­­­ ,RP : 88.88.88.2
Incoming Interface : net5 ,RPF nbr : 5.5.5.2 ,Route Flags : WR
Outgoing InterfaceList :
net17, Forwarding/Sparse ,00:45:15/­­­
Total number of (*,G) entries : 1
Total number of (S,G) entries : 1

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

133

Quality of Service Information
The following commands display Quality of Service information.
Table 60. QoS Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show qos dscp
Displays the current DSCP parameters.
Command mode: All
show qos protocol­packet­control information protocol
Displays of mapping of protocol packet types to each packet queue number.
The status indicates whether the protocol is running or not running.
Command mode: All
show qos protocol­packet­control information queue [all]
Displays of mapping of protocol packet types to each packet queue number.
The status indicates whether the protocol is running or not running.
Command mode: All
show qos transmit­queue
Displays mapping of 802.1p value to Class of Service queue number, and COS
queue weight value.
Command mode: All
show qos transmit­queue information
Displays all 802.1p information. For details, see page 135.
Command mode: All
show qos random­detect
Displays WRED ECN information.
Command mode: All

134

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

802.1p Information
The following command displays 802.1p information:
show qos transmit­queue information
Command mode: All
Current priority to COS queue information:
Priority COSq Weight
­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
7
6
6
15
7
7
0
Current port priority information:
Port
Priority COSq Weight
­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­
INT1
0
0
1
INT2
0
0
1
...
MGT1
0
0
1
MGT2
0
0
1
EXT1
0
0
1
EXT2
0
0
1
EXT3
0
0
1
EXT4
0
0
1
...

The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p priority‐to‐COS queue information.
Table 61. 802.1p Priority‐to‐COS Queue Parameter Descriptions
Parameter

Description

Priority

Displays the 802.1p Priority level.

COSq

Displays the Class of Service queue.

Weight

Displays the scheduling weight of the COS queue.

The following table describes the IEEE 802.1p port priority information.
Table 62. 802.1p Port Priority Parameter Descriptions

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Parameter

Description

Port

Displays the port alias.

Priority

Displays the 802.1p Priority level.

COSq

Displays the Class of Service queue.

Weight

Displays the scheduling weight.

Chapter 2: Information Commands

135

WRED and ECN Information
The following command displays WRED and ECN information:
show qos random­detect
Command mode: All
Current wred and ecn configuration:
Global ECN: Disable
Global WRED: Disable

TQ0:
TQ1:
TQ2:
TQ3:
TQ4:
TQ5:
TQ6:
TQ7:
...

136

­­WRED­­TcpMinThr­­TcpMaxThr­­TcpDrate­­NonTcpMinThr­­NonTcpMaxThr­­NonTcpDrate­­
Dis
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dis
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dis
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dis
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dis
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dis
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dis
0
0
0
0
0
0
Dis
0
0
0
0
0
0

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Access Control List Information Commands
The following commands display Access Control List information.
Table 63. ACL Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show access­control group [<1‐256>]
Displays ACL group information.
Command mode: All
show access­control list [<1‐256>]
Displays ACL list information. For details, see page 138.
Command mode: All
show access­control list6 [<1‐128>]
Displays IPv6 ACL list information.
Command mode: All
show access­control vmap [<1‐128>]
Displays VMAP information.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

137

Access Control List Information
The following command displays Access Control List (ACL) information:
show access­control list <1‐256>
Command mode: All
Current ACL information:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Filter 2 profile:
Ethernet
­ VID
: 2/0xfff
Meter
­ Set to disabled
­ Set committed rate : 64
­ Set max burst size : 32
Re­Mark
­ Set use of TOS precedence to disabled
Actions
: Permit
Statistics
: enabled

Access Control List (ACL) information includes configuration settings for each
ACL and ACL Group.
Table 64. ACL Parameter Descriptions

138

Parameter

Description

Filter x profile

Indicates the ACL number.

Meter

Displays the ACL meter parameters.

Re‐Mark

Displays the ACL re‐mark parameters.

Actions

Displays the configured action for the ACL.

Statistics

Displays the status of ACL statistics configuration (enabled or
disabled).

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

RMON Information Commands
The following table describes the Remote Monitoring (RMON) Information
commands.
Table 65. RMON Information commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show rmon
Displays all RMON information.
Command mode: All
show rmon alarm []
Displays RMON Alarm information. For details, see page 141.
Command mode: All
show rmon event []
Displays RMON Event information. For details, see page 142.
Command mode: All
show rmon history []
Displays RMON History information. For details, see page 140.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

139

RMON History Information
The following command displays RMON History information:
show rmon history
Command mode: All
RMON History group configuration:
Index
­­­­­
1
2
3
4
5

IFOID
Interval Rbnum Gbnum
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.24
30
5
5
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.22
30
5
5
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.20
30
5
5
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.19
30
5
5
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.24
1800
5
5

Index
­­­­­
1

Owner
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
dan

The following table describes the RMON History Information parameters.
Table 66. RMON History Parameter Descriptions

140

Parameter

Description

Index

Displays the index number that identifies each history
instance.

IFOID

Displays the MIB Object Identifier.

Interval

Displays the time interval for each sampling bucket.

Rbnum

Displays the number of requested buckets, which is the
number of data slots into which data is to be saved.

Gbnum

Displays the number of granted buckets that may hold
sampled data.

Owner

Displays the owner of the history instance.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

RMON Alarm Information
The following command displays RMON Alarm information:
show rmon alarm
Command mode: All
RMON Alarm group configuration:
Index
­­­­­
1

Interval
­­­­­­­­
1800

Sample
­­­­­­
abs

Index
­­­­­
1

rEvtIdx
­­­­­­­
0

Index
­­­­­
1

Owner
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
dan

fEvtIdx
­­­­­­­
0

Type
­­­­­­­
either

rLimit
­­­­­­­­­­­
0

fLimit
­­­­­­­­­­­
0

last value
­­­­­­­­­­
7822

OID
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1

The following table describes the RMON Alarm Information parameters.
Table 67. RMON Alarm Parameter Descriptions
Parameter

Description

Index

Displays the index number that identifies each alarm instance.

Interval

Displays the time interval over which data is sampled and
compared with the rising and falling thresholds.

Sample

Displays the method of sampling the selected variable and
calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds, as
follows:

Type

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



abs—absolute value, the value of the selected variable is
compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the
sampling interval.



delta—delta value, the value of the selected variable at
the last sample is subtracted from the current value, and
the difference compared with the thresholds.

Displays the type of alarm, as follows:


falling—alarm is triggered when a falling threshold is
crossed.



rising—alarm is triggered when a rising threshold is
crossed.



either—alarm is triggered when either a rising or falling
threshold is crossed.

rLimit

Displays the rising threshold for the sampled statistic.

fLimit

Displays the falling threshold for the sampled statistic.

Last value

Displays the last sampled value.

Chapter 2: Information Commands

141

Table 67. RMON Alarm Parameter Descriptions (continued)
Parameter

Description

rEvtIdx

Displays the rising alarm event index that is triggered when a
rising threshold is crossed.

fEvtIdx

Displays the falling alarm event index that is triggered when a
falling threshold is crossed.

OID

Displays the MIB Object Identifier for each alarm index.

Owner

Displays the owner of the alarm instance.

RMON Event Information
The following command displays RMON Alarm information:
show rmon event
Command mode: All
RMON Event group configuration:
Index
­­­­­
1
2
3
4
5
10
11
15
Index
­­­­­
1

Type
Last Sent
Description
­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
both
0D: 0H: 1M:20S Event_1
none
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_2
log
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_3
trap
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Event_4
both
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Log and trap event for Link Down
both
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Log and trap event for Link Up
both
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Send log and trap for icmpInMsg
both
0D: 0H: 0M: 0S Send log and trap for icmpInEchos
Owner
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
dan

The following table describes the RMON Event Information parameters.
Table 68. RMON Event Parameter Descriptions

142

Parameter

Description

Index

Displays the index number that identifies each event instance.

Type

Displays the type of notification provided for this event, as
follows: none, log, trap, both.

Last sent

Displays the time that passed since the last switch reboot,
when the most recent event was triggered. This value is
cleared when the switch reboots.

Description

Displays a text description of the event.

Owner

Displays the owner of the alarm instance.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Link Status Information
The following command displays link information:
show interface status []
Command mode: All
Alias
­­­­­­­
INTA1
INTA2
INTA3
INTA4
...
INTA14
INTB1
INTB2
INTB3
INTB4
...
INTC14
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
EXT4
...
EXT20
EXT21
EXT22
EXTM
MGT1

Port
­­­­
1
2
3
4

Speed
­­­­­
1G/10G
1G/10G
1G/10G
1G/10G

Duplex
­­­­­­­­
full
full
full
full

Flow Ctrl
­­TX­­­­­RX­­
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes
yes

Link
­­­­­­
down
down
down
down

Name
­­­­­­
INTA1
INTA2
INTA3
INTA4

14
15
16
17
18

1G/10G
1G/10G
1G/10G
1G/10G
1G/10G

full
full
full
full
full

yes
yes
yes
yes
yes

yes
yes
yes
yes
yes

down
down
down
down
down

INTA14
INTB1
INTB2
INTB3
INTB4

42
43
44
45
46

1G/10G
1G/10G
1G/10G
10000
1G/10G

full
full
full
full
full

yes
no
no
no
no

yes
no
no
no
no

down
down
down
up
down

INTC14
EXT1
EXT2
EXT3
EXT4

62
63
64
65
66

10000
10000
10000
1000
1000

full
full
full
full
full

no
no
no
yes
no

no
no
no
yes
no

disabled
disabled
disabled
up
up

EXT20
EXT21
EXT22
EXTM
MGT1

Note: The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from
the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of
Lenovo Switch that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are
installed.
Use this command to display link status information about each port on the
CN4093, including:
Port alias and port number
Port speed and Duplex mode (half, full, any)
 Flow control for transmit and receive (no, yes, or both)
 Link status (up, down, or disabled)



© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

143

Port Information
The following command displays port information:
show interface trunk 
Command mode: All
Alias

Port Tag
Trk
­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­
INTA1
1
n
INTA2
2
n
INTA3
3
n
INTA4
4
n
INTA5
5
n
INTA6
6
n
INTA7
7
n
INTA8
8
n
INTA9
9
n
INTA10 10
n
INTA11 11
n
INTA12 12
n
INTA13 13
n
INTA14 14
n
INTB1
15
n
INTB2
16
n
INTB3
17
n
INTB4
18
n
INTB5
19
n
INTB6
20
n
INTB7
21
n
INTB8
22
n
INTB9
23
n
INTB10 24
n
INTB11 25
n
INTB12 26
n
INTB13 27
n
INTB14 28
n
INTC1
29
n
INTC2
30
n
INTC3
31
n
INTC4
32
n
INTC5
33
n
INTC6
34
n
...
EXT21
63
n
EXT22
64
n
EXTM
65
n
MGT1
66
y

Type

RMON Lrn Fld PVID
DESCRIPTION VLAN(s)
NVLAN
­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­ ­­­ ­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA1
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA2
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA3
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA4
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA5
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA6
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA7
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA8
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA9
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA10
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA11
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA12
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA13
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4081# INTA14
4081
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB1
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB2
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB3
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB4
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB5
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB6
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB7
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB8
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB9
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB10
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB11
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB12
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB13
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4082# INTB14
4082
Internal
d
e
e 4083# INTC1
4083
Internal
d
e
e 4083# INTC2
4083
Internal
d
e
e 4083# INTC3
4083
Internal
d
e
e 4083# INTC4
4083
Internal
d
e
e 4083# INTC5
4083
Internal
d
e
e 4083# INTC6
4083
External
External
Mgmt
Mgmt

d
d
d
d

e
e
e
e

e
e
e
e

1
1
4095
4095

EXT21
EXT22
EXTM
MGT1

1
1
4095
4095

* = PVID/Native­VLAN is tagged.
# = PVID is ingress tagged.
Trk = Trunk mode
NVLAN = Native­VLAN

Note: The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from
the screens displayed by your system. Screen content varies based on the type of
Lenovo Switch that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are
installed.

144

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Port information includes:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



Port alias and number



Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not (y or n)



Whether the port uses PVID/Native‐VLAN tagging or not (y or n)



Whether the port uses PVID ingress tagging or not (y or n)



Whether the port is internal, external or used for management



Whether the port has Remote Monitoring (RMON) enabled



Whether the port has FDB Learning enabled (Lrn)



Whether the port has Port Flooding enabled (Fld)



Port VLAN ID (PVID/Native‐VLAN)



Port description



VLAN membership

Chapter 2: Information Commands

145

Port Transceiver Status
The following command displays the status of the transceiver module on each
external port:
show interface transceiver
Command mode: All
Port
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
EXT1 SFP+ 1
EXT2 SFP+ 2
EXT3 Q10G 3.1
EXT4 Q10G 3.2
EXT5 Q10G 3.3
EXT6 Q10G 3.4
EXT7 Q10G 4.1
EXT8 Q10G 4.2
EXT9 Q10G 4.3
EXT10 Q10G 4.4
EXT11 FLEX 1
EXT12 FLEX 2
EXT13 FLEX 3
EXT14 FLEX 4
EXT15 FLEX 5
EXT16 FLEX 6
EXT17 FLEX 7
EXT18 FLEX 8
EXT19 FLEX 9
EXT20 FLEX 10
EXT21 FLEX 11
EXT22 FLEX 12

Link Transceiver
Vendor
­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
< NO Device Installed >
Down CU SFP
IBM­Finisar
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
Down 3m ACTX
IBM­Amphenol
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >
LINK 3m DAC
BLADE NETWORKS
< NO Device Installed >
LINK 1m DAC
BLADE NETWORKS
< NO Device Installed >
< NO Device Installed >

Part
Approve
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­
78P3177­N81713

Approved

46K6183­L36836B Accepted

BN­SP­CBL­3M

Accepted

BN­SP­CBL­1M

Accepted

This command displays information about the transceiver module on each port, as
follows:

146



Port number and media type



Link status



Transceiver detail



Vendor information



Part number



Approval state

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Use the following command to display extended transceiver information:
show interface port  transceiver details
Command mode: All
Port
TX Link TXFlt Volts DegsC TXuW RXuW Transceiver Approve
­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­
55 FLEX 3 Ena Down ­N/A­ ­N/A­ ­N/A­ ­N/A­ ­N/A­ 3m ACTX
Accepted
IBM­Amphenol Part:46K6183­L36836B Date:111231 S/N:YL11FY1CY40G

This command displays detailed information about the transceiver module, as
follows:


Port number and media type



TX: Transmission status



TXflt: Transmission fault indicator



Volts: Power usage, in volts



DegsC: Temperature, in degrees centigrade



TXuW: Transmit power, in micro‐watts



RXuW: Receive power, in micro‐watts



Media type (LX, LR, SX, SR)



Approval status

The optical power levels shown for transmit and receive functions for the
transceiver should fall within the expected range defined in the IEEE 802‐3‐2008
specification for each transceiver type. For convenience, the expected range values
are summarized in the following table.
Table 69. Expected Transceiver Optical Power Levels
Transceiver Type

Tx Minimum

Tx Maximum

Rx Minimum

Rx Maximum

SFP SX

112W

1000W

20W

1000W

SFP LX

70.8W

501W

12.6W

501W

SFP+ SR

186W

794W

102W

794W

SFP+ LR

151W

891W

27.5W

891W

Note: Power level values in the IEEE specification are shown in dBm, but have
been converted to mW in this table to match the unit of measure shown in the
display output.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

147

VM Ready Information
The following command display information about Virtual Machines (VMs).
Table 70. Virtual Machines Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show virt oui
Displays all the configured MAC OUIs.
Command mode: All
show virt port 
Displays VM Ready information for the selected port.
Command mode: All
show virt portchannel 
Displays Virtual Machine information for the selected portchannel.
Command mode: All
show virt vm [­v|­r]
Displays all VM Ready information.


­v displays verbose information



­r rescans the data center

Command mode: All
show virt vmcheck
Displays the current VM Check settings.
Command mode: All
show virt vmgroup [<1‐4096>]
Displays the current VM Group parameters.
Command mode: All
show virt vmpolicy vmbandwidth
[||||]
Displays the current VM bandwidth management parameters.
Command mode: All
show virt vmprofile []
Displays the current VM Profile parameters.
Command mode: All
show virt vmware
Displays the current VMware parameters.
Command mode: All

148

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

VM Information
The following command displays VM Ready information:
show virt vm
Command mode: All
IP Address
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
*127.31.46.50
*127.31.46.10
+127.31.46.51
+127.31.46.11
127.31.46.25
127.31.46.15
127.31.46.35

VMAC Address
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
00:50:56:4e:62:f5
00:50:56:4f:f2:85
00:50:56:72:ec:86
00:50:56:7c:1c:ca
00:50:56:9c:00:c8
00:50:56:9c:21:2f
00:50:56:9c:29:29

Index
­­­­­
4
2
1
3
5
0
6

Port
VM Group (Profile) Check Status
­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­
INT3
INT4
INT3
INT4
INT4
INT4
INT3

Number of entries: 7
* indicates VMware ESX Service Console Interface
+ indicates VMware ESX/ESXi VMKernel or Management Interface

VM information includes the following for each Virtual Machine (VM):


State of the Virtual Machine (~ indicates the VM is inactive/idle)



IP address



MAC address



Index number assigned to the VM



Internal port on which the VM was detected



VM group that contains the VM, if applicable



VM Check status for the corresponding VM

VM Check Information
The following command displays VM Check information:
show virt vmcheck
Command mode: All
Action to take for spoofed VMs:
Basic: Oper disable the link
Advanced: Install ACL to drop traffic
Maximum number of acls that can be used for mac spoofing: 50
Trusted ports by configuration: empty

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

149

VMware Information
Use these commands to display information about Virtual Machines (VMs) and
VMware hosts in the data center. These commands require the presence of a
configured Virtual Center.
Table 71. VMware Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show virt vmware hosts
Displays a list of VMware hosts.
Command mode: All
show virt vmware hello
Displays VMware hello settings.
Command mode: All
show virt vmware showhost {||}
Displays detailed information about a specific VMware host.
Command mode: All
show virt vmware showvm {||}
Displays detailed information about a specific Virtual Machine (VM).
Command mode: All
show virt vmware switchport­mapping
Displays ESX Server ‐ switchport mapping.
Command mode: All
show virt vmware vms
Displays a list of VMs.
Command mode: All

VMware Host Information
The following command displays VM host information:
show virt vmware hosts
Command mode: All
UUID

Name(s), IP Address

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
80a42681­d0e5­5910­a0bf­bd23bd3f7803 127.12.41.30
3c2e063c­153c­dd11­8b32­a78dd1909a69 127.12.46.10
64f1fe30­143c­dd11­84f2­a8ba2cd7ae40 127.12.44.50
c818938e­143c­dd11­9f7a­d8defa4b83bf 127.12.46.20
fc719af0­093c­dd11­95be­b0adac1bcf86 127.12.46.30
009a581a­143c­dd11­be4c­c9fb65ff04ec 127.12.46.40

VM host information includes the following:
 UUID associated with the VMware host.
 Name or IP address of the VMware host.

150

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

EVB Information
The following commands display Edge Virtual Bridge (EVB) Virtual Station
Interface (VDP) discovery and configuration information.
Table 72. EVB Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show virt evb profile [ports]
Displays all EVB profile parameters. The ports option also display port
parameters.
Command mode: All
show virt evb profile <1‐16> [ports]
Displays the selected EVB profile parameters. The ports option also display
port parameters.
Command mode: All
show virt evb vdp vm
Displays all active Virtual Machines (VMs).
Command mode: All
show virt evb vdp tlv
Displays all active Virtual Station Interface (VSI) Discovery and Configuration
Protocol (VDP) type‐length‐values (TLVs).
Command mode: All
show virt evb vsidb 
Displays Virtual Station Interface database information.
Command mode: All
show virt evb vsitypes [mgrid <0‐255>|typeid <1‐16777215>|
|version <0‐255>]
Displays the current Virtual Station Interface Type database parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

151

vNIC Information
The following commands display information about Virtual NICs (vNICs).
Table 73. vNIC Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show vnic information­dump
Displays all vNIC information.
Command mode: All
show vnic vnic
Displays information about each vNIC.
Command mode: All
show vnic vnicgroup
Displays information about each vNIC Group, including:


Status (enabled or disabled)



VLAN assigned to the vNIC Group



Uplink Failover status (enabled or disabled)



Link status for each vNIC (up, down, or disabled)



Port link status for each port associated with the vNIC Group (up, down, or
disabled)

Command mode: All

152

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Virtual NIC (vNIC) Information
The following command displays Virtual NIC (vNIC) information:
show vnic vnic
Command mode: All
vNIC
vNICGroup Vlan
MaxBandwidth Type
MACAddress
Link
­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­
INT1.1
1
100
25
Default 00:00:c9:c6:d0:2a
up
INT1.2
#
*
0
FCoE
00:00:c9:c6:d0:2b
up
INT1.3
3
300
25
Default 00:00:c9:c6:d0:2c
up
INT1.4
4
400
25
Default 00:00:c9:c6:d0:2d
up
INT2.1
1
100
25
Default 00:00:c9:c6:cf:72
up
INT2.2
#
*
0
FCoE
00:00:c9:c6:cf:73
up
INT2.3
3
300
25
Default 00:00:c9:c6:cf:74
up
INT2.4
4
400
25
Default 00:00:c9:c6:cf:75
up
INT3.1
1
100
25
Default 00:00:c9:e3:09:5c
up
INT3.3
3
300
25
Default 00:00:c9:e3:09:5e
up
INT3.4
4
400
25
Default 00:00:c9:e3:09:5f
up
INT4.2
#
*
0
FCoE
00:00:c9:b2:55:6f
up
INT9.2
#
*
0
FCoE
00:00:c9:c6:cf:33
up
# = Not added to any vNIC group
* = Not added to any vNIC group or no vlan set for its vNIC group

vNIC information includes the following for each vNIC:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



vNIC ID



vNIC Group that contains the vNIC



VLAN assigned to the vNIC Group



Maximum bandwidth allocated to the vNIC



MAC address of the vNIC, if applicable



Link status (up, down, or disabled)

Chapter 2: Information Commands

153

vNIC Group Information
The following command displays vNIC Group information:
show vnic vnicgroup
Command mode: All
vNIC Group 1: enabled
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
VLAN
: 100
Failover
: disabled
vNIC
­­­­­­­­­­
INT1.1
INT2.1
INT3.1

Link
­­­­­­­­­
up
up
up

Port
­­­­­­­­­­

Link
­­­­­­­­­

UplinkPort
­­­­­­­­­­
EXT6

Link
­­­­­­­­­
up

vNIC Group information includes the following for each vNIC Group:

154



Status (enabled or disabled)



VLAN assigned to the vNIC Group



Uplink Failover status (enabled or disabled)



Link status for each vNIC (up, down, or disabled)



Port link status for each port associated with the vNIC Group (up, down, or
disabled)

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

SLP Information
The following commands display information about Service Location Protocol
settings:
Table 74. SLP Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip slp directory­agents
Lists all detected Directory Agents (DAs).
Command mode: All
show ip slp information
Displays the SLP version, whether SLP is enabled or disabled and whether DA
auto‐discovery is enabled or disabled.
Command mode: All
show ip slp user­agents
Lists all detected User Agents (UAs).
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

155

UFP Information
The following commands display information about Unified Fabric Port (UFP)
settings.
Table 75. UFP Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show ufp [port ] [vport <1‐4>] [network|qos|evb]
Displays the UFP network and QoS settings applied on all ports or on
specified physical and virtual ports.


network filters only UFP network settings



qos filters only QoS network settings



evb filters only EVB profile settings

Command mode: All
show ufp information {cdcp|qos|tlvstat} [port ]
Displays global or port‐specific UFP information on:


cdcp displays S‐Channel Discovery and Configuration Protocol (CDCP)
information. CDCP allows hypervisor hosts to create on‐demand
S‐channels with the switch. For details, see page 158.



qos displays bandwidth allocation between virtual ports. For details, see
page 158.



tlvstat displays status for Type‐Length‐Values transmitted on
UFP‐enabled physical ports. For details, see page 159.

Command mode: All
show ufp information getvlan <2‐4094>
Displays state, operating mode and VLAN related information for physical
and virtual ports associated to a specified VLAN ID.
Command mode: All
show ufp information port []
Displays UFP status for all physical ports or only for a specified physical port.
Information includes wether the UFP is enabled on the physical port, how
many virtual ports are enabled and the link stats for each virtual port. For
details, see page 157.
Command mode: All
show ufp information qos [port ] [vport <1‐4>]
Displays bandwidth allocation between virtual ports for all physical ports or
specified physical and virtual ports. For details, see page 158.
Command mode: All

156

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 75. UFP Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show ufp information vport [port ] [vport <1‐4>]
Displays state, operating mode and VLAN related information for all virtual
ports, for virtual ports belonging to a specified physical port or for a single
virtual port. For details, see page 160.
Command mode: All
show ufp information vlan [<1‐4094>]
Displays ports and vports associated to all configured VLANs or to a specified
VLAN ID. For details, see page 161.
Command mode: All

Port Information
The following command displays UFP port information:
show ufp information port
Command mode: All
Alias
­­­­­
INTA4

Port
­­­­
4

state
­­­­­
ena

vPorts
­­­­­­
4

link up
­­­­­­­
1 3 4

link down
­­­­­­­­­

mismatch
­­­­­­­­
2

disabled
­­­­­­­­

Port information includes the following for each physical port:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



Port alias



Port number



UFP state



Number of virtual ports enabled



Link status on each channel (up, down or disabled)

Chapter 2: Information Commands

157

CDCP Information
The following command displays S‐Channel Discovery and Configuration
Protocol information:
show ufp information cdcp
Command mode: All
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
INT6
INT7
INT8
INT9
INT10
INT11
INT12
INT13
INT14

: Channel Request
: Channel Request
:
TxSVIDs
:
TxSVIDs
:
Disable
:
Disable
:
Disable
:
Disable
:
Disable
:
Disable
:
Disable
:
Disable
:
Disable
:
Disable

CDCP information includes the following for each physical port:


Whether there is a channel set up



CDCP communication status for active channels

QoS Information
The following command displays Quality of Service information:
show ufp information qos
Command mode: All
Global UFP QOS mode: UFP QOS BW
Port | Vport | Minbw%| Maxbw%
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
1
| 1
| 15
| 100
| 2
| 25
| 50
| 3
| 25
| 100
| 4
| 25
| 100
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
2
| 1
| 25
| 100
| 2
| 25
| 100
| 3
| 25
| 100
| 4
| 25
| 100
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
3
| 1
| 25
| 100
| 2
| 25
| 100
| 3
| 25
| 100
| 4
| 25
| 100
...

158

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

QoS information includes the following:


Physical port number



Virtual port number



Minimum guaranteed bandwidth allocated



Maximum bandwidth achievable

TLV Status Information
The following command displays Type‐Length‐Values information:
show ufp information tlvstat
Command mode: All
INT1
INT2
INT3
INT4
INT5
INT6
INT7
INT8
INT9
INT10
INT11
INT12
INT13
INT14

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Success
Success
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled

TLV status information includes the following:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



Physical port alias



Type‐Length‐Values status

Chapter 2: Information Commands

159

Virtual Port Information
The following command displays virtual port information:
show ufp information vport
Command mode: All
vPort
­­­­­­­­­
INTA1.1
INTA1.2
INTA1.3
INTA1.4
…
INTA14.4
INTB1.1
INTB1.2
INTB1.3
INTB1.4
INTB2.1
INTB2.2
INTB2.3
INTB2.4
INTB3.1
INTB3.2
INTB3.3
INTB3.4

state
­­­­­
dis
dis
dis
dis

mode
­­­­­­
tunnel
tunnel
tunnel
tunnel

svid
­­­­
0
0
0
0

defvlan
­­­­­­­
0
0
0
0

deftag
­­­­­­
dis
dis
dis
dis

dis
dis*
up
dis*
dis
dis*
up
dis*
dis
dis*
up
dis*
dis

tunnel
access
fcoe
trunk
tunnel
access
fcoe
trunk
tunnel
access
fcoe
trunk
tunnel

0
4002
2500
4004
0
4002
2500
4004
0
4002
2500
4004
0

0
100
2500
300
0
100
2500
300
0
100
2500
300
0

dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis

evbprof
­­­­­­­
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis
dis

VLANs
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­

100
2500
300 500
100
2500
300 500
100
2500
300 500

Virtual port information includes the following for each virtual port:

160



Virtual port number



Channel status



Operating mode (trunk, access, tunnel, auto or FCoE)



S‐channel VLAN ID



Default VLAN ID



Default VLAN ID tagging enforcement



EVB profile



VLANs the virtual port is associated with

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

VLAN Information
The following command displays VLAN information:
show ufp information vlan
Command mode: All
VLAN
­­­­
100
vPort list:
INTB1.1
INTB7.1

INTB2.1
INTB8.1

EXT Port list:
EXT3
EXT4

INTB3.1
INTB9.1

EXT8

EXT9

INTB3
INTB11

INTB4
INTB12

INTB4.1
INTB10.1

INTB5.1
INTB11.1

INTB6.1
INTB12.1

INT Port list:
INTB13
UFP Port list:
INTB1
INTB2
INTB9
INTB10

INTB5

INTB6

INTB7

INTB8

VMR Port list:

VLAN information includes the following for each VLAN:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



VLAN ID



Associated virtual ports



Associated external ports



Associated internal ports



Associated UFP ports

Chapter 2: Information Commands

161

TLV Information
The following commands display TLV information:
show ufp {receive|transmit} cap port 
Command mode: All
UFP Capability Discovery TLV Received on port INT2:
tlv
: Type 127 Length 7 OUI 00­18­b1 Subtype 1
version : Max 1 Oper 1
cna
: Req 1 Oper 1 Res 0x00
switch : Cap 1 Oper 1 Res 0x00

UFP Capability Discovery TLV information includes the following:


TLV type and length



Lenovo Organizationally Unique Identifier



TLV Subtype



Max Version and Operation Version



UFP CNA Status which include UFP Request and UFP Operation



UFP Switch Status which includes UFP Capable and UFP Operation

show ufp {receive|transmit} cdcp port 
Command mode: All
CDCP TLV Transmitted on port INT2:
tlv
: Type 127 Length 23 OUI 00­80­c2 Subtype 14
local
: Role 0 SComp 1 Channel Cap 5
SCID 1 : SVID 1
SCID 2 : SVID 4002
SCID 3 : SVID 4003
SCID 4 : SVID 0
SCID 5 : SVID 0

UFP Channel Discovery and Configuration Protocol TLV includes the following:

162



TLV type and length



Lenovo Organizationally Unique Identifier



TLV Subtype



Role bit



S‐Component bit



Channel Cap



Corresponding index/SVID pairs

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

DCBX Information Commands
The following commands display DCBX information.
Table 76. DCBX Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show dcbx receive 
Displays the Type‐Length‐Value (TLV) list received in the DCBX TLV.
Command mode: All
show dcbx transmit 
Displays the Type‐Length‐Value (TLV) list transmitted in the DCBX TLV.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

163

Converged Enhanced Ethernet Information
Table 77 describes the Converged Enhanced Ethernet (CEE) information options.
Table 77. CEE Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show cee global {ets|pfc} [information]
Displays global ETS or PFC information.
Command mode: All
show cee [information]
Displays all CEE information.
Command mode: All
show cee iscsi
Displays the current ISCSI TLV parameters.
Command mode: All
show cee port 
Displays CEE information for the specified port.
Command mode: All

164

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

DCBX Information
Table 78 describes the Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange (DCBX) protocol
information options.
Table 78. DCBX Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show cee information dcbx port 
Displays all DCBX information.
Command mode: All
show cee information dcbx port  app_proto
Displays information about the DCBX Application Protocol state machine on
the selected port. For details, see page 170.
Command mode: All
show cee information dcbx port  control
Displays information about the DCBX Control state machine for the selected
port. For details, see page 166.
Command mode: All
show cee information dcbx port  ets
Displays information about the DCBX ETS state machine. For details, see
page 168.
Command mode: All
show cee information dcbx port  feature
Displays information about the DCBX Feature state machine for the selected
port. For details, see page 167.
Command mode: All
show cee information dcbx port  pfc
Displays information about the DCBX PFC state machine. For details, see
page 169.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

165

DCBX Control Information
The following command displays DCBX control information:
show cee information dcbx port  control
Command mode: All
DCBX Port Control State­machine Info
================================================
Alias Port OperStatus OperVer MaxVer SeqNo AckNo
­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­
INTA1
1
enabled
0
0
0
0
INTA2
2
enabled
0
0
4
2
INTA3
3
enabled
0
0
0
0
INTA4
4
enabled
0
0
1
1
...

DCBX control information includes the following:







166

Port alias and number
DCBX status (enabled or disabled)
Operating version negotiated with the peer device
Maximum operating version supported by the system
Sequence number that changes each time a DCBX parameter in one or more DCB
feature TLVs changes
Sequence number of the most recent DCB feature TLV that has been
acknowledged

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

DCBX Feature Information
The following command displays DCBX feature information:
show cee information dcbx port  feature
Command mode: All
DCBX Port Feature State­machine Info
===================================================================================
Alias Port Type
AdmState Will Advrt OpVer MxVer PrWill SeqNo Err OperMode Syncd
­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­
INTA2 2
ETS
enabled No
Yes
0
0
Yes
1
No enabled Yes
INTA2 2
PFC
enabled No
Yes
0
0
Yes
1
No enabled Yes
INTA2 2
AppProt disabled No
Yes
0
0
Yes
1
No disabled Yes
...

The following table describes the DCBX feature information.
Table 79. DCBX Feature Information Fields

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Parameter

Description

Alias

Displays each port’s alias.

Port

Displays each port’s number.

Type

Feature type.

AdmState

Feature status (Enabled or Disabled).

Will

Willing flag status (Yes/True or No/Untrue).

Advrt

Advertisement flag status (Yes/True or No/Untrue).

OpVer

Operating version negotiated with the peer device.

MxVer

Maximum operating version supported by the system.

PrWill

Peer’s Willing flag status (Yes/True or No/Untrue).

SeqNo

Sequence number that changes each time a DCBX
parameter in one or more DCB feature TLVs changes.

Err

Error condition flag (Yes or No). Yes indicates that an error
occurred during the exchange od configuration data with
the peer.

OperMode

Operating status negotiated with the peer device (enabled
or disabled).

Syncd

Synchronization status between this port and the peer (Yes
or No).

Chapter 2: Information Commands

167

DCBX ETS Information
The following command displays DCBX ETS information:
show cee information dcbx port  ets
Command mode: All
DCBX Port Priority Group ­ Priority Allocation Table
====================================================
Alias Port Priority PgIdDes PgIdOper PgIdPeer
­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­
INTA2 2
0
PGID0
PGID0
PGID0
INTA2 2
1
PGID0
PGID0
PGID0
INTA2 2
2
PGID0
PGID0
PGID0
INTA2 2
3
PGID1
PGID1
PGID1
INTA2 2
4
PGID2
PGID2
PGID0
INTA2 2
5
PGID2
PGID2
PGID0
INTA2 2
6
PGID2
PGID2
PGID0
INTA2 2
7
PGID2
PGID2
PGID0
DCBX Port Priority Group ­ Bandwidth Allocation Table
=====================================================
Alias Port PrioGrp BwDes BwOper BwPeer
­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­ ­­­­­ ­­­­­­ ­­­­­­
INTA2 2
0
10
10
50
INTA2 2
1
50
50
50
INTA2 2
2
40
40
0

The following table describes the DCBX ETS information.
Table 80. DCBX Feature Information Fields
Parameter

Description

DCBX Port Priority Group ‐ Priority Allocation Table
Alias

Displays each port’s alias.

Port

Displays each port’s number.

PgIdDes

Priority Group ID configured on this switch.

PgIdOper

Priority Group negotiated with the peer (operating Priority
Group).

PgIdPeer

Priority Group ID configured on the peer.

DCBX Port Priority Group ‐ Bandwidth Allocation Table

168

BwDes

Bandwidth allocation configured on this switch.

BwOper

Bandwidth allocation negotiated with the peer (operating
bandwidth).

BwPeer

Bandwidth allocation configured on the peer.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

DCBX PFC Information
The following command displays DCBX Priority Flow Control (PFC) information:
show cee information dcbx port  pfc
Command mode: All
DCBX Port Priority Flow Control Table
=====================================
Alias Port Priority EnableDesr EnableOper EnablePeer
­­­­­­ ­­­­ ­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­
INTA2 2
0
disabled
disabled
disabled
INTA2 2
1
disabled
disabled
disabled
INTA2 2
2
disabled
disabled
disabled
INTA2 2
3
enabled
enabled
enabled
INTA2 2
4
disabled
disabled
disabled
INTA2 2
5
disabled
disabled
disabled
INTA2 2
6
disabled
disabled
disabled
INTA2 2
7
disabled
disabled
disabled

DCBX PFC information includes the following:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



Port alias and number



802.1p value



EnableDesr: Status configured on this switch



EnableOper: Status negotiated with the peer (operating status)



EnablePeer: Status configured on the peer

Chapter 2: Information Commands

169

DCBX Application Protocol Information
The following command displays DCBX Application Protocol information:
show cee information dcbx port  app­proto
Command mode: All
DCBX Application Protocol Table
===============================
FCoE Priority Information
=========================
Protocol ID
: 0x8906
Selector Field
: 0
Organizationally Unique ID: 0x1b21
Alias
­­­­­­
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2

Port
­­­­
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Priority
­­­­­­­­
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

EnableDesr EnableOper EnablePeer
­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
enabled
disabled
enabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled

FIP Snooping Priority Information
=================================
Protocol ID
: 0x8914
Selector Field
: 0
Organizationally Unique ID: 0x1b21
Alias
­­­­­­
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2
INTA2

Port
­­­­
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Priority
­­­­­­­­
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

EnableDesr EnableOper EnablePeer
­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
enabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled
disabled

The following table describes the DCBX Application Protocol information.
Table 81. DCBX Application Protocol Information Fields
Parameter

Description

Protocol ID

Identifies the supported Application Protocol.

Selector Field

Specifies the Application Protocol type, as follows:

Organizationall
y Unique ID

170



0 = Ethernet Type



1 = TCP socket ID

DCBX TLV identifier

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 81. DCBX Application Protocol Information Fields (continued)

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Parameter

Description

Alias

Port alias

Port

Port number

Priority

802.1p value

EnableDesr

Status configured on this switch

EnableOper

Status negotiated with the peer (operating status)

EnablePeer

Status configured on the peer

Chapter 2: Information Commands

171

ETS Information
Table 82 describes the Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS) information options.
Table 82. ETS Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show cee global ets [information]
Displays global ETS information.
Command mode: All
show cee global ets priority­group <0‐7, 15>
Displays the current global ETS Priority Group parameters.
Command mode: All
The following command displays ETS information:
show cee global ets information
Command mode: All
Global ETS information:
Number of COSq: 8
Mapping of 802.1p Priority to Priority Groups:
Priority
­­­­­­­­
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

PGID
­­­­
0
0
0
1
2
2
2
2

COSq
­­­­
0
0
0
1
2
2
2
2

Bandwidth Allocation to Priority Groups:
PGID
­­­­
0
1
2

PG%
­­­
10
50
40

Description
­­­­­­­­­­­

Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS) information includes the following:
Number of Class of Service queues (COSq) configured
 802.1p mapping to Priority Groups and Class of Service queues
 Bandwidth allocated to each Priority Group


172

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

PFC Information
Table 83 describes the Priority Flow Control (PFC) information options.
Table 83. PFC Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show cee global pfc [information]
Displays global PFC information.
Command mode: All
show cee global pfc priority 
Displays the current global PFC 802.1p priority parameters.
Command mode: All
show cee port  pfc [information]
Displays PFC information on the specified port.
Command mode: All
show cee port  pfc priority 
Displays the current PFC 802.1p priority parameters for the specified port.
Command mode: All
The following command displays PFC information for a port:
show cee port  pfc information
Command mode: All
Global PFC Information:
PFC ­ ON
Priority
State
Description
­­­­­­­­
­­­­­
­­­­­­­­­­­
0
Dis
1
Dis
2
Dis
3
Ena
4
Dis
5
Dis
6
Dis
7
Dis
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
State ­ indicates whether PFC is Enabled/Disabled on a particular priority

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

173

FCoE Information
Table 84 describes the Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) information options.
Table 84. FCoE Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show fcoe information
Displays all current FCoE information.
Command mode: All

FIP Snooping Information
Table 85 describes the Fibre Channel Initialization Protocol (FIP) Snooping
information options.
Table 85. FIP Snooping Information Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show fcoe fips [information]
Displays FIP Snooping information for all ports.
Command mode: All
show fcoe fips fcf
Displays FCF information for all FCFs learned.
Command mode: All
show fcoe fips fcoe
Displays FCoE connections established on the switch.
Command mode: All
show fcoe fips port  [information]
Displays FIP Snooping (FIPS) information for the selected port, including a list
of current FIPS ACLs.
Command mode: All
show fcoe fips vlans
Displays VLAN information.
Command mode: All

174

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

The following command displays FIP Snooping information for the selected port:
show fcoe fips port  information
Command mode: All
FIP Snooping on port INTA2:
This port has been configured to automatically detect FCF.
It has currently detected to have 0 FCF connecting to it.
FIPS ACLs configured on this port:
SMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6f, action deny.
SMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:70, action deny.
SMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6d, action deny.
SMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6e, action deny.
DMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6f, ethertype 0x8914, action permit.
DMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:70, ethertype 0x8914, action permit.
DMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6d, ethertype 0x8914, action permit.
DMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6e, ethertype 0x8914, action permit.
SMAC 0e:fc:00:01:0a:00, DMAC 00:c0:dd:13:9b:6d, ethertype 0x8906, vlan
1002, action permit.
DMAC 01:10:18:01:00:01, Ethertype 0x8914, action permit.
DMAC 01:10:18:01:00:02, Ethertype 0x8914, action permit.
Ethertype 0x8914, action deny.
Ethertype 0x8906, action deny.
SMAC 0e:fc:00:00:00:00, SMAC mask ff:ff:ff:00:00:00, action deny.

FIP Snooping port information includes the following:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



Fibre Channel Forwarding (FCF) mode



Number of FCF links connected to the port



List of FIP Snooping ACLs assigned to the port

Chapter 2: Information Commands

175

Fibre Channel Information
These commands allow you to display Fibre Channel information.
Table 86. Fibre Channel Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show flogi database []
Displays fabric login database information. For details, see page 178.
Command mode: All
show fcalias []
Displays the current FC alias ‐ PWWN (port World Wide Name) mapping.
Command mode: All
show fcdomain []
Displays the current configuration of FC domains.
Command mode: All
show fcns database []
Displays FC name server database information. For details, see page 178.
Command mode: All
show fdmi database []
Displays fibre channel management interface database information.
Command mode: All
show fcs database []
Displays fabric configuration status database information. For details, see
page 179.
Command mode: All
show fcoe database []
Displays Fibre Channel over Ethernet database information.
Command mode: All
show fcf []
Displays Fibre Channel forwarding information. For details, see page 179.
Command mode: All
show npv status []
Displays N_Port Virtualization information.
Command mode: All
show npv flogi­table []
Displays the contents of the NPV fabric login table.
Command mode: All

176

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 86. Fibre Channel Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show npv traffic­map []
Displays NPV source‐destination traffic mapping. For details, see page 180.
Command mode: All
show zone []
Lists all FC zones.
Command mode: All
show zone status []
Displays FC zone status information. For details, see page 180.
Command mode: All
show zone name  []
Displays information for the specified FC zone.
Command mode: All
show zoneset []
Lists all FC zonesets.
Command mode: All
show zoneset name  []
Displays information for the specified FC zoneset.
Command mode: All
show zoneset active []
Displays the currently active FC zoneset.
Command mode: All
show interface fc information []
Displays FC port information. For details, see page 181.
Command mode: All
show interface fc port  []
Displays FC information for the specified ports.
Command mode: All
show topology []
Displays port and corresponding node information for each switch member of
the fabric or only for a specific switch member. For details, see page 182.
Command mode: All
show steering []
Displays frame steering information for each switch member of the fabric or
only for a specific switch member.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

177

Table 86. Fibre Channel Information Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show fabric
Display the FC fabric information.
Command mode: All
show lsdb
Display the link state db information of the FC fabric.
Command mode: All

Fabric Login Database Information
The following command displays a list of the storage devices present in the FC
fabric login database:
show flogi database
Command mode: All
Port
FCID
Port­WWN
Node­WWN
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
EXT1 010c00
20:00:00:11:0d:64:f5:00
20:00:00:11:0d:64:f5:00
EXT2 010c01
20:01:00:11:0d:64:f4:00
20:01:00:11:0d:64:f4:00
Total number of entries = 2

Fibre Channel Name Server Database Information
The following command displays information about the FC name server database:
show fcns database
Command mode: All
FCID
TYPE PWWN
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
010100
N
20:02:00:11:0d:8a:10:00
010400
N
20:3a:00:80:e5:2d:1a:30
010c00
N
10:00:00:00:27:1a:13:f0
010c01
N
10:00:00:00:27:1a:13:f7
010c02
N
10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:5d
010c03
N
10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:3f
010c04
N
10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:44
010c05
N
10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:34
010c06
N
10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:23
010c07
N
10:00:00:00:27:1f:8e:18
...
01140d
N
10:00:00:00:27:1f:61:4a
Total number of entries = 72

178

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Fabric Configuration Status Database Information
The following command displays information about the fabric configuration:
show fcs database
Command mode: All
Fabric Name
: 10:00:74:99:75:22:48:00
Switch Domain Id
: 1
Switch Mgmt Id
: 010000
Switch WWN
: 10:00:74:99:75:22:48:00
Switch Ports:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Port
PWWN
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
55
20:02:74:99:75:22:48:00
63
00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00
64
00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00

Fibre Channel Forwarding Information
The following command displays information about Fibre Channel forwarding:
show fcf
Command mode: All
====================================================
FCF:1 in VLAN: 1002
NPV­Gw
FC­MAP
: 0x0efc00
Priority
: 128
FKA­Adv
: 8
FC Port
: 55 60 63 64
====================================================
FCF:2 in VLAN: 1003
NPV­Gw
FC­MAP
: 0x0efc01
Priority
: 128
FKA­Adv
: 8
FC Port
: 56 59
====================================================
FCF:3 in VLAN: 1004
Fabric
FC­MAP
: 0x0efc02
Priority
: 128
FKA­Adv
: 8
FC Port

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

: 53 54 57 58 61 62

Chapter 2: Information Commands

179

NPV Traffic Information
The following command displays information about NPV source‐destination
traffic mapping:
show npv traffic­map
Command mode: All
VLAN
Source Ports
NP­Uplink Dest Ports
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
1002
55,60,63,64
1003
56,59

Zone Status Information
The following command displays status information about FC zones:
show zone status
Command mode: All
Default­Zone

180

: Permit

FC Zoning Limits :­­
MAX ZONES per ZONESET
MAX MEMBERS per ZONE

:
:

MAX
MAX
MAX
MAX

:
4
: 200
: 200
: 1000

ZONESETS
ZONES
ALIASES
MEMBERS

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

64
20

FC Port Information
The following command displays information about FC ports:
show interface fc information
Command mode: All
Alias

Port

­­­­­
EXT11
EXT12
EXT13
EXT14
EXT15
EXT16
EXT17
EXT18
EXT19
EXT20
EXT21
EXT22

­­­­
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

Admin
State
­­­­­
Online
Online
Online
Online
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Down
Online

Oper
State
­­­­­
Online
Offline
Offline
Offline
Downed
Downed
Downed
Downed
Downed
Downed
Downed
Downed

Login
Status
­­­­­­
LoggedIn
NotLoggedIn
NotLoggedIn
NotLoggedIn
NotLoggedIn
NotLoggedIn
NotLoggedIn
NotLoggedIn
NotLoggedIn
NotLoggedIn
NotLoggedIn
NotLoggedIn

Config
Type
­­­­­­
F
F
F
F
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth

Running
Type
­­­­­­­
F
F
Unknown
Unknown
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth
Eth

Link
Status
­­­­­­
Active
Active
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive
Inactive

Link
Speed
­­­­­
4Gb/s
4Gb/s
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown
Unknown

Fibre Channel port information includes the following:
Table 87. Fibre Channel Port Information Descriptions
Parameter

Description

Alias

Port alias

Port

Port number

Admin State

Configured state of the port (online, offline, or down)

Oper State

Current operational state of the port (online, offline, or
downed)

Login Status

Login status of the port on the FC fabric (LoggedIn or
NotLoggedIn)

Config Type

Configured FC port type, as follows:

Running Type

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



E (Expansion port) **not supported



F (Fabric port)



Eth (Ethernet port)

Current operational FC port type, as follows:


E (Expansion port) **not supported



F (Fabric port)



Eth (Ethernet port)



Unknown

Link Status

Current status of the port link (Active or Inactive)

Link Speed

Current operational link speed.

Chapter 2: Information Commands

181

The following command displays information specific FC ports:
show interface fc port 
Command mode: All
Port Number: EXT11
­­­­­­­­­­­­
AdminState
ConfigType
EPortIsolationReason
LinkSpeed
LinkState
LoginStatus
OperationalState
RunningType
Port Number: EXT12
­­­­­­­­­­­­
AdminState
ConfigType
EPortIsolationReason
LinkSpeed
LinkState
LoginStatus
OperationalState
RunningType
Port Number: EXT13
­­­­­­­­­­­­
AdminState
ConfigType
EPortIsolationReason
LinkSpeed
LinkState
LoginStatus
OperationalState
RunningType

Online
F
NotApplicable
Auto
Inactive
NotLoggedIn
Offline
Unkn

Online
F
NotApplicable
Auto
Inactive
NotLoggedIn
Offline
Unkn

Online
Eth
NotApplicable
10000
Inactive
NotLoggedIn
Offline
Eth

Topology Information
The following command displays a list of the ports and corresponding nodes for
each switch member of the fabric:
show topology
Command mode: All
Information for Switch Unit 1:
(This is the local swunit)
Switch Domain Id
: 1
Switch Mgmt Id
: 010000
Fabric Name
: 10:00:6c:ae:8b:d6:11:c1
Switch WWN
: 10:00:6c:ae:8b:d6:11:c1
Switch Ports Online:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Port
LocalPortWWN
RemoteNodeWWN
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
EXT1
20:00:00:11:0d:64:f5:00
20:00:00:11:0d:64:f5:00
EXT2
20:01:00:11:0d:64:f4:00
20:01:00:11:0d:64:f4:00

182

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Information Dump
The following command dumps switch information:
show information­dump
Command mode: All
Use the dump command to dump all switch information available (10K or more,
depending on your configuration). This data is useful for tuning and debugging
switch performance.
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on
your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 2: Information Commands

183

184

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Chapter 3. Statistics Commands
You can use the Statistics Commands to view switch performance statistics in both
the user and administrator command modes. This chapter discusses how to use the
command line interface to display switch statistics.
Table 88. Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show counters
Dumps all switch statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and
debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set
your communication software on your workstation to capture session data
prior to issuing the dump command. For details, see page 280.
Command mode: All
show layer3 counters
Displays Layer 3 statistics.
Command mode: All
show ntp counters
Displays Network Time Protocol (NTP) Statistics. See page 277 for a sample
output and a description of NTP Statistics.
Command mode: All
show snmp­server counters
Displays SNMP statistics. See page 273 for sample output.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

185

Forwarding Database Statistics
The following commands display Forwarding Database statistics.
Table 89. Forwarding Database statistics commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show mac­address­table counters [all]
Displays Forwarding Database (FDB) statistics. The all options displays all
FDB statistics (unicast and multicast).
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table counters interface
port 
Displays Forwarding Database (FDB) statistics for the specified port.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table counters portchannel 
Displays Forwarding Database (FDB) statistics for the specified trunk group.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table counters state
{forward|trunk|unknown}
Displays Forwarding Database (FDB) statistics by state:


forward displays FDB statistics for forwarding state MAC address entries



trunk displays FDB statistics for trunk state MAC address entries



unknown displays FDB statistics for unknown state MAC address entries

Command mode: All
show mac­address­table counters static
Displays Forwarding Database (FDB) statistics for static MAC address entries.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table counters unicast
Displays Forwarding Database (FDB) statistics for unicast MAC address
entries.
Command mode: All
show mac­address­table counters vlan 
Displays Forwarding Database (FDB) statistics for the specified VLAN.
Command mode: All
clear mac­address­table counters
Clears Forwarding Database (FDB) statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC

186

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Port Statistics
These commands display traffic statistics on a port‐by‐port basis. Traffic statistics
include SNMP Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
Table 90. Port Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show interface counters
Displays interface statistics.
Command mode: All
show interface port  all­counters
Displays all statistics for the specified port.
Command mode: All
show interface port  bridging­counters
Displays bridging (“dot1”) statistics for the specified port. See page 193 for
sample output.
Command mode: All
show interface port  dot1x counters
Displays IEEE 802.1X statistics for the specified port. See page 189 for sample
output.
Command mode: All
show interface port  ethernet­counters
Displays Ethernet (“dot3”) statistics for the specified port. See page 194 for
sample output.
Command mode: All
show interface port  interface­counters
Displays interface statistics for the specified port. See page 197 for sample
output.
Command mode: All
show interface port  ip­counters
Displays IP statistics for the specified port. See page 200 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show interface port  link­counters
Displays link statistics for the specified port. See page 200 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show interface port  link­counters
oam counters
Displays OAM link statistics for the specified port.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

187

Table 90. Port Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show interface port  maintenance­counters
Displays maintenance statistics for the specified port.
Command mode: All
show interface port  oam counters
Displays Operation, Administrative, and Maintenance (OAM) protocol
statistics for the port.
Command mode: All
show interface port  rmon­counters
Displays Remote Monitoring (RMON) statistics for the port. See page 201 for
sample output.
Command mode: All
clear counters
Clears statistics for all ports.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear interface port  counters
Clears all statistics for the port.
Command mode: All except User EXEC

188

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

802.1X Authenticator Statistics
Use the following command to display the 802.1X authenticator statistics of the
selected port:
show interface port  dot1x counters
Command mode: All
Authenticator Statistics:
eapolFramesRx
=
eapolFramesTx
=
eapolStartFramesRx
=
eapolLogoffFramesRx
=
eapolRespIdFramesRx
=
eapolRespFramesRx
=
eapolReqIdFramesTx
=
eapolReqFramesTx
=
invalidEapolFramesRx
=
eapLengthErrorFramesRx =
lastEapolFrameVersion =
lastEapolFrameSource
=

925
3201
2
0
463
460
1820
1381
0
0
1
00:01:02:45:ac:51

Table 91. 802.1X Authenticator Statistics of a Port

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

eapolFramesRx

Total number of EAPOL frames received.

eapolFramesTx

Total number of EAPOL frames transmitted.

eapolStartFramesRx

Total number of EAPOL Start frames received.

eapolLogoffFramesRx

Total number of EAPOL Logoff frames received.

eapolRespIdFramesRx

Total number of EAPOL Response Identity frames
received.

eapolRespFramesRx

Total number of Response frames received.

eapolReqIdFramesTx

Total number of Request Identity frames
transmitted.

eapolReqFramesTx

Total number of Request frames transmitted.

invalidEapolFramesRx

Total number of invalid EAPOL frames received.

eapLengthErrorFramesRx

Total number of EAP length error frames received.

lastEapolFrameVersion

The protocol version number carried in the most
recently received EAPOL frame.

lastEapolFrameSource

The source MAC address carried in the most
recently received EAPOL frame.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

189

802.1X Authenticator Diagnostics
Use the following command to display the 802.1X authenticator diagnostics of the
selected port:
show interface port  dot1x counters
Command mode: All
Authenticator Diagnostics:
authEntersConnecting
authEapLogoffsWhileConnecting
authEntersAuthenticating
authSuccessesWhileAuthenticating
authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating
authFailWhileAuthenticating
authReauthsWhileAuthenticating
authEapStartsWhileAuthenticating
authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticating
authReauthsWhileAuthenticated
authEapStartsWhileAuthenticated
authEapLogoffWhileAuthenticated
backendResponses
backendAccessChallenges
backendOtherRequestsToSupplicant
backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant
backendAuthSuccesses
backendAuthFails

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

1820
0
463
5
0
458
0
0
0
3
0
0
923
460
460
460
5
458

Table 92. 802.1X Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port

190

Statistics

Description

authEntersConnecting

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions to the CONNECTING state from any
other state.

authEapLogoffsWhile
Connecting

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from CONNECTING to
DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an
EAPOL‐Logoff message.

authEntersAuthenticating

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from CONNECTING to
AUTHENTICATING, as a result of an
EAP‐Response/Identity message being received
from the Supplicant.

authSuccessesWhile
Authenticating

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
AUTHENTICATED, as a result of the Backend
Authentication state machine indicating successful
authentication of the Supplicant.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 92. 802.1X Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (continued)

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

authTimeoutsWhile
Authenticating

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
ABORTING, as a result of the Backend
Authentication state machine indicating
authentication timeout.

authFailWhile
Authenticating

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to HELD, as a
result of the Backend Authentication state machine
indicating authentication failure.

authReauthsWhile
Authenticating

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
ABORTING, as a result of a re‐authentication
request.

authEapStartsWhile
Authenticating

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL‐Start message
being received from the Supplicant.

authEapLogoffWhile
Authenticating

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from AUTHENTICATING to
ABORTING, as a result of an EAPOL‐Logoff
message being received from the Supplicant.

authReauthsWhile
Authenticated

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from AUTHENTICATED to
CONNECTING, as a result of a re‐authentication
request.

authEapStartsWhile
Authenticated

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from AUTHENTICATED to
CONNECTING, as a result of an EAPOL‐Start
message being received from the Supplicant.

authEapLogoffWhile
Authenticated

Total number of times that the state machine
transitions from AUTHENTICATED to
DISCONNECTED, as a result of an EAPOL‐Logoff
message being received from the Supplicant.

backendResponses

Total number of times that the state machine sends
an initial Access‐Request packet to the
Authentication server. Indicates that the
Authenticator attempted communication with the
Authentication Server.

backendAccessChallenges

Total number of times that the state machine
receives an initial Access‐Challenge packet from the
Authentication server. Indicates that the
Authentication Server has communication with the
Authenticator.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

191

Table 92. 802.1X Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port (continued)

192

Statistics

Description

backendOtherRequests
ToSupplicant

Total number of times that the state machine sends
an EAP‐Request packet (other than an Identity,
Notification, Failure, or Success message) to the
Supplicant. Indicates that the Authenticator chose
an EAP‐method.

backendNonNak
ResponsesFromSupplicant

Total number of times that the state machine
receives a response from the Supplicant to an initial
EAP‐Request, and the response is something other
than EAP‐NAK. Indicates that the Supplicant can
respond to the Authenticator.s chosen EAP‐method.

backendAuthSuccesses

Total number of times that the state machine
receives an Accept message from the
Authentication Server. Indicates that the Supplicant
has successfully authenticated to the
Authentication Server.

backendAuthFails

Total number of times that the state machine
receives a Reject message from the Authentication
Server. Indicates that the Supplicant has not
authenticated to the Authentication Server.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Bridging Statistics
Use the following command to display the bridging statistics of the selected port:
show interface port  bridging­counters
Command mode: All
Bridging statistics for port INT1:
dot1PortInFrames:
dot1PortOutFrames:
dot1PortInDiscards:
dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards:
dot1StpPortForwardTransitions:

63242584
63277826
0
0
0

Table 93. Bridging Statistics of a Port

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

dot1PortInFrames

The number of frames that have been received by
this port from its segment. A frame received on the
interface corresponding to this port is only counted
by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being
processed by the local bridging function, including
bridge management frames.

dot1PortOutFrames

The number of frames that have been transmitted
by this port to its segment. Note that a frame
transmitted on the interface corresponding to this
port is only counted by this object if and only if it is
for a protocol being processed by the local bridging
function, including bridge management frames.

dot1PortInDiscards

Count of valid frames received which were
discarded (that is, filtered) by the Forwarding
Process.

dot1TpLearnedEntry
Discards

The total number of Forwarding Database entries,
which have been or would have been learnt, but
have been discarded due to a lack of space to store
them in the Forwarding Database. If this counter is
increasing, it indicates that the Forwarding
Database is regularly becoming full (a condition
which has unpleasant performance effects on the
subnetwork). If this counter has a significant value
but is not presently increasing, it indicates that the
problem has been occurring but is not persistent.

dot1StpPortForward
Transitions

The number of times this port has transitioned from
the Learning state to the Forwarding state.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

193

Ethernet Statistics
Use the following command to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port:
show interface port  ethernet­counters
Command mode: All
Ethernet statistics for port INT1:
dot3StatsAlignmentErrors:
dot3StatsFCSErrors:
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames:
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames:
dot3StatsLateCollisions:
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions:
dot3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors:
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs:
dot3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors:

0
0
0
0
0
0
NA
0
0

Table 94. Ethernet Statistics for Port
Statistics

Description

dot3StatsAlignment Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface
that are not an integral number of octets in length
and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS)
check.
The count represented by an instance of this object
is incremented when the alignmentError status
is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link
Control (LLC) (or other MAC user). Received
frames for which multiple error conditions obtained
are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3
Layer Management, counted exclusively according
to the error status presented to the LLC.
dot3StatsFCSErrors

A count of frames received on a particular interface
that are an integral number of octets in length but
do not pass the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) check.
The count represented by an instance of this object
is incremented when the frameCheckError status
is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other
MAC user). Received frames for which multiple
error conditions obtained are, according to the
conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management,
counted exclusively according to the error status
presented to the LLC.

194

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 94. Ethernet Statistics for Port (continued)
Statistics

Description

dot3StatsSingleCollision
Frames

A count of successfully transmitted frames on a
particular interface for which transmission is
inhibited by exactly one collision.
A frame that is counted by an instance of this object
is also counted by the corresponding instance of
either the ifOutUcastPkts,
ifOutMulticastPkts, or
ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the
corresponding instance of the
dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrame object.

dot3StatsMultipleCollision A count of successfully transmitted frames on a
Frames
particular interface for which transmission is
inhibited by more than one collision.
A frame that is counted by an instance of this object
is also counted by the corresponding instance of
either the ifOutUcastPkts,
ifOutMulticastPkts, or
ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the
corresponding instance of the
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object.
dot3StatsLateCollisions

The number of times that a collision is detected on a
particular interface later than 512 bit‐times into the
transmission of a packet.
Five hundred and twelve bit‐times corresponds to
51.2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit/s system. A (late)
collision included in a count represented by an
instance of this object is also considered as a
(generic) collision for purposes of other
collision‐related statistics.

dot3StatsExcessive
Collisions

A count of frames for which transmission on a
particular interface fails due to excessive collisions.

dot3StatsInternalMac
TransmitErrors

A count of frames for which transmission on a
particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub
layer transmit error. A frame is only counted by an
instance of this object if it is not counted by the
corresponding instance of either the
dot3StatsLateCollisions object, the
dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object, or the
dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object.
The precise meaning of the count represented by an
instance of this object is implementation‐specific. In
particular, an instance of this object may represent a
count of transmission errors on a particular
interface that are not otherwise counted.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

195

Table 94. Ethernet Statistics for Port (continued)
Statistics

Description

dot3StatsFrameTooLongs

A count of frames received on a particular interface
that exceed the maximum permitted frame size.
The count represented by an instance of this object
is incremented when the frameTooLong status is
returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other
MAC user). Received frames for which multiple
error conditions obtained are, according to the
conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management,
counted exclusively according to the error status
presented to the LLC.

dot3StatsInternalMac
ReceiveErrors

A count of frames for which reception on a
particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub
layer receive error. A frame is only counted by an
instance of this object if it is not counted by the
corresponding instance of either the
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object, the
dot3StatsAlignmentErrors object, or the
dot3StatsFCSErrors object.
The precise meaning of the count represented by an
instance of this object is implementation‐specific. In
particular, an instance of this object may represent a
count of received errors on a particular interface
that are not otherwise counted.

196

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Interface Statistics
Use the following command to display the interface statistics of the selected port:
show interface port  interface­counters
Command mode: All
Interface statistics for port EXT1:
ifHCIn Counters
Octets:
0
UcastPkts:
0
BroadcastPkts:
0
MulticastPkts:
0
FlowCtrlPkts:
0
PriFlowCtrlPkts:
0
Discards:
0
Errors:
0

Ingress Discard reasons:

ifHCOut Counters
648329
0
271
7654
0
0
11
0

Egress Discard reasons:

VLAN Discards:
Filter Discards:
Policy Discards:
Non­Forwarding State:
IBP/CBP Discards:

0
0
0
0
0

HOL­blocking Discards:
MMU Discards:
Cell Error Discards:
MMU Aging Discards:
Other Discards:

0
0
0
0
11

Table 95. Interface Statistics for Port

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

ifInOctets

The total number of octets received on the interface,
including framing characters.

ifInUcastPkts

The number of packets, delivered by this sub‐layer
to a higher sub‐ layer, which were not addressed to
a multicast or broadcast address at this sub‐layer.

ifInBroadcastPkts

The number of packets, delivered by this sub‐layer
to a higher sub‐ layer, which were addressed to a
broadcast address at this sub‐layer.

ifInMulticastPkts

The total number of packets that higher‐level
protocols requested to be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a multicast address at this
sub‐layer, including those that were discarded or
not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes
both Group and Functional addresses.

ifInFlowControlPkts

The total number of flow control pause packets
received on the interface.

ifInDiscards

The number of inbound packets which were chosen
to be discarded even though no errors had been
detected to prevent their being delivered to a
higher‐layer protocol. One possible reason for
discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer
space.
Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

197

Table 95. Interface Statistics for Port (continued)

198

Statistics

Description

ifInErrors

For packet‐oriented interfaces, the number of
inbound packets that contained errors preventing
them from being delivered to a higher‐layer
protocol. For character‐oriented or fixed‐length
interfaces, the number of inbound transmission
units that contained errors preventing them from
being deliverable to a higher‐layer protocol.

ifOutOctets

The total number of octets transmitted out of the
interface, including framing characters.

ifOutUcastPkts

The total number of packets that higher‐level
protocols requested to be transmitted, and which
were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast
address at this sub‐layer, including those that were
discarded or not sent.

ifOutBroadcastPkts

The total number of packets that higher‐level
protocols requested to be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sub‐layer, including those that were discarded or
not sent. This object is a 64‐bit version of
ifOutBroadcastPkts.

ifOutMulticastPkts

The total number of packets that higher‐level
protocols requested to be transmitted, and which
were addressed to a multicast address at this
sub‐layer, including those that were discarded or
not sent. For a MAC layer protocol, this includes
both Group and Functional addresses. This object is
a 64‐bit version of ifOutMulticastPkts.

ifOutFlowControlPkts

The total number of flow control pause packets
transmitted out of the interface.

ifOutDiscards

The number of outbound packets which were
chosen to be discarded even though no errors had
been detected to prevent their being transmitted.
One possible reason for discarding such a packet
could be to free up buffer space.

ifOutErrors

For packet‐oriented interfaces, the number of
outbound packets that could not be transmitted
because of errors. For character‐oriented or
fixed‐length interfaces, the number of outbound
transmission units that could not be transmitted
because of errors.

VLAN Discards

Discarded because the packet was tagged with a
VLAN to which this port is not a member.

Filter Discards

Dropped by the Content Aware Engine
(user‐configured filter).

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 95. Interface Statistics for Port (continued)
Statistics

Description

Policy Discards

Dropped due to policy setting. For example, due to
a user‐configured static entry.

Non‐Forwarding State

Discarded because the ingress port is not in the
forwarding state.

IBP/CBP Discards

Discarded because of Ingress Back Pressure (flow
control), or because the Common Buffer Pool is full
(for example, insufficient packet buffering).

HOL‐blocking Discards

Discarded because of the Head Of Line (HOL)
blocking mechanism. Low‐priority packets are
placed in a separate queue and can be discarded
while applications or the TCP protocol determine
whether a retransmission is necessary. HOL block‐
ing forces transmission to stop until the overloaded
egress port buffer can receive data again.

MMU Discards

Discarded because of the Memory Management
Unit.

Cell Error Discards
MMU Aging Discards

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Other Discards

Discarded packets not included in any category.

Empty Egress Portmap

Dropped due to an egress port bitmap of zero
condition (no ports in the egress mask). This
counter increments whenever the switching
decision found that there was no port to send out.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

199

Interface Protocol Statistics
Use the following command to display the interface protocol statistics of the
selected port:
show interface port  ip­counters
Command mode: All
GEA IP statistics for port INT1:
ipInReceives
:
0
ipInHeaderError:
0
ipInDiscards
:
0

Table 96. Interface Protocol Statistics
Statistics

Description

ipInReceives

The total number of input datagrams received from
interfaces, including those received in error.

ipInHeaderErrors

The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP
address in their IP headerʹs destination field was not a
valid address to be received at this entity (the switch).

ipInDiscards

The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems
were encountered to prevent their continued processing,
but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer
space). Note that this counter does not include any
datagrams discarded while awaiting re‐assembly.

Link Statistics
Use the following command to display the link statistics of the selected port:
show interface port  link­counters
Command mode: All
Link statistics for port INT1:
linkStateChange:
1

Table 97. Link Statistics

200

Statistics

Description

linkStateChange

The total number of link state changes.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

RMON Statistics
Use the following command to display the Remote Monitoring (RMON) statistics
of the selected port:
show interface port  rmon­counters
Command mode: All
RMON statistics for port EXT2:
etherStatsDropEvents:
etherStatsOctets:
etherStatsPkts:
etherStatsBroadcastPkts:
etherStatsMulticastPkts:
etherStatsCRCAlignErrors:
etherStatsUndersizePkts:
etherStatsOversizePkts:
etherStatsFragments:
etherStatsJabbers:
etherStatsCollisions:
etherStatsPkts64Octets:
etherStatsPkts65to127Octets:
etherStatsPkts128to255Octets:
etherStatsPkts256to511Octets:
etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets:
etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets:

NA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Table 98. RMON Statistics of a Port

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

etherStatsDropEvents

The total number of packets received that were
dropped because of system resource constraints.

etherStatsOctets

The total number of octets of data (including those
in bad packets) received on the network (excluding
framing bits but including FCS octets).

etherStatsPkts

The total number of packets (including bad packets,
broadcast packets, and multicast packets) received.

etherStatsBroadcastPkts

The total number of good packets received that
were directed to the broadcast address.

etherStatsMulticastPkts

The total number of good packets received that
were directed to a multicast address.

etherStatsCRCAlignErrors

The total number of packets received that had a
length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS
octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but
had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with
an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad
FCS with a non‐integral number of octets
(Alignment Error).

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

201

Table 98. RMON Statistics of a Port (continued)

202

Statistics

Description

etherStatsUndersizePkts

The total number of packets received that were less
than 64 octets long (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets) and were otherwise well
formed.

etherStatsOversizePkts

The total number of packets received that were
longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets) and were otherwise well
formed.

etherStatsFragments

The total number of packets received that were less
than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets) and had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non‐integral
number of octets (Alignment Error).

etherStatsJabbers

The total number of packets received that were
longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but
including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame
Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of
octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non‐integral
number of octets (Alignment Error). Jabber is
defined as the condition where any packet exceeds
20 ms. The allowed range to detect jabber is
between 20 ms and 150 ms.

etherStatsCollisions

The best estimate of the total number of collisions
on this Ethernet segment.

etherStatsPkts64Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were less than or equal to 64
octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).

etherStatsPkts65to127
Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were greater than 64 octets in
length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).

etherStatsPkts128to255
Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were greater than 127 octets
in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).

etherStatsPkts256to511
Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were greater than 255 octets
in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 98. RMON Statistics of a Port (continued)

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

etherStatsPkts512to1023
Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were greater than 511 octets
in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).

etherStatsPkts1024to1518
Octets

The total number of packets (including bad
packets) received that were greater than 1023 octets
in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS
octets).

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

203

QoS Queue Statistics
The following commands display Quality of Service (QoS) Queue statistics.
Table 99. QoS Queue Statistics
Command Syntax and Usage

show interface port  egress­queue­counters
[<0‐7>|drop]
Displays the total number of successfully transmitted or dropped packets and
bytes for each QoS queue for the selected port.


<0­7> displays statistics only for the specified queue



drop displays statistics only for the dropped packets and bytes

Command mode: All
show interface port 
egress­mcast­queue­counters [<8‐11>|drop]
Displays the total number of successfully transmitted or dropped packets and
bytes for each multicast QoS queue for the selected port.


<8­11> displays statistics only for the specified queue



drop displays statistics only for the dropped packets and bytes

Command mode: All
show interface port  egress­queue­rate
[<0‐7>|drop]
Displays the number of successfully transmitted or dropped packets and bytes
per second for each QoS queue for the selected port.


<0­7> displays statistics only for the specified queue



drop displays statistics only for the dropped packets and bytes

Command mode: All
show interface port 
egress­mcast­queue­rate [<8‐11>|drop]
Displays the number of successfully transmitted or dropped packets and bytes
per second for each multicast QoS queue for the selected port.


<8­11> displays statistics only for the specified queue



drop displays statistics only for the dropped packets and bytes

Command mode: All

204

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Use the following command to display the rate‐based QoS queue statistics of the
selected port:
show interface port  egress­queue­rate
Command mode: All
QoS Rate for port INTA14:
QoS Queue 0:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 1:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 2:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 3:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 4:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 5:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 6:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 7:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:

5
0
363
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Table 100. QoS Queue Rate‐Based Statistics of a Port

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

Tx Packets

Number of successfully transmitted packets
per second for the QoS queue.

Dropped Packets

Number of dropped packets per second for the
QoS queue.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

205

Table 100. QoS Queue Rate‐Based Statistics of a Port (continued)
Statistics

Description

Tx Bytes

Number of successfully transmitted bytes per
second for the QoS queue.

Dropped Bytes

Number of dropped bytes per second for the
QoS queue.

Use the following command to display the ‐based QoS queue statistics of the
selected port:
show interface port  egress­queue­counters
Command mode: All
QoS Rate for port 1:1:
QoS Queue 0:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 1:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 2:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 3:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 4:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 5:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 6:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:
QoS Queue 7:
Tx Packets:
Dropped Packets:
Tx Bytes:
Dropped Bytes:

206

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Table 101. QoS Queue Rate‐Based Statistics of a Port

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

Tx Packets

Total number of successfully transmitted
packets for the QoS queue.

Dropped Packets

Total number of dropped packets for the QoS
queue.

Tx Bytes

Total number of successfully transmitted bytes
for the QoS queue.

Dropped Bytes

Total number of dropped bytes for the QoS
queue.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

207

Trunk Group Statistics
The following commands display Trunk Group statistics.
Table 102. Trunk Group Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show interface portchannel 
interface­counters
Displays interface statistics for the trunk group. For a sample output see
page 208.
Command mode: All
clear interface portchannel  counters
Clears all the statistics on the specified trunk group.
Command mode: All except User EXEC

Trunk Group Interface Statistics
The following command displays interface statistics for the specified trunk group.
show interface portchannel  interface­counters
Command mode: All
Interface statistics for trunk group 12:
ifHCIn Counters
Octets:
6003620
UcastPkts:
0
BroadcastPkts:
0
MulticastPkts:
42883
FlowCtrlPkts:
0
PriFlowCtrlPkts:
0
Discards:
0
Errors:
0
Ingress Discard reasons for trunk group 12:
VLAN Discards:
0
Empty Egress Portmap:
0
Filter Discards:
0
Policy Discards:
0
Non­Forwarding State:
0
IBP/CBP Discards:
0

208

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

ifHCOut Counters
27746863
0
33358
135420
0
0
0
0

Layer 2 Statistics
The following commands display Layer 2 statistics.
Table 103. Layer 2 Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show fcoe counters
Displays Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) statistics. See page 272 for
sample output.
Command mode: All
show interface port  lacp counters
Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics for the specified
port. See page 210 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show interface port  lldp counters
Displays LLDP statistics for the specified port. See page 212 for sample output.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
show hotlinks counters
Displays Hot Links statistics. See page 211 for sample output.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
show oam counters
Displays OAM statistics. See page 213 for sample output.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear fcoe counters
Clears all Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) statistics.
Command mode: All
clear interface port  lacp counters
Clears all Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics for the specified
port.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear interface port  lldp counters
Clears all LLDP statistics for the port.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear hotlinks
Clears all Hot Links statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

209

LACP Statistics
Use the following command to display Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
statistics:
show interface port  lacp counters
Command mode: All
Port EXT1:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Valid LACPDUs received:
­ 870
Valid Marker PDUs received:
­ 0
Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received: ­ 0
Unknown version/TLV type:
­ 0
Illegal subtype received:
­ 0
LACPDUs transmitted:
­ 6031
Marker PDUs transmitted:
­ 0
Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted:
­ 0

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) statistics are described in the following
table:
Table 104. LACP Statistics

210

Statistic

Description

Valid LACPDUs
received

Total number of valid LACP data units received.

Valid Marker PDUs
received

Total number of valid LACP marker data units received.

Valid Marker Rsp
PDUs received

Total number of valid LACP marker response data units
received.

Unknown
version/TLV type

Total number of LACP data units with an unknown
version or type, length, and value (TLV) received.

Illegal subtype
received

Total number of LACP data units with an illegal subtype
received.

LACPDUs
transmitted

Total number of LACP data units transmitted.

Marker PDUs
transmitted

Total number of LACP marker data units transmitted.

Marker Rsp PDUs
transmitted

Total number of LACP marker response data units
transmitted.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Hotlinks Statistics
Use the following command to display Hot Links statistics:
show hotlinks counters
Command mode: All
Hot Links Trigger Stats:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Trigger 1 statistics:
Trigger Name: Trigger 1
Master active:
0
Backup active:
0
FDB update:
0
failed: 0

The following table describes the Hotlinks statistics:
Table 105. Hotlinks Statistics

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistic

Description

Master active

Total number of times the Master interface transitioned to the
Active state.

Backup active

Total number of times the Backup interface transitioned to the
Active state.

FDB update

Total number of FDB update requests sent.

failed

Total number of FDB update requests that failed.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

211

LLDP Port Statistics
Use the following command to display LLDP statistics:
show interface port  lldp counters
Command mode: All
LLDP Port INT1 Statistics
­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­ ­
Frames Transmitted
: 0
Frames Received
: 0
Frames Received in Errors
: 0
Frames Discarded
: 0
TLVs Unrecognized
: 0
Neighbors Aged Out
: 0
...

The following table describes the LLDP port statistics:
Table 106. LLDP Port Statistics
Statistic

Description

Frames Transmitted Total number of LLDP frames transmitted.
Frames Received

Total number of LLDP frames received.

Frames Received in
Errors

Total number of LLDP frames that had errors.

Frames Discarded

Total number of LLDP frames discarded.

TLVs Unrecognized

Total number of unrecognized TLV (Type, Length, and
Value) fields received.

Neighbors Aged Out Total number of neighbor devices that have had their

LLDP information aged out.

212

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OAM Statistics
Use the following command to display OAM statistics:
show oam counters
Command mode: All
OAM statistics on port INT1
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Information OAMPDU Tx :
0
Information OAMPDU Rx :
0
Unsupported OAMPDU Tx :
0
Unsupported OAMPDU Tx :
0
Local faults
­­­­­­­­­­­­­
0 Link fault records
0 Critical events
0 Dying gasps
Remote faults
­­­­­­­­­­­­­
0 Link fault records
0 Critical events
0 Dying gasps

OAM statistics include the following:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



Total number of OAM Protocol Data Units (OAMPDU) transmitted and
received.



Total number of unsupported OAM Protocol Data Units (OAMPDU)
transmitted and received.



Local faults detected.



Remote faults detected.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

213

vLAG Statistics
The following table describes the vLAG statistics commands:
Table 107. vLAG Statistics Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show vlag isl­statistics
Displays vLAG ISL statistics for the selected port. See page 214 for sample
output.
show vlag statistics
Displays all vLAG statistics. See page 214 for sample output.
clear vlag statistics
Clears all vLAG statistics.

vLAG ISL Statistics
Use the following command to display vLAG statistics:
show vlag isl­statistics
Command mode: All
In Counter
2755820
21044

Octets:
Packets:

Out Counter
2288
26

ISL statistics include the total number of octets received/transmitted, and the total
number of packets received/transmitted over the Inter‐Switch Link (ISL).

vLAG Statistics
Use the following command to display vLAG statistics:
show vlag statistics
Command mode: All
vLAG PDU sent:
Role Election:
Peer Instance Enable:
FDB Dynamic Add:
FDB Inactive Add:
Health Check:
Other:

0
0
0
0
0
0

System Info:
Peer Instance Disable:
FDB Dynamic Del:
FDB Inactive Del:
ISL Hello:
Unknown:

0
0
0
0
0
0

vLAG PDU received:
Role Election:
Peer Instance Enable:
FDB Dynamic Add:
FDB Inactive Add:
Health Check:
Other:

0
0
0
0
0
0

System Info:
Peer Instance Disable:
FDB Dynamic Del:
FDB Inactive Del:
ISL Hello:
Unknown:

0
0
0
0
0
0

vLAG IGMP packets forwarded:
IGMP Reports:
0
IGMP Leaves:
0

214

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

The following table describes the vLAG statistics:
Table 108. vLAG Statistics

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistic

Description

Role Election

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for role elections.

System Info

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for getting system
information.

Peer Instance
Enable

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for enabling peer
instance.

Peer Instance
Disable

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for disabling peer
instance.

FDB Dynamic Add

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for addition of FDB
dynamic entry.

FDB Dynamic Del

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for deletion of FDB
dynamic entry.

FDB Inactive Add

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for addition of FDB
inactive entry.

FDB Inactive Del

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for deletion of FDB
inactive entry.

Health Check

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for health checks.

ISL Hello

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for ISL hello.

Other

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for other reasons.

Unknown

Total number of vLAG PDUs sent for unknown
operations.

IGMP Reports

Total number of IGMP Reports forwarded over vLAG.

IGMP Leaves

Total number of IGMP Leave messages forwarded over
vLAG.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

215

Layer 3 Statistics
The following commands display Layer 3 statistics.
Table 109. Layer 3 Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip arp counters
Displays Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics. See page 230 for
sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip counters
Displays IP statistics. See page 220 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip dns counters
Displays Domain Name System (DNS) statistics. See page 231 for sample
output.
Command mode: All
show ip icmp counters
Displays ICMP statistics. See page 232 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp counters
Displays IGMP statistics. See page 237 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp vlan  counter
Displays IGMP statistics for a specific VLAN. See page 237 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip pim counters
Displays PIM statistics for all configured PIM interfaces. See page 252 for
sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip pim interface  counters
Displays PIM statistics for the selected interface.
Command mode: All
show ip pim mroute count
Displays statistics of various multicast entry types.
Command mode: All

216

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 109. Layer 3 Statistics Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip ospf counters
Displays OSPF statistics. See page 243 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip rip counters
Displays Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics. See page 253 for
sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip route counters
Displays route statistics. See page 228 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip slp counter
Displays Service Location Protocol (SLP) packet statistics. See page 279 for a
sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip tcp counters
Displays TCP statistics. See page 234 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip udp counters
Displays UDP statistics. See page 236 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip vrrp counters
When virtual routers are configured, you can display the protocol statistics for
VRRP. See page 251 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 counters
Displays IPv6 statistics. See page 223 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld counters
Displays Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) statistics.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf counters
Displays OSPFv3 statistics. See page 248 for sample output.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

217

Table 109. Layer 3 Statistics Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

clear ip counters
Clears IPv4 statistics. Use this command with caution as it deletes all the IPv4
statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear ip arp counters
Clears Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear ip dns counters
Clears Domain Name System (DNS) statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear ip icmp counters
Clears Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear ip igmp [] counters
Clears IGMP statistics for all VLANs or for a specific VLAN.
Command mode: All
clear ip ospf counters
Clears Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear ip rip counters
Clears Routing Information Protocol (RIP) statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear ip slp counters
Clears Service Location Protocol (SLP) packet statistics.
Command mode: All except user EXEC
clear ip tcp counters
Clears Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear ip udp counters
Clears User Datagram Protocol (UDP) statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear ip vrrp counters
Clears VRRP statistics.
Command mode: All

218

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 109. Layer 3 Statistics Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

clear ipv6 counters
Clears IPv6 statistics. Use this command with caution as it deletes all the IPv6
statistics.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
show layer3 counters
Dumps all Layer 3 statistics. Use this command to gather data for tuning and
debugging switch performance. If you want to capture dump data to a file, set
your communication software on your workstation to capture session data
prior to issuing the dump command.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

219

IPv4 Statistics
The following command displays IPv4 statistics:
show ip counters
Command mode: All
IP statistics:
ipInReceives:
ipInAddrErrors:
ipInUnknownProtos:
ipInDelivers:
ipOutDiscards:
ipReasmReqds:
ipReasmFails:
ipFragFails:
ipRoutingDiscards:
ipReasmTimeout:

3115873
35447
500504
2334166
4
0
0
0
0
5

ipInHdrErrors:
ipForwDatagrams:
ipInDiscards:
ipOutRequests:
ipOutNoRoutes:
ipReasmOKs:
ipFragOKs:
ipFragCreates:
ipDefaultTTL:

1
0
0
1010542
4
0
0
0
255

Table 110. IP Statistics

220

Statistic

Description

ipInReceives

The total number of input datagrams received from
interfaces, including those received in error.

ipInHdrErrors

The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in
their IP headers, including bad checksums, version
number mismatch, other format errors, time‐to‐live
exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options,
and so forth.

ipInAddrErrors

The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP
address in their IP headerʹs destination field was not a valid
address to be received at this entity (the switch). This count
includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and
addresses of unsupported Classes (for example, Class E).
For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not
forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams
discarded because the destination address was not a local
address.

ipForwDatagrams

The number of input datagrams for which this entity (the
switch) was not their final IP destination, as a result of
which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them
to that final destination. In entities which do not act as IP
Gateways, this counter will include only those packets,
which were Source‐Routed via this entity (the switch), and
the Source‐ Route option processing was successful.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 110. IP Statistics (continued)

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistic

Description

ipInUnknownProt
os

The number of locally addressed datagrams received
successfully but discarded because of an unknown or
unsupported protocol.

ipInDiscards

The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems
were encountered to prevent their continued processing,
but which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer
space). Note that this counter does not include any
datagrams discarded while awaiting re‐assembly.

ipInDelivers

The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered
to IP user‐protocols (including ICMP).

ipOutRequests

The total number of IP datagrams which local IP
user‐protocols (including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests
for transmission. Note that this counter does not include
any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.

ipOutDiscards

The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem
was encountered to prevent their transmission to their
destination, but which were discarded (for example, for
lack of buffer space). Note that this counter would include
datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such
packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.

ipOutNoRoutes

The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route
could be found to transmit them to their destination. Note
that this counter includes any packets counted in
ipForwDatagrams, which meet this no‐route criterion.
Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot
route because all of its default gateways are down.

ipReasmReqds

The number of IP fragments received which needed to be
reassembled at this entity (the switch).

ipReasmOKs

The number of IP datagrams successfully re‐ assembled.

ipReasmFails

The number of failures detected by the IP re‐ assembly
algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so
forth). Note that this is not necessarily a count of discarded
IP fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm
in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by
combining them as they are received.

ipFragOKs

The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully
fragmented at this entity (the switch).

ipFragFails

The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded
because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the
switch) but could not be, for example, because their Don't
Fragment flag was set.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

221

Table 110. IP Statistics (continued)
Statistic

Description

ipFragCreates

The number of IP datagram fragments that have been
generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the
switch).

ipRoutingDiscards

The number of routing entries, which were chosen to be
discarded even though they are valid. One possible reason
for discarding such an entry could be to free‐up buffer
space for other routing entries.

ipDefaultTTL

The default value inserted into the Time­To­Live (TTL)
field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity
(the switch), whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the
transport layer protocol.

ipReasmTimeout

The maximum number of seconds, which received
fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at
this entity (the switch).

Use the following command to clear IPv4 statistics:
clear ip counters
Command mode: All except User EXEC

222

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IPv6 Statistics
The following command displays IPv6 statistics:
show ipv6 counters
Command mode: All
IPv6 Statistics
***************
48016 Rcvd
0 AddrErrors
0 Discards
0 OutDiscards
0 ReasmOKs
0 FragOKs
0 RcvdMCastPkt
0 RcvdRedirects
ICMP Statistics
***************
Received :
43353 ICMPPkts
0 ParmProbs
0 RouterSols
0 Redirects
Sent :
43269 ICMPMsgs
0 ParmProbs
6 RouterSols
0 RedirectMsgs
UDP statistics
**************
Received :
4679 UDPDgrams
Sent :
91 UDPDgrams

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

0
0
48016
0
0
0
146
0

1
0
0
91
0
0
0
0

HdrErrors
FwdDgrams
Delivers
OutNoRoutes
ReasmFails
FragFails
SentMCastPkts
SentRedirects

0
0
48155
0

ICMPErrPkt
PktTooBigMsg
RouterAdv
AdminProhib

91
39512
1828
0

TooBigErrors
UnknownProtos
OutRequests
ReasmReqds

0 FragCreates
0 TruncatedPkts

DestUnreach
ICMPEchoReq
NeighSols
ICMPBadCode

ICMPErrMsgs
0 DstUnReach
PktTooBigs
0 EchoReq
RouterAdv
1924 NeighSols
AdminProhibMsgs

0 UDPNoPorts

0 TimeExcds
0 ICMPEchoReps
1922 NeighAdv

0 TimeExcds
39512 EchoReply
1827 NeighborAdv

0 UDPErrPkts

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

223

Table 111 describes the IPv6 statistics.
Table 111. IPv6 Statistics

224

Statistic

Description

Rcvd

Number of datagrams received from interfaces,
including those received in error.

HdrErrors

Number of datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP
headers, including bad checksums, version number
mismatch, other format errors, time‐to‐live exceeded,
errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so
forth.

TooBigErrors

The number of input datagrams that could not be
forwarded because their size exceeded the link MTU of
outgoing interface.

AddrErrors

Number of datagrams discarded because the IP address
in their IP headerʹs destination field was not a valid
address to be received at this entity (the switch). This
count includes invalid addresses. For entities which are
not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward
datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded
because the destination address was not a local address.

FwdDgrams

Number of input datagrams for which this entity (the
switch) was not their final IP destination, as a result of
which an attempt was made to find a route to forward
them to that final destination. In entities which do not act
as IP Gateways, this counter will include only those
packets, which were Source‐Routed via this entity (the
switch), and the Source‐ Route option processing was
successful.

UnknownProtos

Number of locally addressed datagrams received
successfully but discarded because of an unknown or
unsupported protocol.

Discards

Number of IP datagrams for which no problems were
encountered to prevent their continued processing, but
which were discarded (for example, for lack of buffer
space). Note that this counter does not include any
datagrams discarded while awaiting re‐assembly.

Delivers

Number of datagrams successfully delivered to IP
user‐protocols (including ICMP).

OutRequests

Number of IP datagrams which local IP user‐protocols
(including ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for
transmission.

OutDiscards

Number of output IP datagrams for which no problem
was encountered to prevent their transmission to their
destination, but which were discarded (for example, for
lack of buffer space).

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 111. IPv6 Statistics (continued)

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistic

Description

OutNoRoutes

Number of IP datagrams discarded because no route
could be found to transmit them to their destination.
Note that this includes any datagrams which a host
cannot route because all of its default gateways are
down.

ReasmReqds

Number of IP fragments received which needed to be
reassembled at this entity (the switch).

ReasmOKs

Number of IP datagrams successfully re‐ assembled.

ReasmFails

Number of failures detected by the IP re‐ assembly
algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so
forth). Note that this is not necessarily a count of
discarded IP fragments since some algorithms (notably
the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of
fragments by combining them as they are received.

FragOKs

Number of IP datagrams that have been successfully
fragmented at this entity (the switch).

FragFails

Number of IP datagrams that have been discarded
because they needed to be fragmented at this entity (the
switch) but could not be, for example, because their
Don't Fragment flag was set.

FragCreates

Number of IP datagram fragments that have been
generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity (the
switch).

RcvdMCastPkt

The number of multicast packets received by the
interface.

SentMcastPkts

The number of multicast packets transmitted by the
interface.

TruncatedPkts

The number of input datagrams discarded because
datagram frame didnʹt carry enough data.

RcvdRedirects

The number of Redirect messages received by the
interface.

SentRedirects

The number of Redirect messages sent.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

225

The following table describes the IPv6 ICMP statistics.
Table 112. ICMP Statistics
Statistic

Description

Received
ICMPPkts

Number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch)
received.

ICMPErrPkt

Number of ICMP messages which the entity (the switch)
received but determined as having ICMP‐specific errors
(bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so forth).

DestUnreach

Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages
received.

TimeExcds

Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received.

ParmProbs

Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received.

PktTooBigMsg

The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received
by the interface.

ICMPEchoReq

Number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received.

ICMPEchoReps

Number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.

RouterSols

Number of Router Solicitation messages received by the
switch.

RouterAdv

Number of Router Advertisements received by the
switch.

NeighSols

Number of Neighbor Solicitations received by the switch.

NeighAdv

Number of Neighbor Advertisements received by the
switch.

Redirects

Number of ICMP Redirect messages received.

AdminProhib

The number of ICMP destination
unreachable/communication administratively prohibited
messages received by the interface.

ICMPBadCode

The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages
received by the interface.

Sent

226

ICMPMsgs

Number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch)
attempted to send.

ICMPErrMsgs

Number of ICMP messages which this entity (the switch)
did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP
such as a lack of buffer. This value should not include
errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the
inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some
implementations there may be no types of errors that
contribute to this counterʹs value.

DstUnReach

Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages
sent.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 112. ICMP Statistics (continued)
Statistic

Description

TimeExcds

Number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.

ParmProbs

Number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent.

PktTooBigs

The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent by
the interface.

EchoReq

Number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.

EchoReply

Number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.

RouterSols

Number of Router Solicitation messages sent by the
switch.

RouterAdv

Number of Router Advertisements sent by the switch.

NeighSols

Number of Neighbor Solicitations sent by the switch.

NeighAdv

Number of Neighbor Advertisements sent by the switch.

RedirectMsgs

Number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. For a host, this
object will always be zero, since hosts do not send
redirects.

AdminProhibMsgs

Number of ICMP destination
unreachable/communication administratively prohibited
messages sent.

Table 113 describes the UDP statistics.
Table 113. UDP Statistics
Statistic

Description

Received
UDPDgrams

Number of UDP datagrams received by the switch.

UDPNoPorts

Number of received UDP datagrams for which there was
no application at the destination port.

UDPErrPkts

Number of received UDP datagrams that could not be
delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application
at the destination port.

Sent
UDPDgrams

Number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity (the
switch).

Use the following command to clear IPv6 statistics:
clear ipv6 counters
Command mode: All except User EXEC

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

227

IPv4 Route Statistics
The following command displays IPv4 route statistics:
show ip route counters
Command mode: All
Route statistics:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Current total outstanding routes
Highest number ever recorded
Current static routes
Current RIP routes
Current OSPF routes
Current BGP routes
Maximum supported routes

:
:
:
:
:
:
:

1
1
0
0
0
0
2048

ECMP statistics (active in ASIC):
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Maximum number of ECMP routes
:
Maximum number of static ECMP routes :
Number of routes with ECMP paths
:

2048
128
0

Table 114. Route Statistics
Statistics

Description

Current total
outstanding routes

Total number of outstanding routes in the route table.

Highest number
ever recorded

Highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table.

Current static routes Total number of static routes in the route table.
Current RIP routes

Total number of Routing Information Protocol (RIP)
routes in the route table.

Current OSPF routes Total number of OSPF routes in the route table.

228

Current BGP routes

Total number of Border Gateway Protocol routes in the
route table.

Maximum
supported routes

Maximum number of routes that are supported.

Maximum number
of ECMP routes

Maximum number of ECMP routes that are supported.

Maximum number
of static ECMP
routes

Maximum number of static ECMP routes that are
supported.

Number of routes
with ECMP paths

Current number of routes that contain ECMP paths.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IPv6 Route Statistics
The following command displays IPv6 route statistics:
show ipv6 route counters
Command mode: All
IPV6 Route statistics:
ipv6RoutesCur:
ipv6RoutesMax:

4
1156

ipv6RoutesHighWater:

ECMP statistics:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Maximum number of ECMP routes
:
Max ECMP paths allowed for one route :

6

600
5

Table 115. IPv6 Route Statistics
Statistics

Description

ipv6RoutesCur

Total number of outstanding routes in the route table.

ipv6RoutesHighWate Highest number of routes ever recorded in the route
r
table.
ipv6RoutesMax

Maximum number of routes that are supported.

Maximum number of
ECMP routes

Maximum number of ECMP routes supported.

Max ECMP paths
Maximum number of ECMP paths supported for each
allowed for one route route.
Use the clear option to delete all IPv6 route statistics.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

229

ARP statistics
The following command displays Address Resolution Protocol statistics.
show [ip] arp counters
Command mode: All
ARP statistics:
arpEntriesCur:
arpEntriesMax:

3
4095

arpEntriesHighWater:

4

Table 116. ARP Statistics

230

Statistic

Description

arpEntriesCur

The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP
table.

arpEntriesHighWate
r

The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the
ARP table.

arpEntriesMax

The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

DNS Statistics
The following command displays Domain Name System statistics.
show ip dns counters
Command mode: All
DNS statistics:
dnsInRequests:
dnsOutRequests:
dnsBadRequests:

0
0
0

Table 117. DNS Statistics

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

dnsInRequests

The total number of DNS response packets that have been
received.

dnsOutRequests

The total number of DNS response packets that have been
transmitted.

dnsBadRequests

The total number of DNS request packets received that
were dropped.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

231

ICMP Statistics
The following command displays ICMP statistics:
show ip icmp counters
Command mode: All
ICMP statistics:
icmpInMsgs:
icmpInDestUnreachs:
icmpInParmProbs:
icmpInRedirects:
icmpInEchoReps:
icmpInTimestampReps:
icmpInAddrMaskReps:
icmpOutErrors:
icmpOutTimeExcds:
icmpOutSrcQuenchs:
icmpOutEchos:
icmpOutTimestamps:
icmpOutAddrMasks:

245802
41
0
0
244350
0
0
0
0
0
253777
0
0

icmpInErrors:
icmpInTimeExcds:
icmpInSrcQuenchs:
icmpInEchos:
icmpInTimestamps:
icmpInAddrMasks:
icmpOutMsgs:
icmpOutDestUnreachs:
icmpOutParmProbs:
icmpOutRedirects:
icmpOutEchoReps:
icmpOutTimestampReps:
icmpOutAddrMaskReps:

1393
0
0
18
0
0
253810
15
0
0
18
0
0

Table 118. ICMP Statistics

232

Statistic

Description

icmpInMsgs

The total number of ICMP messages which the entity
(the switch) received. Note that this counter includes
all those counted by icmpInErrors.

icmpInErrors

The number of ICMP messages which the entity (the
switch) received but determined as having
ICMP‐specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad
length, and so forth).

icmpInDestUnreachs

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable
messages received.

icmpInTimeExcds

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages
received.

icmpInParmProbs

The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages
received.

icmpInSrcQuenchs

The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost
full, stop sending data) messages received.

icmpInRedirects

The number of ICMP Redirect messages received.

icmpInEchos

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages
received.

icmpInEchoReps

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received.

icmpInTimestamps

The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages
received.

icmpInTimestampReps

The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages
received.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 118. ICMP Statistics

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistic

Description

icmpInAddrMasks

The number of ICMP Address Mask Request
messages received.

icmpInAddrMaskReps

The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages
received.

icmpOutMsgs

The total number of ICMP messages which this entity
(the switch) attempted to send. Note that this counter
includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.

icmpOutErrors

The number of ICMP messages which this entity (the
switch) did not send due to problems discovered
within ICMP such as a lack of buffer. This value
should not include errors discovered outside the
ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the
resultant datagram. In some implementations there
may be no types of errors that contribute to this
counterʹs value.

icmpOutDestUnreachs

The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable
messages sent.

icmpOutTimeExcds

The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent.

icmpOutParmProbs

The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages
sent.

icmpOutSrcQuenchs

The number of ICMP Source Quench (buffer almost
full, stop sending data) messages sent.

icmpOutRedirects

The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent. For a
host, this object will always be zero, since hosts do
not send redirects.

icmpOutEchos

The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent.

icmpOutEchoReps

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.

icmpOutTimestamps

The number of ICMP Timestamp (request) messages
sent.

icmpOutTimestampReps

The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages
sent.

icmpOutAddrMasks

The number of ICMP Address Mask Request
messages sent.

icmpOutAddrMaskReps

The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages
sent.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

233

TCP Statistics
The following command displays TCP statistics:
show ip tcp counters
Command mode: All
TCP statistics:
tcpRtoAlgorithm:
tcpRtoMax:
tcpActiveOpens:
tcpAttemptFails:
tcpInSegs:
tcpRetransSegs:
tcpCurrEstab:
tcpOutRsts:

4
240000
0
0
2035
21
1
0

tcpRtoMin:
tcpMaxConn:
tcpPassiveOpens:
tcpEstabResets:
tcpOutSegs:
tcpInErrs:
tcpCurrConn:

0
2048
16
0
1748
0
5

Table 119. TCP Statistics

234

Statistic

Description

tcpRtoAlgorithm

The algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for
retransmitting unacknowledged octets.

tcpRtoMin

The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for
the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds.
More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon
the algorithm used to determine the retransmission
timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is
rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the
LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.

tcpRtoMax

The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for
the retransmission timeout, measured in milliseconds.
More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon
the algorithm used to determine the retransmission
timeout. In particular, when the timeout algorithm is
rsre(3), an object of this type has the semantics of the
UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793.

tcpMaxConn

The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity
(the switch) can support. In entities where the maximum
number of connections is dynamic, this object should contain
the value ‐1.

tcpActiveOpens

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct
transition to the SYN‐SENT state from the CLOSED state.

tcpPassiveOpens

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct
transition to the SYN‐RCVD state from the LISTEN state.

tcpAttemptFails

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct
transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN‐SENT
state or the SYN‐RCVD state, plus the number of times TCP
connections have made a direct transition to the LISTEN state
from the SYN‐RCVD state.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 119. TCP Statistics (continued)

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistic

Description

tcpEstabResets

The number of times TCP connections have made a direct
transition to the CLOSED state from either the
ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE‐WAIT state.

tcpInSegs

The total number of segments received, including those
received in error. This count includes segments received on
currently established connections.

tcpOutSegs

The total number of segments sent, including those on
current connections but excluding those containing only
retransmitted octets.

tcpRetransSegs

The total number of segments retransmitted ‐ that is, the
number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more
previously transmitted octets.

tcpInErrs

The total number of segments received in error (for example,
bad TCP checksums).

tcpCurEstab

The total number of outstanding TCP sessions in the
ESTABLISHED state.

tcpCurConn

The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are
currently opened.

tcpOutRsts

The number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

235

UDP Statistics
The following command displays UDP statistics:
show ip udp counters
Command mode: All
UDP statistics:
udpInDatagrams:
udpInErrors:

54
0

udpOutDatagrams:
udpNoPorts:

43
1578077

Table 120. UDP Statistics

236

Statistic

Description

udpInDatagrams

The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the
switch.

udpOutDatagrams

The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity
(the switch).

udpInErrors

The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be
delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application
at the destination port.

udpNoPorts

The total number of received UDP datagrams for which
there was no application at the destination port.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IGMP Statistics
The following command displays statistics about IGMP protocol packets for all
VLANs:
show ip igmp counters
Command mode: All
IGMP vlan 2 statistics:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
rxIgmpValidPkts:
0
rxIgmpInvalidPkts:
0
rxIgmpGenQueries:
0
rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries:
0
rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries: 0
rxIgmpDiscardPkts:
0
rxIgmpLeaves:
0
rxIgmpReports:
0
txIgmpReports:
0
txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries:
0
txIgmpLeaves:
0
rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords:
0
rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords:0
rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords:
0
txIgmpGenQueries:
18 rxPimHellos:
0

The following command displays statistics about IGMP protocol packets for a
specific VLAN:
show ip igmp vlan  counter
Command mode: All
IGMP vlan 147 statistics:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
rxIgmpValidPkts:
0
rxIgmpInvalidPkts:
0
rxIgmpGenQueries:
0
rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries:
0
rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries: 0
rxIgmpDiscardPkts:
0
rxIgmpLeaves:
0
rxIgmpReports:
0
txIgmpReports:
0
txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries:
0
txIgmpLeaves:
0
rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords:
0
rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords:0
rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords:
0
txIgmpGenQueries:
0
rxPimHellos:
0

Table 121. IGMP Statistics

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistic

Description

rxIgmpValidPkts

Total number of valid IGMP packets
received.

rxIgmpInvalidPkts

Total number of invalid packets
received.

rxIgmpGenQueries

Total number of General Membership
Query packets received.

rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries

Total number of Membership Query
packets received for specific groups.

rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries

Total number of Group Source‐Specific
Queries (GSSQ) received.

rxIgmpDiscardPkts

Total number of IGMP packets
discarded.
Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

237

Table 121. IGMP Statistics

238

Statistic

Description

rxIgmpLeaves

Total number of Leave requests
received.

rxIgmpReports

Total number of Membership Reports
received.

txIgmpReports

Total number of Membership reports
transmitted.

txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries

Total number of Membership Query
packets transmitted to specific groups.

txIgmpLeaves

Total number of Leave messages
transmitted.

rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords

Total number of Current State records
received.

rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords

Total number of Source List Change
records received.

rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords

Total number of Filter Change records
received.

txIgmpGenQueries

Total number of transmitted General
Queries.

rxPimHellos

Total number of PIM hello packets
received.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

MLD Statistics
The following commands display MLD statistics.
Table 122. MLD Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ipv6 mld
Displays MLD global statistics. See page 240 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld counters
Displays MLD area statistics.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld interface
Displays information for all MLD interfaces.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld interface counters
Displays total number of MLD entries.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld interface 
Displays MLD interface statistics for the specified interface.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 mld interface [] counters
Displays MLD interface statistics.
Command mode: All
clear ipv6 mld counters
Clears MLD counters.
Command mode: Privileged EXEC
clear ipv6 mld dynamic
Clears all dynamic MLD tables.
Command mode: Privileged EXEC
clear ipv6 mld groups
Clears dynamic MLD registered group tables.
Command mode: Privileged EXEC
clear ipv6 mld mrouter
Clears dynamic MLD mrouter group tables.
Command mode: Privileged EXEC

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

239

MLD Global Statistics
The MLD global statistics displays information for all MLD packets received on all
interfaces
show ipv6 mld counters
Command mode: All
MLD global statistics:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Total L3 IPv6 (S, G, V) entries:
Total MLD groups:
Bad Length:
Bad Checksum:
Bad Receive If:
Receive non­local:
Invalid Packets:

2
2
0
0
0
0
4

MLD packet statistics for interfaces:
MLD interface packet statistics for interface 1:
MLD msg type
Received
Sent
RxErrors
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
General Query
0
1067
0
MAS Query
0
0
0
MASSQ Query
0
0
0
MLDv1 Report
0
0
0
MLDv1 Done
0
0
0
MLDv2 Report
1069
1084
0
INC CSRs(v2)
1
0
0
EXC CSRs(v2)
2134
1093
0
TO_INC FMCRs(v2)
1
0
0
TO_EXC FMCRs(v2)
0
15
0
ALLOW SLCRs(v2)
0
0
0
BLOCK SLCRs(v2)
0
0
0
MLD interface packet statistics for interface 2:
MLD msg type
Received
Sent
RxErrors
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
MLD interface packet statistics for interface 3:
MLD msg type
Received
Sent
RxErrors
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­ ­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
General Query
0
2467
0
MAS Query
0
0
0
MASSQ Query
0
0
0
MLDv1 Report
0
0
0
MLDv1 Done
0
0
0
MLDv2 Report
2
2472
0
INC CSRs(v2)
1
0
0
EXC CSRs(v2)
0
2476
0
TO_INC FMCRs(v2)
0
0
0
TO_EXC FMCRs(v2)
0
8
0
ALLOW SLCRs(v2)
0
0
0
BLOCK SLCRs(v2)
1
0
0

240

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

The following table describes the fields in the MLD global statistics output.
Table 123. MLD Global Statistics
Statistic

Description

Bad Length

Number of messages received with length errors.

Bad Checksum

Number of messages received with an invalid IP
checksum.

Bad Receive If

Number of messages received on an interface not enabled
for MLD.

Receive non‐local

Number of messages received from non‐local senders.

Invalid packets

Number of rejected packets.

General Query
(v1/v2)

Number of general query packets.

MAS Query(v1/v2)

Number of multicast address specific query packets.

MASSQ Query (v2) Number of multicast address and source specific query
packets.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Listener Report(v1)

Number of packets sent by a multicast listener in response
to MLDv1 query.

Listener
Done(v1/v2)

Number of packets sent by a host when it wants to stop
receiving multicast traffic.

Listener Report(v2)

Number of packets sent by a multicast listener in response
to MLDv2 query.

MLDv2 INC mode
CSRs

Number of current state records with include filter mode.

MLDv2 EXC mode
CSRs

Number of current state records with exclude filter mode.

MLDv2 TO_INC
FMCRs

Number of filter mode change records for which the filter
mode has changed to include mode.

MLDv2 TO_EXC
FMCRs

Number of filter mode change records for which the filter
mode has changed to exclude mode.

MLDv2 ALLOW
SLCRs

Number of source list change records for which the
specified sources from where the data is to be received has
changed.

MLDv2 BLOCK
SLCRs

Number of source list change records for which the
specified sources from where the data is to be received is
to be blocked.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

241

OSPF Statistics
The following commands display OSPF statistics.
Table 124. OSPF Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip ospf counters
Displays OSPF statistics. See page 243 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf area counters
Displays OSPF area statistics.
Command mode: All
show ip ospf interface [] counters
Displays OSPF interface statistics.
Command mode: All

242

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPF Global Statistics
The following command displays statistics about OSPF packets received on all
OSPF areas and interfaces:
show ip ospf counters
Command mode: All
OSPF stats
­­­­­­­­­­
Rx/Tx Stats:

Rx
­­­­­­­­
0
23
4
3
7
9

Pkts
hello
database
ls requests
ls acks
ls updates
Nbr change stats:
hello
start
n2way
adjoint ok
negotiation done
exchange done
bad requests
bad sequence
loading done
n1way
rst_ad
down
Timers kickoff
hello
retransmit
lsa lock
lsa ack
dbage
summary
ase export

2
0
2
2
2
2
0
0
2
0
0
1

Tx
­­­­­­­­
0
518
12
1
7
7
Intf change Stats:
up
down
loop
unloop
wait timer
backup
nbr change

4
2
0
0
2
0
5

514
1028
0
0
0
0
0

Table 125. OSPF General Statistics
Statistic

Description

Rx/Tx Stats:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Rx Pkts

The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas
and interfaces.

Tx Pkts

The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas
and interfaces.

Rx Hello

The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas
and interfaces.

Tx Hello

The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas
and interfaces.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

243

Table 125. OSPF General Statistics (continued)
Statistic

Description

Rx Database

The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all
OSPF areas and interfaces.

Tx Database

The sum total of all Database Description packets transmitted
on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

Rx ls Requests

The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all
OSPF areas and interfaces.

Tx ls Requests

The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on
all OSPF areas and interfaces.

Rx ls Acks

The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets
received on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

Tx ls Acks

The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets
transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces.

Rx ls Updates

The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all
OSPF areas and interfaces.

Tx ls Updates

The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all
OSPF areas and interfaces.

Nbr Change Stats:
hello

The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all
OSPF areas and interfaces.

Start

The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, an
indication that Hello packets must now be sent to the neighbor
at intervals of HelloInterval seconds.) across all OSPF areas
and interfaces.

n2way

The sum total number of bidirectional communication
establishment between this router and other neighboring
routers.

adjoint ok

The sum total number of decisions to be made (again) as to
whether an adjacency should be established/maintained with
the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces.

negotiation
done

The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the
Master/slave relationship has been negotiated, and sequence
numbers have been exchanged, across all OSPF areas and
interfaces.

exchange done The sum total number of neighbors in this state (that is, in an
adjacencyʹs final state) having transmitted a full sequence of
Database Description packets across all OSPF areas and
interfaces.
bad requests

244

The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been
received for a link state advertisement not contained in the
database across all interfaces and OSPF areas.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 125. OSPF General Statistics (continued)
Statistic

Description

bad sequence

The sum total number of Database Description packets which
have been received that either:
a. Has an unexpected DD sequence number.
b. Unexpectedly has the init bit set.
c.

Has an options field differing from the last Options field
received in a Database Description packet.

Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred
during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and
interfaces.
loading done

The sum total number of link state updates received for all
out‐of‐date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and
interfaces.

n1way

The sum total number of Hello packets received from
neighbors, in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF
interfaces and areas.

rst_ad

The sum total number of times the Neighbor adjacency has been
reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces.

down

The total number of Neighboring routers down (that is, in the
initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPF areas
and interfaces.

Intf Change Stats:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

up

The sum total number of interfaces up in all OSPF areas.

down

The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas.

loop

The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached
network across all OSPF areas and interfaces.

unloop

The sum total number of interfaces, connected to the attached
network in all OSPF areas.

wait timer

The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired,
indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before
electing a (Backup) Designated Router across all OSPF areas and
interfaces.

backup

The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the
attached network for all OSPF areas and interfaces.

nbr change

The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional
neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

245

Table 125. OSPF General Statistics (continued)
Statistic

Description

Timers Kickoff:

246

hello

The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired
(which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all OPSF
areas and interfaces.

retransmit

The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been
fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces.

lsa lock

The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement
(LSA) lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and
interfaces.

lsa ack

The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been
fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces.

dbage

The total number of times the data base age (Dbage) has been
fired.

summary

The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired.

ase export

The total number of times the Autonomous System Export
(ASE) timer has been fired.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPFv3 Statistics
The following commands display OSPFv3 statistics.
Table 126. OSPFv3 Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ipv6 ospf counters
Displays OSPFv3 statistics. See page 243 for sample output.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf area counters
Displays OSPFv3 area statistics.
Command mode: All
show ipv6 ospf interface [] counters
Displays OSPFv3 interface statistics.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

247

OSPFv3 Global Statistics
The following command displays statistics about OSPFv3 packets received on all
OSPFv3 areas and interfaces:
show ipv6 ospf counters
Command mode: All
OSPFv3 stats
­­­­­­­­­­
Rx/Tx/Disd Stats:
Pkts
hello
database
ls requests
ls acks
ls updates

Rx
­­­­­­­­
9695
9097
39
16
172
371

Nbr change stats:
down
attempt
init
n2way
exstart
exchange done
loading done
full
all events

0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
6

Timers kickoff
hello
wait
poll
nbr probe

8988
6
0
0

Number of LSAs
originated
rcvd newer originations

Tx
­­­­­­­­
95933
8994
51
8
360
180

Discarded
­­­­­­­­­
0
0
6
0
0
0

Intf change Stats:
down
loop
waiting
ptop
dr
backup
dr other
all events

5
0
6
0
4
6
0
33

180
355

The OSPFv3 General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received
on all OSPFv3 areas and interfaces.
Table 127. OSPFv3 General Statistics
Statistics

Description

Rx/Tx Stats:

248

Rx Pkts

The sum total of all OSPFv3 packets received on all OSPFv3
interfaces.

Tx Pkts

The sum total of all OSPFv3 packets transmitted on all
OSPFv3 interfaces.

Discarded Pkts

The sum total of all OSPFv3 packets discarded.

Rx hello

The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPFv3
interfaces.

Tx hello

The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all
OSPFv3 interfaces.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 127. OSPFv3 General Statistics (continued)
Statistics

Description

Discarded hello

The sum total of all Hello packets discarded, including
packets for which no associated interface has been found.

Rx database

The sum total of all Database Description packets received
on all OSPFv3 interfaces.

Tx database

The sum total of all Database Description packets
transmitted on all OSPFv3 interfaces.

Discarded
database

The sum total of all Database Description packets
discarded.

Rx ls requests

The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on
all OSPFv3 interfaces.

Tx ls requests

The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted
on all OSPFv3 interfaces.

Discarded ls
requests

The sum total of all Link State Request packets discarded.

Rx ls acks

The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets
received on all OSPFv3 interfaces.

Tx ls acks

The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets
transmitted on all OSPFv3 interfaces.

Discarded ls
acks

The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets
discarded.

Rx ls updates

The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on
all OSPFv3 interfaces.

Tx ls updates

The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted
on all OSPFv3 interfaces.

Discarded ls
updates

The sum total of all Link State Update packets discarded.

Nbr Change Stats:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

down

The total number of Neighboring routers down (in the
initial state of a neighbor conversation) across all OSPFv3
interfaces.

attempt

The total number of transitions into attempt state of
neighboring routers across allOSPFv3 interfaces.

init

The total number of transitions into init state of neighboring
routers across all OSPFv3 interfaces.

n2way

The total number of bidirectional communication
establishment between this router and other neighboring
routers.

exstart

The total number of transitions into exstart state of
neighboring routers across all OSPFv3 interfaces.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

249

Table 127. OSPFv3 General Statistics (continued)
Statistics

Description

exchange done

The total number of neighbors in this state (that is, in an
adjacencyʹs final state) having transmitted a full sequence of
Database Description packets, across all OSPFv3 interfaces.

loading done

The total number of link state updates received for all
out‐of‐date portions of the database across all OSPFv3
interfaces.

full

The total number of transitions into full state of neighboring
routers across all OSPFv3 interfaces.

all events

The total number of state transitions of neighboring routers
across all OSPFv3 interfaces.

Intf Change Stats:
down

The total number of transitions into down state of all
OSPFv3 interfaces.

loop

The total number of transitions into loopback state of all
OSPFv3 interfaces.

waiting

The total number of transitions into waiting state of all
OSPFv3 interfaces.

ptop

The total number of transitions into point‐to‐point state of
all OSPFv3 interfaces.

dr

The total number of transitions into Designated Router
other state of all OSPFv3 interfaces.

backup

The total number of transitions into backup state of all
OSPFv3 interfaces.

all events

The total number of changes associated with any OSPFv3
interface, including changes into internal states.

Timers Kickoff:
hello

The total number of times the Hello timer has been fired
(which triggers the send of a Hello packet) across all
OSPFv3 interfaces.

wait

The total number of times the wait timer has been fired
(which causes an interface to exit waiting state), across all
OPSFv3 interfaces.

poll

The total number of times the timer whose firing causes
hellos to be sent to inactive NBMA and Demand Circuit
neighbors has been fired, across all OPSFv3 interfaces.

nbr probe

The total number of times the neighbor probe timer has
been fired, across all OPSFv3 interfaces.

Number of LSAs:

250

originated

The number of LSAs originated by this router.

rcvd newer
originations

The number of LSAs received that have been determined to
be newer originations.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

VRRP Statistics
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the CN4093 provides
redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the
same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP‐capable
routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a
number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP
address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing
authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.
When virtual routers are configured, you can display the protocol statistics for
VRRP. The following command displays VRRP statistics:
show ip vrrp counters
Command mode: All
VRRP statistics:
vrrpInAdvers:
vrrpOutAdvers:
vrrpBadVersion:
vrrpBadAddress:
vrrpBadPassword:

0
0
0
0
0

vrrpBadAdvers:

0

vrrpBadVrid:
vrrpBadData:
vrrpBadInterval:

0
0
0

Table 128. VRRP Statistics

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

vrrpInAdvers

The total number of valid VRRP advertisements that have
been received.

vrrpBadAdvers

The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were
dropped.

vrrpOutAdvers

The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been
sent.

vrrpBadVersion

The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a
bad version number.

vrrpBadVrid

The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a
bad virtual router ID.

vrrpBadAddress

The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a
bad address.

vrrpBadData

The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had
bad data.

vrrpBadPasswor
d

The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a
bad password.

vrrpBadInterval

The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a
bad interval.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

251

PIM Statistics
The following command displays Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) statistics:
show ip pim counters
Command mode: All
Hello Tx/Rx
Join/Prune Tx/Rx
Assert Tx/Rx
Register Tx/Rx
Null­Reg Tx/Rx
RegStop Tx/Rx
CandRPAdv Tx/Rx
BSR Tx/Rx
Graft Tx/Rx
Graft Ack Tx/Rx
Mcast data Tx/Rx
MDP drop Tx/Rx
CTL drop Tx/Rx
Bad pkts

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

2595/2596
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
973/0
0/1298
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
0/0
0

Table 129. PIM Statistics

252

Statistics

Description

Hello Tx/Rx

Number of Hello messages transmitted or received.

Join/Prune Tx/Rx

Number of Join/Prune messages transmitted or received.

Assert Tx/Rx

Number of Assert messages transmitted or received.

Register Tx/Rx

Number of Register messages transmitted or received.

Null‐Reg Tx/Rx

Number of NULL‐register messages transmitted or
received.

RegStop Tx/Rx

Number of Register Stop messages transmitted or
received.

CandRPAdv Tx/Rx

Number of Candidate RP Advertisements transmitted or
received.

BSR Tx/Rx

Number of Bootstrap Router (BSR) messages transmitted
or received.

Graft Tx/Rx

Number of Graft messages transmitted or received.

Graft Ack Tx/Rx

Number of Graft Acknowledgements transmitted or
received.

Mcast data Tx/Rx

Number of multicast datagrams transmitted or received.

MDP drop Tx/Rx

Number of Multicast data packet Tx/Rx dropped.

CTL drop Tx/Rx

Number of PIM control packet Tx/Rx dropped.

Bad pkts

Number of bad PIM packets received.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Routing Information Protocol Statistics
The following command displays RIP statistics:
show ip rip counters
Command mode: All
RIP ALL STATS INFORMATION:
RIP packets received
RIP packets sent
RIP request received
RIP response recevied
RIP request sent
RIP reponse sent
RIP route timeout
RIP bad size packet received
RIP bad version received
RIP bad zeros received
RIP bad src port received
RIP bad src IP received
RIP packets from self received

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

12
75
0
12
3
72
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

253

Management Processor Statistics
The following commands display Management Processor statistics.
Table 130. Management Processor Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show mp i2c
Displays i2c statistics.
Command mode: All
show mp memory
Displays memory utilization statistics.
Command mode: All
show mp packet counters
Displays packet statistics, to check for leads and load. To view a sample output
and a description of the statistics, see page 255.
Command mode: All
show mp tcp­block
Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output and a
description of the statistics, see page 266.
Command mode: All
show mp thread
Displays STEM thread statistics. This command is used by Technical Support
personnel.
Command mode: All
show mp udp­block
Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use. To view a sample output, see
page 267.
Command mode: All
show processes cpu
Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1, 4, and 64 seconds. To view a
sample output and a description of the stats, see page 267.
Command mode: All
show processes cpu history
Displays history of CPU utilization. To view a sample output, see page 269.
Command mode: All

254

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Packet Statistics
The following commands display Packet statistics.
Table 131. Packet Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show mp packet counters
Displays packet statistics, to check for leads and load. To view a sample output
and a description of the stats, see page 255.
Command mode: All
clear mp packet logs
Clears all CPU packet statistics and logs.
Command mode: Privileged EXEC

MP Packet Statistics
The following command displays MP packet statistics:
show mp packet counters
Command mode: All
CPU packet statistics at

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

8:21:54 Tue Jan

8, 2013

Packet rate:
­­­­­­­­­­­­
1­second:
4­seconds:
64­seconds:

Incoming
­­­­­­­­
8
7
4

Outgoing
­­­­­­­­
7
5
3

Packet counters:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Total packets:
Since bootup:
BPDUs:
Cisco packets:
ARP Requests:
ARP Replies:
LACP packets:
IPv4 packets:
ICMP Requests:
ICMP Replies:
IGMP packets:
PIM packets:
VRRP packets:
TCP packets:
FTP
HTTP
SSH
TACACS
TELNET
TCP other
UDP packets:
DHCP
NTP

Received
­­­­­­­­
109056
109056
6415
0
15
8545
3414
60130
0
21
0
0
0
60088
0
0
3
0
60095
0
24
0
0

Sent
­­­­
148761
148768
19214
0
10061
14
3420
116101
21
0
0
0
0
116113
0
0
3
0
116145
0
9
0
0

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

255

RADIUS
SNMP
TFTP
UDP other
RIP packets:
OSPF packets:
BGP packets:
IPv6 packets:
LLDP PDUs:
FCoE FIP PDUs:
ECP PDUs:
MgmtSock Packets:
Other:

0
0
0
24
0
0
0
0
3987
0
0
919
26549

0
0
0
8
1
0
0
0
6876
0
0
932
0

Packet Buffer Statistics:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
allocs:
265803
frees:
265806
failures:
0
dropped:
0
small packet buffers:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
current:
1
max:
1024
threshold:
128
hi­watermark:
3
hi­water time:
3:39:12 Tue Jan

8, 2013

medium packet buffers:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
current:
0
max:
2048
threshold:
50
hi­watermark:
1
hi­water time:
3:37:12 Tue Jan

8, 2013

jumbo packet buffers:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
current:
max:
hi­watermark:

0
16
0

pkt_hdr statistics:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
current
:
max
:
hi­watermark
:

0
3072
180

Table 132. Packet Statistics
Statistics

Description

Packet Rate

256

1‐second

The rate of incoming and outgoing packets over 1 second.

4‐seconds

The rate of incoming and outgoing packets over 4 seconds.

64‐seconds

The rate of incoming and outgoing packets over 64 seconds.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 132. Packet Statistics (continued)
Statistics

Description

Packets Counters
Total packets

Total number of packets received.

Since bootup

Total number of packets received and sent since the last
switch reboot.

BPDUs

Total number of spanning‐tree Bridge Protocol Data Units
received.

Cisco packets

Total number of UniDirectional Link Detection (UDLD)
packets and Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) packets
received.

ARP packets

Total number of Address Resolution Protocol packets
received.

IPv4 packets

Total number of IPv4 packets received and sent. Includes the
following packet types:

TCP packets

UDP packets

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



IGMP



PIM



ICMP requests



ICMP replies

Total number of TCP packets received and sent. Includes the
following packet types:


FTP



HTTP



SSH



TACACS+



Telnet



Other

Total number of UDP packets received and sent. Includes the
following packet types:


DHCP



NTP



RADIUS



SNMP



TFTP



Other

RIP packets

Total number of Routing Information Protocol packets
received and sent.

OSPF packets

Total number of Open Shortest Path First packets received
and sent.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

257

Table 132. Packet Statistics (continued)
Statistics

Description

BGP packets

Total number of Border Gateway Protocol packets received
and sent.

IPv6 packets

Total number of IPv6 packets received.

LLDP PDUs

Total number of Link Layer Discovery Protocol data units
received.

ECP PDUs

Total number of Edge Control Protocol data units received
and sent.

MgmtSock
Packets

Total number of packets received and transmitted through
the management port.

Other

Total number of other packets received.

Packet Buffer Statistics
allocs

Total number of packet allocations from the packet buffer
pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

frees

Total number of times the packet buffers are freed (released)
to the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

failures

Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet
buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

dropped

Total number of packets dropped by the packet buffer pool.

small packet buffers

258

current

Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128
bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol
stack.

max

Maximum number of small packet allocations supported.

threshold

Threshold value for small packet allocations, beyond which
only high‐priority small packets are allowed.

hi‐watermark

The highest number of packet allocation with size less than
128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol
stack.

hi‐water time

Time stamp that indicates when the hi‐watermark was
reached.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 132. Packet Statistics (continued)
Statistics

Description

medium packet buffers
current

Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to
1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP
protocol stack.

max

Maximum number of medium packet allocations supported.

threshold

Threshold value for medium packet allocations, beyond
which only high‐priority medium packets are allowed.

hi‐watermark

The highest number of packet allocation with size between
128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP
protocol stack.

hi‐water time

Time stamp that indicates when the hi‐watermark was
reached.

jumbo packet buffers
current

Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes
from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

max

Maximum number of jumbo packet allocations supported.

hi‐watermark

The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536
bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol
stack.

pkt_hdr statistics

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

current

Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes
from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol stack.

max

Maximum number of packet allocations with more than 1536
bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol
stack.

hi‐watermark

The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536
bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP/IP protocol
stack.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

259

Packet Statistics Log
These commands allow you to display a log of all packets received by CPU. The
following table describes the Packet Statistics Log options.
Table 133. Packet Statistics Log Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show mp packet logs all
Displays all packet logs received by and sent from the CPU. To view a sample
output and a description of the log entries, see “Packet Log example” on
page 260.
Command mode: All
show mp packet logs rx
Displays all packets logs received by the CPU.
Command mode: All
show mp packet logs tx
Displays all packet logs sent from the CPU.
Command mode: All

Packet Log example
The following command displays all packet logs received by and sent from the
CPU.
show mp packet logs all
Command mode: All
358. Type: BPDU, sent 1:01:11 Tue Mar 20, 2012
Port EXT2, VLAN 201, Length 57, Reason 0x0, Flags 0x0
Dst MAC: 01:80:c2:00:00:00, Src MAC: 08:17:f4:a7:57:2c
357. Type: ICMP ECHO Req,sent 1:01:09 Tue Mar 20, 2012
Port MGT1, VLAN 4095, Length 16, Reason 0x0, Flags 0x0 FromMgmtSock
Src IP: 9.43.98.125, Dst IP: 9.43.98.254

Each packet log entry includes the following information:










260

Entry ID
Packet type
Date and time
Port number
VLAN number
Packet length
Reason code
Flags
Source and destination address

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Packet Statistics Last Packet
These commands allow you to display a specified number (N) of the most recent
packet logs received by or sent from the CPU. The following table describes the
Packet Statistics Last Packet options.
Table 134. Last Packet Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show mp packet last both <1‐1000>
Displays a specified number of recent packet logs received by and sent from
the CPU. To view a sample output and a description, see “Packet Log
example” on page 260.
Command mode: All
show mp packet last rx <1‐1000>
Displays a specified number of recent packet logs received by the CPU.
Command mode: All
show mp packet last tx <1‐1000>
Displays a specified number of recent packet logs sent from the CPU.
Command mode: All

Packet Statistics Dump
The following table describes the Packet Statistics Dump options.
Table 135. Packet Statistics Dump Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show mp packet dump all
Displays all packet statistics and logs received by and sent from the CPU.
Command mode: All
show mp packet dump rx
Displays all packet statistics and logs received by the CPU.
Command mode: All
show mp packet dump tx
Displays all packet statistics and logs sent from the CPU.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

261

Logged Packet Statistics
The following command displays logged packets that have been received or sent,
based on the specified filter:
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} 
The filter options are described in Table 136.
Table 136. Packet Log Parsing Options
Command Syntax and Usage

show mp packet parse {rx|tx} arp
Displays only ARP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} bgp
Displays only BGP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} bpdu
Displays only BPDUs logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} cisco
Displays only Cisco packets (BPDU/CDP/UDLD) logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} dhcp
Displays only DHCP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ecp
Displays only ECP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} fcoe
Displays only FCoE FIP PDUs logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ftp
Displays only FTP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} http
Displays only HTTP packets logged.
Command mode: All

262

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 136. Packet Log Parsing Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show mp packet parse {rx|tx} https
Displays only HTTPS packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} icmp
Displays only ICMP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} igmp
Displays only IGMP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ip­addr 
Displays only logged packets with the specified IPv4 address.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ipv4
Displays only IPv4 packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ipv6
Displays only IPv6 packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} lacp
Displays only LACP PDUs logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} lldp
Displays only LLDP PDUs logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} mac 
Displays only logged packets with the specified MAC address.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} mgmtsock
Displays only packets logged on management ports.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ntp
Displays only NTP packets logged.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

263

Table 136. Packet Log Parsing Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ospf
Displays only OSPF packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} other
Displays logs of all packets not explicitly selectable.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} pim
Displays only PIM packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} port 
Displays only logged packets with the specified port.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} radius
Displays only RADIUS packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} rarp
Displays only Reverse‐ARP packets.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx] raw
Displays raw packet buffer in addition to headers.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} rip
Displays only RIP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} snmp
Displays only SNMP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} ssh
Displays only SSH packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} tacacs
Displays only TACACS packets logged.
Command mode: All

264

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 136. Packet Log Parsing Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show mp packet parse {rx|tx} tcp
Displays only TCP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} tcpother
Displays only TCP other‐port packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} telnet
Displays only TELNET packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} tftp
Displays only TFTP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} udp
Displays only UDP packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} udpother
Displays only UDP other‐port packets logged.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} vlan 
Displays only logged packets with the specified VLAN.
Command mode: All
show mp packet parse {rx|tx} vrrp
Displays only VRRP logged packets.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

265

TCP Statistics
The following command displays TCP statistics:
show mp tcp­block
Command mode: All
Data Ports:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
All TCP allocated control blocks:
14835bd8: 0.0.0.0
0 <=>
172.31.38.107
80 listen MGT up
147c6eb8: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
0 <=>
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
80 listen
147c6d68: 0.0.0.0
0 <=>
0.0.0.0
80 listen
14823918: 172.31.37.42
55866 <=>
172.31.38.107
23 established 0 ??
11af2394: 0.0.0.0
0 <=>
172.31.38.107
23 listen MGT up
147e6808: 0.0.0.0
0 <=>
0.0.0.0
23 listen
147e66b8: 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
0 <=>
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0
23 listen
147e6568: 0.0.0.0
0 <=>
0.0.0.0
23 listen
Mgmt Ports:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Active Internet connections (servers and established)
Proto Recv­Q Send­Q Local Address
Foreign Address
tcp
0
0 172.31.38.107:http
*:*
tcp
0
0 172.31.38.107:telnet
*:*
tcp
0
0 *:11000
*:*
tcp
0
1274 172.31.38.107:telnet
172.31.37.42:55866

Table 137. MP Specified TCP Statistics

266

Statistics

Description

14835bd8

Memory

0.0.0.0

Destination IP address

0

Destination port

172.31.38.107

Source IP

80

Source port

listen MGT1 up

State

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

State
LISTEN
LISTEN
LISTEN
ESTABLISHED

UDP Statistics
The following command displays UDP statistics:
show mp udp­block
Command mode: All
Data Ports:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
All UDP allocated control blocks:
68: listen
161: listen
500: listen
546: listen
Mgmt Ports:
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Active Internet connections (servers and established)
Proto Recv­Q Send­Q Local Address
Foreign Address
udp
0
0 9.43.95.121:snmp
*:*
0.0.0.0

0 <=> 9.43.95.121

161

accept

MGT1

State

up

CPU Statistics
The following commands display CPU utilization statistics:
show mp cpu
Command mode: All
CPU utilization
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
cpuUtil1Second:
3%
cpuUtil4Seconds:
5%
cpuUtil64Seconds:
5%

Highest
­­­­­­­
83%

Thread
­­­­­­­­­­
58 (I2C )

Time
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
12:02:14 Fri Oct 14, 2011

Table 138. CPU Statistics

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistics

Description

cpuUtil1Second

The use of MP CPU over 1 second. It shows the
percentage, highest rate, thread, and time the highest
utilization occurred.

cpuUtil4Seconds

The use of MP CPU over 4 seconds. It shows the
percentage.

cpuUtil64Seconds

The use of MP CPU over 64 seconds. It shows the
percentage.

Highest

The highest percent of CPU use.

Thread

The thread ID and name of the thread that caused the
highest CPU use.

Time

The time when the highest CPU use was reached.
Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

267

show processes cpu
Command mode: All
CPU Utilization at

8:25:55 Tue Jan

Total CPU Utilization: For
For
For
For

1
5
1
5

second:
second:
minute:
minute:

Highest CPU Utilization: thread

8, 2013
2.92%
3.38%
7.88%
8.93%

2 (STP ) at

6:44:56 Tue Jan

8, 2013

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Thread Thread
Utilization
Status
ID
Name
1sec
5sec
1Min
5Min
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
1
STEM
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
2
STP
0.00%
0.05%
0.10%
0.10%
idle
3
MFDB
0.00%
0.00%
5.06%
5.22%
idle
4
TND
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
5
CONS
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.15% suspended
6
TNET
0.11%
0.58%
0.17%
0.27%
running
7
TNET
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
8
TNET
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
9
TNET
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
10
LOG
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
11
TRAP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
13
NTP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
14
IP
0.04%
0.04%
0.06%
0.06%
idle
17
IP
0.01%
0.08%
0.04%
0.04%
idle
18
RIP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
19
AGR
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
20
EPI
0.16%
0.27%
0.12%
0.10%
runnable
22
PORT
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
24
BGP
0.18%
0.04%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
32
SCAN
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
34
OSPF
0.20%
0.04%
0.02%
0.01%
idle
36
SNMP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
37
SNMP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
38
SNMP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
40
SSHD
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
...
120
VDPT
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
124
HIST
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
runnable
128
NORM
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
129
NORM
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
130
DONE
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle

Table 139. CPU Statistics

268

Statistics

Description

Thread ID

The thread ID number.

Thread Name

The name of the thread.

1sec

The percent of CPU use over 1 second.

5sec

The percent of CPU use over 5 seconds.

1Min

The percent of CPU use over 1 minute.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 139. CPU Statistics
Statistics

Description

5Min

The percent of CPU use over 5 minutes.

Status

The status of the process.

CPU Statistics History
The following command display a history of CPU use statistics:
show processes cpu history
Command mode: All
CPU Utilization History
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
17 (IP ) 98% at 22:17:24 Mon Feb 20, 2012
59 (LACP)
9% at 22:17:33 Mon Feb 20, 2012
110 (ETMR) 12% at 22:17:34 Mon Feb 20, 2012
110 (ETMR) 12% at 22:17:36 Mon Feb 20, 2012
110 (ETMR) 12% at 22:17:40 Mon Feb 20, 2012
110 (ETMR) 12% at 22:17:45 Mon Feb 20, 2012
110 (ETMR) 17% at 22:17:47 Mon Feb 20, 2012
110 (ETMR) 18% at 22:17:49 Mon Feb 20, 2012
110 (ETMR) 25% at 22:20:28 Mon Feb 20, 2012
110 (ETMR) 26% at 22:39:08 Mon Feb 20, 2012
37 (SNMP) 28% at 22:46:20 Mon Feb 20, 2012
94 (PROX) 57% at 23:29:36 Mon Feb 20, 2012
94 (PROX) 63% at 23:29:37 Mon Feb 20, 2012
94 (PROX) 63% at 23:29:39 Mon Feb 20, 2012
58 (I2C ) 64% at 16:21:54 Tue Feb 21, 2012
5 (CONS) 86% at 18:41:54 Tue Feb 21, 2012
58 (I2C ) 88% at 18:41:55 Tue Feb 21, 2012
58 (I2C ) 88% at 21:29:41 Sat Feb 25, 2012
58 (I2C ) 98% at 12:04:59 Tue Feb 28, 2012
58 (I2C ) 100% at 11:31:32 Sat Mar 10, 2012

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

269

Access Control List Statistics
The following commands display and change ACL statistics.
Table 140. ACL Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show access­control counters
Displays all ACL statistics. For output sample, see page 271.
Command mode: All
show access­control list <1‐256> counters
Displays the Access Control List Statistics for a specific ACL.
Command mode: All
show access­control list6 <1‐128> counters
Displays the IPv6 ACL statistics for a specific ACL.
Command mode: All
show access­control macl <1‐128> counters
Displays the ACL statistics for a specific management ACL (MACL).
Command mode: All
show access­control meter <1‐127> counters
Displays ACL meter statistics. For output sample, see page 271.
Command mode: All
show access­control vmap <1‐128> counters
Displays VLAN Map statistics for the selected VMAP. For details, see
page 271.
Command mode: All
clear access­control list {<1‐256>|all} counters
Clears ACL statistics.
Command mode: Privileged EXEC
clear access­control list6 {<1‐128>|all}
Clears IPv6 ACL statistics.
Command mode: Privileged EXEC
clear access­control meter <1‐127> counters
Clears ACL meter statistics.
Command mode: Privileged EXEC

270

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

ACL Statistics
The following command displays ACL statistics.
show access­control counters
Command mode: All
Hits for ACL 1:
Hits for ACL 2:

26057515
26057497

ACL Meter Statistics
This option displays ACL meter statistics.
show access­control meter  counters
Command mode: All
Out of profile hits for Meter 1, Port EXT1: 0
Out of profile hits for Meter 2, Port EXT1: 0

VMAP Statistics
The following command displays VLAN Map statistics.
show access­control vmap  counters
Command mode: All
Hits for VMAP 1:

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

57515

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

271

Fibre Channel over Ethernet Statistics
The following command displays Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) statistics:
show fcoe counters
Command mode: All
FCF­keepalives statistics:
FCF 54:7f:ee:8f:d4:2a keepalives received : 62
FCOE statistics:
FCFAdded:
5
FCFRemoved:
FCOEAdded:
81 FCOERemoved:

1
24

Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) statistics are described in the following table:
Table 141. FCoE Statistics
Statistic

Description

FCFAdded

Total number of FCoE Forwarders (FCF) added.

FCFRemoved

Total number of FCoE Forwarders (FCF) removed.

FCOEAdded

Total number of FCoE connections added.

FCOERemoved

Total number of FCoE connections removed.

The total can accumulate over several FCoE sessions, until the statistics are cleared.
The following command clears Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) statistics:
clear fcoe counters
Command mode: All

272

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

SNMP Statistics
The following command displays SNMP statistics:
show snmp­server counters
Command mode: All except User EXEC
SNMP statistics:
snmpInPkts:
snmpInBadC'tyNames:
snmpInASNParseErrs:
snmpOutPkts:
snmpInTooBigs:
snmpInBadValues:
snmpInGenErrs:
snmpInTotalSetVars:
snmpInGetNexts:
snmpInGetResponses:
snmpOutTooBigs:
snmpOutBadValues:
snmpOutGenErrs:
snmpOutGetNexts:
snmpOutGetResponses:
snmpSilentDrops:

150097
0
0
150097
0
0
0
2731
131389
0
0
0
1
0
150093
0

snmpInBadVersions:
snmpInBadC'tyUses:
snmpEnableAuthTraps:
snmpInBadTypes:
snmpInNoSuchNames:
snmpInReadOnlys:
snmpInTotalReqVars:
snmpInGetRequests:
snmpInSetRequests:
snmpInTraps:
snmpOutNoSuchNames:
snmpOutReadOnlys:
snmpOutGetRequests:
snmpOutSetRequests:
snmpOutTraps:
snmpProxyDrops:

0
0
0
0
0
0
798464
17593
615
0
1
0
0
0
4
0

Table 142. SNMP Statistics

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistic

Description

snmpInPkts

The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP
entity from the transport service.

snmpInBadVersions

The total number of SNMP Messages, which were
delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for
an unsupported SNMP version.

snmpInBadCʹtyNames

The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the
SNMP entity which used an SNMP community
name not known to the said entity (the switch).

snmpInBadCʹtyUses

The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the
SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP
operation which was not allowed by the SNMP
community named in the Message.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

273

Table 142. SNMP Statistics (continued)
Statistic

Description

snmpInASNParseErrs

The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors
encountered by the SNMP protocol entity when
decoding SNMP Messages received.
Note: OSIʹs method of specifying abstract objects is
called ASN.1 (Abstract Syntax Notation One, defined
in X.208), and one set of rules for representing such
objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER
(Basic Encoding Rules, defined in X.209). ASN.1 is a
flexible notation that allows one to define a variety of
data types, from simple types such as integers and
bit strings to structured types such as sets and
sequences. BER describes how to represent or encode
values of each ASN.1 type as a string of eight‐bit
octets.

274

snmpEnableAuthTraps

An object to enable or disable the authentication
traps generated by this entity (the switch).

snmpOutPkts

The total number of SNMP Messages which were
passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the
transport service.

snmpInBadTypes

The total number of SNMP Messages which failed
ASN parsing.

snmpInTooBigs

The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units
(PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error‐status
field is too big.

snmpInNoSuchNames

The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units
(PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error‐status
field is noSuchName.

snmpInBadValues

The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units
(PDUs) which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error‐status
field is badValue.

snmpInReadOnlys

The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units
(PDUs), which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error‐status
field is `read‐Onlyʹ. It should be noted that it is a
protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU, which
contains the value `read‐Onlyʹ in the error‐status
field. As such, this object is provided as a means of
detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 142. SNMP Statistics (continued)

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Statistic

Description

snmpInGenErrs

The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units
(PDUs), which were delivered to the SNMP protocol
entity and for which the value of the error‐status
field is genErr.

snmpInTotalReqVars

The total number of MIB objects which have been
retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity
as a result of receiving valid SNMP Get‐Request and
Get‐Next Protocol Data Units (PDUs).

snmpInTotalSetVars

The total number of MIB objects, which have been
altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a
result of receiving valid SNMP Set‐Request Protocol
Data Units (PDUs).

snmpInGetRequests

The total number of SNMP Get‐Request Protocol
Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.

snmpInGetNexts

The total number of SNMP Get‐Next Protocol Data
Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.

snmpInSetRequests

The total number of SNMP Set‐Request Protocol
Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.

snmpInGetResponses

The total number of SNMP Get‐Response Protocol
Data Units (PDUs), which have been accepted and
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.

snmpInTraps

The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units
(PDUs), which have been accepted and processed by
the SNMP protocol entity.

snmpOutTooBigs

The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units
(PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP
protocol entity and for which the value of the
error‐status field is too big.

snmpOutNoSuchNames

The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units
(PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP
protocol entity and for which the value of the
error‐status is noSuchName.

snmpOutBadValues

The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units
(PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP
protocol entity and for which the value of the
error‐status field is badValue.

snmpOutReadOnlys

Not in use.

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

275

Table 142. SNMP Statistics (continued)

276

Statistic

Description

snmpOutGenErrs

The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units
(PDUs), which were generated by the SNMP
protocol entity and for which the value of the
error‐status field is genErr.

snmpOutGetRequests

The total number of SNMP Get‐Request Protocol
Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by
the SNMP protocol entity.

snmpOutGetNexts

The total number of SNMP Get‐Next Protocol Data
Units (PDUs), which have been generated by the
SNMP protocol entity.

snmpOutSetRequests

The total number of SNMP Set‐Request Protocol
Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by
the SNMP protocol entity.

snmpOutGetResponses

The total number of SNMP Get‐Response Protocol
Data Units (PDUs), which have been generated by
the SNMP protocol entity.

snmpOutTraps

The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units
(PDUs), which have been generated by the SNMP
protocol entity.

snmpSilentDrops

The total number of GetRequest‐PDUs,
GetNextRequest‐PDUs,
GetBulkRequest‐PDUs, SetRequest‐PDUs, and
InformRequest‐PDUs delivered to the SNMPv2
entity which were silently dropped because the size
of a reply containing an alternate Response‐PDU
with an empty variable bindings field was greater
than either a local constraint or the maximum
message size associated with the originator of the
request.

snmpProxyDrops

The total number of GetRequest‐PDUs,
GetNextRequest‐PDUs,
GetBulkRequest‐PDUs, SetRequest‐PDUs, and
InformRequest‐PDUs delivered to the SNMP
entity which were silently dropped because the
transmission of the message to a proxy target failed
in a manner such that no Response‐PDU could be
returned.

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

NTP Statistics
Lenovo N/OS uses NTP (Network Timing Protocol) version 3 to synchronize the
switch’s internal clock with an atomic time calibrated NTP server. With NTP
enabled, the switch can accurately update its internal clock to be consistent with
other devices on the network and generates accurate syslogs.
The following command displays NTP statistics:
show ntp counters
Command mode: All
NTP statistics:
Primary Server:
Requests Sent:
Responses Received:
Updates:
Secondary Server:
Requests Sent:
Responses Received:
Updates:

17
17
1
0
0
0

Last update based on response from primary/secondary server.
Last update time: 18:04:16 Tue Jul 13, 2010
Current system time: 18:55:49 Tue Jul 13, 2010

Table 143. NTP Statistics
Field

Description

Primary Server  Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch
sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time.

Secondary
Server



Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses
received from the primary NTP server.



Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its
time based on the NTP responses received from the primary
NTP server.



Requests Sent: The total number of NTP requests the switch
sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time.



Responses Received: The total number of NTP responses
received from the secondary NTP server.



Updates: The total number of times the switch updated its
time based on the NTP responses received from the
secondary NTP server.

Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or
Last update
secondary NTP response received.
based on
response from
primary server

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

277

Table 143. NTP Statistics (continued)
Field

Description

Last update
time

The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last
updated.

Current
system time

The switch system time when the command was issued.

The following command displays information about NTP associated peers:
show ntp associations
Command mode: All
address
ref clock
*12.200.151.18
198.72.72.10
*synced, #unsynced

st
3

when(s)
35316

offset(s)
­2

Table 144. NTP Associations

278

Field

Description

address

Peer address

ref clock

Peer reference clock address

st

Peer stratum

when(s)

Time in seconds since the latest NTP packet was received
from the peer

offset(s)

Offset in seconds between the peer clock and local clock

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

SLP Statistics
The following table displays SLP statistics commands:
Table 145. SLP Statistics Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ip slp counter
Displays SLP packet counters.
Command mode: All
clear ip slp counters
Clears SLP packet counters.
Command mode: Privileged EXEC
Use the following command to display SLP packet counters:
show ip slp counter
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

SLP Send Counters:
SLP DAAdvert
SLP SrvRqst
SLP SrvRply
SLP SrvAck
SLP AttrRqst
SLP AttrRply
SLP SrvTypeRqst
SLP SrvReg
SLP SrvDeReg
SLP SrvTypeRply
SLP SAAdvert
SLP Unknown

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

SLP Receive Counters:
SLP DAAdvert
SLP SrvRqst
SLP SrvRply
SLP SrvAck
SLP AttrRqst
SLP AttrRply
SLP SrvTypeRqst
SLP SrvReg
SLP SrvDeReg
SLP SrvTypeRply
SLP SAAdvert
SLP Dropped
Incorect pkt/dest
Scopes mismatch
Others

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Chapter 3: Statistics Commands

279

Statistics Dump
The following command dumps switch statistics:
show counters
Command mode: All
CPU Utilization at 12:13:08 Thu Mar 12, 2015
Total CPU Utilization: For
For
For
For

1
5
1
5

second:
second:
minute:
minute:

Highest CPU Utilization: thread

0.06%
0.33%
0.12%
0.11%

16 (IP

) at 14:12:23 Wed Feb 25, 2015

­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
Thread Thread
Utilization
Status
ID
Name
1sec
5sec
1Min
5Min
­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­­
1
STEM
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
2
STP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
3
MFDB
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
4
TND
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
5
CONS
0.01%
0.02%
0.00%
0.01%
running
6
TNET
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
7
TNET
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
8
TNET
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
9
TNET
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
10
LOG
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
11
TRAP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
12
NTP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
13
RMON
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
16
IP
0.00%
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
idle
18
AGR
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
19
EPI
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
20
PORT
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
25
MGMT
0.01%
0.01%
0.01%
0.02%
idle
28
SNMP
0.00%
0.00%
0.01%
0.00%
idle
29
SNMP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
31
SSHD
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
33
TEAM
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
34
I2C
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
35
LACP
0.01%
0.25%
0.04%
0.02%
idle
36
SFP
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
37
L3HS
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
38
HLNK
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
39
LLDP
0.00%
0.00%
0.01%
0.02%
idle
40
IPV6
0.00%
0.01%
0.00%
0.00%
idle
...

Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics (40K or more, depending on
your configuration). This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance.
If you want to capture dump data to a file, set your communication software on
your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command.

280

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Chapter 4. Configuration Commands
This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI) for making,
viewing, and saving switch configuration changes. Many of the commands,
although not new, display more or different information than in the previous
version. Important differences are called out in the text.
Table 146. General Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show running­config [diff]
Dumps current configuration to a script file. The diff option displays only
the running configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to
flash memory. For details, see page 550.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
copy running­config backup­config
Copy the current (running) configuration from switch memory to the
backup­config partition. For details, see page 551.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
copy running­config startup­config
Copy the current (running) configuration from switch memory to the
startup­config partition.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
copy running­config {ftp|sftp|tftp}
[data­port|extm­port|mgt­port]
Backs up current configuration to a file on the selected FTP/TFTP/SFTP server.
Select a management port, or press Enter to use the default (management)
port.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
copy {ftp|sftp|tftp} running­config
[data­port|extm­port|mgt­port]
Restores current configuration from a FTP/TFTP/SFTP server. Select a
management port, or press Enter to use the default (management) port. For
details, see page 552.
Command mode: All except User EXEC

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

281

Table 146. General Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

copy {sftp|tftp} {ca­cert|host­key|host­cert|public­key}
[data­port|extm­port|mgt­port]
Imports interface used by NIST certified test laboratories for USGv6 (NIST SP
500‐267) certification purposes. Required for RSA digital signature
authentication verification during IKEv2 interoperability testing. Uses TFTP or
SFTP to import:


ca­cert: Certificate Authority root certificate



host­key: host private key



host­cert: host public key



public­key: client public key



data­port: data port



extm­port: external management port



mgt­port: management port

Command mode: All except User EXEC

282

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Viewing and Saving Changes
As you use the configuration commands to set switch parameters, the changes you
make take effect immediately. You do not need to apply them. Configuration
changes are lost the next time the switch boots, unless you save the changes.
You can view all running configuration changes that have been applied but not
saved to flash memory using the show running­config diff command in
Privileged EXEC mode.
Note: Some operations can override the settings of the Configuration commands.
Therefore, settings you view using the Configuration commands (for example,
port status) might differ from run‐time information that you view using the
Information commands. The Information commands display current run‐time
information of switch parameters.

Saving the Configuration
You must save configuration settings to flash memory, so the CN4093 reloads the
settings after a reset.
Note: If you do not save the changes, they will be lost the next time the system is
rebooted.
To save the new configuration, enter one of the following commands:
CN 4093# copy running­config startup­config

or
CN 4093# write

Note: The write command doesn’t prompt the user for confirmation.
When you save configuration changes, the changes are saved to the active
configuration block. For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the
next system reset, see “Selecting a Configuration Block” on page 577.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

283

System Configuration
These commands provide configuration of switch management parameters such as
user and administrator privilege mode passwords, Web‐based management
settings, and management access lists.
Table 147. System Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] banner <1‐80 characters>
Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters. When a user or administrator
logs into the switch, the login banner is displayed. It is also displayed as part of
the output from the show sys­info command.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] boot strict enable
Enables or disables switch operation in security strict mode. When enabled,
the authentication and privacy protocols and algorithms of the device are
compliant with NIST SP‐800‐131A, with non‐compliant protocols and
algorithms disabled.
Setting will be applied and device will be reset to default factory configuration
after reboot.
The default setting is disabled.
Note: Ensure NIST Strict compliance is enabled on the Chassis Management
Module before enabling Strict mode operation on the device.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] hostname 
Enables or disables displaying of the host name (system administrator’s name)
in the Command Line Interface (CLI).
Command mode: Global configuration
line console length <0‐300>
Configures the number of lines per screen displayed in the CLI by default for
console sessions. Setting it to 0 disables paging.
The default value is 28.
Command mode: Global configuration
no line console
Sets line console length to the default value of 28.
Command mode: Global configuration
line vty length <0‐300>
Sets the default number of lines per screen displayed for Telnet and SSH
sessions. A value of 0 disables paging.
The default value is 28.
Command mode: Global configuration

284

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 147. System Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

no line vty
Sets line vty length to the default value of 28.
Command mode: Global configuration
system date   

Prompts the user for the system date. The date retains its value when the
switch is reset.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] system daylight
Enables or disables daylight saving time in the system clock. When enabled,
the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent
with the local clock.
By default, this option is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] system dhcp [extm|mgt]
Enables or disables Dynamic Host Control Protocol for setting the IP address
on the selected interface. When enabled, the IP address obtained from the
DHCP server overrides the static IP address.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] system dhcp {hostname|syslog}
Enables or disables hostname or log server options support for DHCP/BOOTP
client.
Command mode: Global configuration
system idle <0‐60>
Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions in minutes. A value of 0 disables system
idle.
The default value is 10 minutes.
Command mode: Global configuration
system linkscan {fast|normal|slow}
Configures the link scan interval used to poll the status of ports.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] system notice 
<'.' to end>
Enables or disables the display of a login notice immediately before the “Enter
password:” prompt. This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new
lines.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

285

Table 147. System Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] system packet­logging
Enables or disables logging of packets that come to the CPU.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] system reset­control
Enables or disables the reset control flag. When enabled, the switch
continues to function after a crash of the main processor, using the last known
Layer 2/3 information.
Command mode: Global configuration
system time ::
Configures the system time using a 24‐hour clock format. The time retains its
value when the switch is reset.
Command mode: Global configuration
system timezone
Configures the time zone where the switch resides. You are prompted to select
your location (continent, country, region) by the timezone wizard. Once a
region is selected, the switch updates the time to reflect local changes to
Daylight Saving Time, etc.
Command mode: Global configuration
terminal­length <0‐300>
Configures the number of lines per screen displayed in the CLI for the current
session. A value of 0 disables paging. By default, it is set to the corresponding
line vty length or line console length value in effect at login.
Command mode: All
show boot strict
Displays the current security strict mode status.
Command mode: Global configuration
show system
Displays the current system parameters.
Command mode: All

286

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

System Error Disable and Recovery Configuration
The Error Disable and Recovery feature allows the switch to automatically disable
a port if an error condition is detected on the port. The port remains in the
error‐disabled state until it is re‐enabled manually, or re‐enabled automatically by
the switch after a timeout period has elapsed. The error‐disabled state of a port
does not persist across a system reboot.
Table 148. Error Disable Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] errdisable recovery
Globally enables or disables automatic error‐recovery for error‐disabled ports.
The default setting is disabled.
Note: Each port must have error‐recovery enabled to participate in automatic
error recovery.
Command mode: Global configuration
errdisable timeout <30‐86400>
Configures the error‐recovery timeout, in seconds. After the timer expires, the
switch attempts to re‐enable the port.
The default value is 300 seconds.
Note: When you change the timeout value, all current error‐recovery timers
are reset.
Command mode: Global configuration
show errdisable
Displays the current system Error Disable configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

287

Link Flap Dampening Configuration
The Link Flap Dampening feature allows the switch to automatically disable a port
if too many link flaps (link up/link down) are detected on the port during a
specified time interval. The port remains in the error‐disabled state until it is
re‐enabled manually, or re‐enabled automatically by the switch after a timeout
period has elapsed.
Table 149. Link Flap Dampening Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] errdisable link­flap enable
Enables or disables Link Flap Dampening.
Command mode: Global configuration
errdisable link­flap max­flaps <1‐100>
Configures the maximum number of link flaps allowed in the configured time
period.
The default value is 5.
Command mode: Global configuration
errdisable link­flap time <5‐500>
Configures the time period, in seconds.
The default value is 30 seconds.
Command mode: Global configuration
show errdisable link­flap
Displays the current Link Flap Dampening parameters.
Command mode: All

288

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

System Host Log Configuration
The following table displays System Host Log configuration commands.
Table 150. Host Log Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] logging buffer severity <0‐7>
Sets the severity level of system log messages that are written to flash buffer.
The system saves only messages with the selected severity level and above. For
example, if you set the buffer severity to 2, only messages with severity level of
1 and 2 are saved.
The default is 7, which means log all severity levels.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] logging console
Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console. When necessary,
disabling console ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
logging console severity <0‐7>
Sets the severity level of system log messages to display via the console, Telnet,
and SSH. The system displays only messages with the selected severity level
and above. For example, if you set the console severity to 2, only messages
with severity level of 1 and 2 are displayed.
The default is 7, which means log all severity levels.
Command mode: Global configuration
no logging console severity
Disables delivering syslog messages to the console based on severity.
Command mode: Global configuration
logging host <1‐2> address 
[data­port|extm­port|mgt­port]
Sets the IPv4 address of the first or second syslog host.
Command mode: Global configuration
logging host <1‐2> address6 
[data­port|extm­port|mgt­port]
Sets the IPv6 address of the first or second syslog host.
Command mode: Global configuration
logging host <1‐2> facility <0‐7>
This option sets the facility level of the first or second syslog host displayed.
The default is 0.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

289

Table 150. Host Log Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

logging host <1‐2> severity <0‐7>
This option sets the severity level of the first or second syslog host displayed.
The default is 7, which means log all severity levels.
Command mode: Global configuration
no logging host <1‐2>
Removes the specified syslog host.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] logging log {all|}
Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated. You can
choose to enable/disable specific features (such as vlans, stg, or ssh), or
enable/disable syslog on all available features.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] logging pdrop enable
Enables or disables packet drop logging.
By default, the switch generates these messages once every 30 minutes.
Command mode: Global configuration
logging pdrop interval <0‐30>
Sets the packet drop logging interval, in minutes.
The default value is 30.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] logging synchronous [level <0‐7> | all]
Enables or disables synchronous logging messages. When enabled, logging
messages are displayed asynchronously.
The level parameter sets the message severity level. Messages with a severity
level equal to or higher than this value are displayed asynchronously. Low
numbers indicate greater severity. All displays all messages asynchronously,
regardless the severity level.
The default setting is 2.
Command mode: Global configuration
logging source­interface loopback <1‐5>
Sets the loopback interface number for syslogs.
Command mode: Global configuration

290

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 150. Host Log Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

no logging source­interface loopback
Removes the loopback interface for syslogs.
Command mode: Global configuration
show logging [severity ] [reverse]
Displays the current syslog settings, followed by the most recent 2000 syslog
messages, as displayed by the show logging messages command. For
details, see page 47.
The reverse option displays the output in reverse order, from the newest
entry to the oldest.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

291

SSH Server Configuration
For the CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch, these commands enable Secure Shell
access from any SSH client.
Table 151. SSH Server Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ssh enable
Enables or disables the SSH server.
Command mode: Global configuration
ssh generate­host­key
Generate the RSA host key.
Command mode: Global configuration
ssh maxauthattempts <1‐20>
Sets the maximum number of SSH authentication attempts.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ssh maxauthattempts
Resets the maximum number of SSH authentication attempts to its default
value of 2.
Command mode: Global configuration
ssh port 
Sets the SSH server port number.
The default port number is 22.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ssh port
Resets the SSH server port to the default port number 22.
Command mode: Global configuration
ssh public­key index <1‐100> {adduser|deluser}
username 
Assigns another user name for existing public keys or removes a user name.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ssh scp­enable
Enables or disables the SCP apply and save.
Command mode: Global configuration
ssh scp­password
Set the administration password for SCP access.
Command mode: Global configuration

292

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 151. SSH Server Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

show ssh
Displays the current SSH server configuration.
Command mode: All
show ssh­clienthostkey {address |all}
Displays the current SFTP/SSH host key configuration.


address: Displays a specific SFTP/SSH host key



all: Displays all SFTP/SSH host keys

Commands mode: All
show ssh­clientpubkey {all|index <1‐100>|username }
Displays the current SSH public key configuration.


all: Displays all SSH public keys



index: Displays a specific SSH public key



username: Displays all the SSH public keys of a particular user

Command mode: All
clear ssh­clienthostkey {address |all}
Clears stored SFTP/SSH host key configuration.


address: Clears a specific SFTP/SSH host key



all: Clears all SFTP/SSH host keys

Command mode: All except User EXEC
clear ssh­clientpubkey {all|index <1‐100>|username }
Clears stored SSH public key configuration.


all: Clears all SSH public keys



index: Clears a specific SSH public key



username: Clears a particular username from all the SSH public keys

Command mode: All except User EXEC

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

293

RADIUS Server Configuration
The following table displays RADIUS Server configuration commands.
Table 152. RADIUS Server Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] radius­server backdoor
Enables or disables the RADIUS backdoor for Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS.
The default value is disabled.
To obtain the RADIUS backdoor password for your switch, contact your
Service and Support line.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] radius­server enable
Enables or disables the RADIUS server.
Command mode: Global configuration
[default] radius­server port 
Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured, between 1500 ‐ 3000.
The default is 1645.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] radius­server primary­host 
Sets the primary RADIUS server address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] radius­server secondary­host 
Sets the secondary RADIUS server address.
Command mode: Global configuration
radius­server primary­host 
[key <1‐32 characters>]
This is the primary shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS
server(s). The key option sets the RADIUS server secret key.
Command mode: Global configuration
no radius­server primary­host [key]
Removes the primary RADIUS server. The key option removes only the
RADIUS server secret key.
Command mode: Global configuration
radius­server retransmit <1‐3>
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a
different RADIUS server.
The default is 3 requests.
Command mode: Global configuration

294

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 152. RADIUS Server Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

radius­server secondary­host 
[key <1‐32 characters>]
This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS
server(s). The key option sets the RADIUS server secret key.
Command mode: Global configuration
no radius­server secondary­host [key]
Removes the secondary RADIUS server. The key option removes only the
RADIUS server secret key.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] radius­server secure­backdoor
Enables or disables the RADIUS backdoor using secure password for
Telnet/SSH/HTTP/HTTPS.
Note: This command does not apply when RADIUS backdoor is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
radius­server timeout <1‐10>
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a RADIUS server authentication
attempt is considered to have failed.
The default is 3 seconds.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip radius source­interface loopback <1‐5>
Sets the RADIUS source loopback interface.
Command mode: Global configuration
show radius­server
Displays the current RADIUS server parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

295

TACACS+ Server Configuration
TACACS (Terminal Access Controller Access Control system) is an authentication
protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a userʹs logon password to
an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given
system. TACACS is not an encryption protocol, and therefore less secure than
TACACS+ and Remote Authentication Dial‐In User Service (RADIUS) protocols.
Both TACACS and TACACS+ are described in RFC 1492.
TACACS+ protocol is more reliable than RADIUS, as TACACS+ uses the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram
Protocol (UDP). Also, RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a
user profile, whereas TACACS+ separates the two operations.
TACACS+ offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication
device:


TACACS+ is TCP‐based, so it facilitates connection‐oriented traffic.



It supports full‐packet encryption, as opposed to password‐only in
authentication requests.



It supports de‐coupled authentication, authorization, and accounting.

Table 153. TACACS+ Server Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] tacacs­server accounting­enable
Enables or disables TACACS+ accounting.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server attempts <1‐10>
Sets the number of failed login attempts before disconnecting the user.
The default is 2 attempts.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server backdoor
Enables or disables the TACACS+ back door for Telnet, SSH/SCP or
HTTP/HTTPS.
Enabling this feature allows you to bypass the TACACS+ servers. It is
recommended that you use Secure Backdoor to ensure the switch is secured,
because Secure Backdoor disallows access through the back door when the
TACACS+ servers are responding.
The default setting is disabled.
To obtain the TACACS+ backdoor password for your CN4093, contact your
Service and Support line.
Command mode: Global configuration
tacacs­server chpassp <1‐32 characters>
Defines the password for the primary TACACS+ server.
Command mode: Global configuration

296

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 153. TACACS+ Server Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

tacacs­server chpasss <1‐32 characters>
Defines the password for the secondary TACACS+ server.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server command­authorization
Enables or disables TACACS+ command authorization.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server command­logging
Enables or disables TACACS+ command logging.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server directed­request
[restricted|no­truncate]
Enables or disables TACACS+ directed request, which uses a specified
TACACS+ server for authentication, authorization, accounting. When enabled,
When directed‐request is enabled, each user must add a configured TACACS+
server hostname to the username (for example, username@hostname)
during login.
This command allows the following options:


Restricted: Only the username is sent to the specified TACACS+ server.



No­truncate: The entire login string is sent to the TACACS+ server.

Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server enable
Enables or disables the TACACS+ server.
By default, the server is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server enable­bypass
Enables or disables the enable‐bypass for administrator privilege.
By default, enable‐bypass is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­sercer encryption­enable
Enables or disables encryption for TACACS+ traffic packets.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server password­change
Enables or disables TACACS+ password change.
The default value is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

297

Table 153. TACACS+ Server Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

primary­password
Configures the password for the primary TACACS+ server. The CLI will
prompt you for input.
Command mode: Global configuration
secondary­password
Configures the password for the secondary TACACS+ server. The CLI will
prompt you for input.
Command mode: Global configuration
[default] tacacs­server port 
Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured, between 1 and 65000.
The default is 49.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server primary­host 
Defines the primary TACACS+ server address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server primary­host  key <1‐32 characters>
This is the primary shared secret key between the switch and the TACACS+
server(s).
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server privilege­mapping
Enables or disables TACACS+ privilege‐level mapping.
The default value is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
tacacs­server retransmit <1‐3>
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a
different TACACS+ server.
The default is 3 requests.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server secondary­host 
Defines the secondary TACACS+ server address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server secondary­host  key <1‐32 characters>
This is the secondary shared secret key between the switch and the TACACS+
server(s).
Command mode: Global configuration

298

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 153. TACACS+ Server Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] tacacs­server secure­backdoor
Enables or disables TACACS+ secure back door access through Telnet,
SSH/SCP, or HTTP/HTTPS only when the TACACS+ servers are not
responding.
This feature is recommended to permit access to the switch when the
TACACS+ servers become unresponsive. If no back door is enabled, the only
way to gain access when TACACS+ servers are unresponsive is to use the back
door via the console port.
The default is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
tacacs­server timeout <4‐15>
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a TACACS+ server authentication
attempt is considered to have failed.
The default is 5 seconds.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] tacacs­server user­mapping {<0‐15> user|oper|admin}
Maps a TACACS+ authorization level to a switch user level. Enter a TACACS+
authorization level (0‐15), followed by the corresponding switch user level.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip tacacs­server source­interface loopback <1‐5>
Sets the TACACS+ source loopback interface.
Command mode: Global configuration
show tacacs­server
Displays current TACACS+ configuration parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

299

LDAP Server Configuration
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is an authentication protocol that
allows a remote access server to forward a userʹs logon password to an
authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given
system.
Table 154. LDAP Server Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ldap­server attribute username <1‐128 characters>
Sets a customized LDAP user attribute.
The defaul value is uid.
Note: The user attribute needs to be set to cn if LDAP server is MS active
directory.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ldap­server attribute [username]
Sets LDAP attributes back to their default values. The username option sets
the LDAP user attribute back to its default value of uid.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ldap­server backdoor
Enables or disables the LDAP back door for Telnet, SSH/SCP, or HTTP/HTTPS.
The default setting is disabled.
Note: To obtain the LDAP back door password for your CN4093, contact your
Service and Support line.
Command mode: Global configuration
ldap­server domain [<1‐128 characters>|none]
Sets the domain name for the LDAP server. Enter the full path for your
organization. For example:
ou=people,dc=mydomain,dc=com
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ldap­server enable
Enables or disables the LDAP server.
Command mode: Global configuration
[default] ldap­server port 
Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured, between 1 ‐ 65000.
The default is 389.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ldap­server primary­host 
Sets the primary LDAP server address.
Command mode: Global configuration

300

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 154. LDAP Server Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

ldap­server retransmit <1‐3>
Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a
different LDAP server.
The default is 3 requests.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ldap­server secondary­host 
Sets the secondary LDAP server address.
Command mode: Global configuration
ldap­server timeout <4‐15>
Sets the amount of time, in seconds, before a LDAP server authentication
attempt is considered to have failed.
The default is 5 seconds.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ldap­server
Displays the current LDAP server parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

301

NTP Server Configuration
These commands allow you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time
Protocol (NTP) server. By default, this option is disabled.
Table 155. NTP Server Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ntp authenticate
Enables or disables NTP authentication. When authentication is enabled, the
switch transmits NTP packets with the MAC address appended.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ntp enable
Enables or disables the NTP synchronization service.
Command mode: Global configuration
ntp interval <5‐44640>
Specifies the interval, that is, how often, in minutes, to re‐synchronize the
switch clock with the NTP server.
The default value is 1440.
Command mode: Global configuration
ntp offset <0‐86400>
Configures the minimum offset in seconds between the switch clock and the
NTP server that triggers a system log message.
The default value is 300.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ntp offset
Resets the NTP offset to the default 300 seconds value.
Command mode: Global configuration
ntp primary­key <1‐65534>
Adds the NTP primary server key, which specifies which MD5 key is used by
the primary server.
Command mode: Global configuration
ntp secondary­key <1‐65534>
Adds the NTP secondary server key, which specifies which MD5 key is used
by the secondary server.
Command mode: Global configuration

302

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 155. NTP Server Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ntp primary­server  [data­port|extm­port|mgt­port]
Prompts for the IP addresses of the primary NTP server to which you want to
synchronize the switch clock. Select the port to use for data transfer:


data port (data)



external management port (extm)



internal management port (mgt)

Command mode: Global configuration
no ntp primary­server
Removes the primary NTP server address.
Command mode: Global configuration
ntp secondary­server  [data­port|extm­port|mgt­port]
Prompts for the IP addresses of the secondary NTP server to which you want
to synchronize the switch clock. Select the port to use for data transfer:


data port (data)



external management port (extm)



internal management port (mgt)

Command mode: Global configuration
no ntp secondary­server
Removes the secondary NTP server address.
Command mode: Global configuration
ntp ipv6 primary­server 
[data­port|extm­port|mgt­port]
Prompts for the IPv6 addresses of the primary NTP server to which you want
to synchronize the switch clock. Select the port to use for data transfer:


data port (data)



external management port (extm)



internal management port (mgt)

Command mode: Global configuration
no ntp ipv6 primary­server
Removes the IPv6 primary NTP server address.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

303

Table 155. NTP Server Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ntp ipv6 secondary­server 
[data­port|extm­port|mgt­port]
Prompts for the IPv6 addresses of the secondary NTP server to which you
want to synchronize the switch clock. Select the port to use for data transfer:


data port (data)



external management port (extm)



internal management port (mgt)

Command mode: Global configuration
no ntp ipv6 secondary­server
Removes the IPv6 secondary NTP server address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ntp sync­logs
Enables or disables informational logs for NTP synchronization failures.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ntp source loopback <1‐5>
Sets the NTP source loopback interface.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ntp trusted­key <1‐65534>
Adds or removes an MD5 key code to the list of trusted keys. Enter 0 (zero) to
remove the selected key code.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ntp
Displays the current NTP service settings.
Command mode: All

NTP MD5 Key Commands
The following table displays NTP MD5 Key configuration commands.
Table 156. NTP MD5 KEy Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ntp message­digest­key <1‐65534> md5­key <1‐16 characters>
Configures the selected MD5 key code.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ntp message­digest­key <1‐65534>
Deletes the selected MD5 key code.
Command mode: Global configuration

304

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

System SNMP Configuration
Lenovo N/OS supports SNMP‐based network management. In SNMP model of
network management, a management station (client/manager) accesses a set of
variables known as MIBs (Management Information Base) provided by the
managed device (agent). If you are running an SNMP network management
station on your network, you can manage the switch using the following standard
SNMP MIBs:
MIB II (RFC 1213)
Ethernet MIB (RFC 1643)
 Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)



An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP
port 161 for SNMP messages. Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list
of management objects to retrieve or to modify.
SNMP parameters that can be modified include:








System name
System location
System contact
Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function
Read community string
Write community string
Trap community strings

Table 157. System SNMP Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] snmp­server authentication­trap
Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] snmp­server contact <1‐64 characters>
Configures the name of the system contact. The contact can have a maximum
of 64 characters.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server host  
Adds a trap host server.
Command mode: Global configuration
no snmp­server host 
Removes the trap host server.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

305

Table 157. System SNMP Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] snmp­server link­trap  enable
Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps for the
specified port.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] snmp­server location <1‐64 characters>
Configures the name of the system location. The location can have a maximum
of 64 characters.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] snmp­server name <1‐64 characters>
Configures the name for the system. The name can have a maximum of 64
characters.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server read­community <1‐32 characters>
Configures the SNMP read community string. The read community string
controls SNMP “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of 32
characters.
The default read community string is public.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] snmp­server read­community­additional <1‐32 characters>
Adds or removes an additional SNMP read community string. Up to 7
additional read community strings are supported.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server timeout <1‐30>
Sets the timeout value for the SNMP state machine, in minutes.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] snmp­server trap­source {|loopback <1‐5>}
Configures the source interface for SNMP traps.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server write­community <1‐32 characters>
Configures the SNMP write community string. The write community string
controls SNMP “set” and “get” access to the switch. It can have a maximum of
32 characters.
The default write community string is private.
Command mode: Global configuration

306

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 157. System SNMP Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] snmp­server write­community­additional <1‐32 characters>
Adds or removes an additional SNMP write community string. Up to 7
additional write community strings are supported.
Command mode: Global configuration
show snmp­server
Displays the current SNMP configuration.
Command mode: All

SNMPv3 Configuration
SNMP version 3 (SNMPv3) is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements
the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following:


a new SNMP message format



security for messages



access control



remote configuration of SNMP parameters

For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC3411 to RFC3418.
Table 158. SNMPv3 Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

snmp­server access <1‐32>
This command allows you to specify access rights. The View‐based Access
Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking
access rights of the user. You need access control when you have to process
retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity. To view command
options, see page 311.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server community <1‐16>
The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and
version‐independent SNMP message parameters. To view command options,
see page 313.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server group <1‐17>
A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights
needed to access SNMP management objects. A group defines the access rights
assigned to all names that belong to a particular group. To view command
options, see page 312.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

307

Table 158. SNMPv3 Configuration Commands (continued)
snmp­server notify <1‐16>
A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or
conditions, and generates Notification‐Class messages based on these events
or conditions. To view command options, see page 316.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server target­address <1‐16>
This command allows you to configure destination information, consisting of
a transport domain and a transport address. This is also termed as transport
endpoint. The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source
address validation on incoming requests, and for selecting community strings
based on target addresses for outgoing notifications. To view command
options, see page 314.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server target­parameters <1‐16>
This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters, consisting of
message processing model, security model, security level, and security name
information. There may be multiple transport endpoints associated with a
particular set of SNMP parameters, or a particular transport endpoint may be
associated with several sets of SNMP parameters. To view command options,
see page 315.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server user <1‐17>
This command allows you to create a user security model (USM) entry for an
authorized user. You can also configure this entry through SNMP. To view
command options, see page 309.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server version {v1v2v3|v3only}
This command allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP versions 1,
2 or 3.
The default value is v1v2v3.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server view <1‐128>
This command allows you to create different MIB views. To view command
options, see page 310.
Command mode: Global configuration
show snmp­server v3
Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration.
Command mode: All

308

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

User Security Model Configuration
You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model. An
SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user.
These commands help you create a user security model entry for an authorized
user. You need to provide a security name to create the USM entry.
Table 159. User Security Model Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

snmp­server user <1‐17> authentication­protocol
{md5|sha|none} authentication­password 
This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol and
password.
The authentication protocol can be HMAC‐MD5‐96 or HMAC‐SHA‐96 for
compatibility mode, HMAC‐SHA‐96 for security strict mode, or none. The
default algorithm is none.
MD5 authentication protocol is not available in security strict mode if you do
not select SNMPv3 account backward compatibility.
When you configure an authentication algorithm, you must provide a
password, otherwise you will get an error message during validation. This
command allows you to create or change your password for authentication.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server user <1‐17> name <1‐32 characters>
This command allows you to configure a string that represents the name of the
user. This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server user <1‐17> privacy­protocol {aes|des|none}
privacy­password 
This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol and the
privacy password.
The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure. The options are des
(CBC‐DES Symmetric Encryption Protocol), aes (AES‐128 Advanced
Encryption Standard Protocol) or none. If you specify des as the privacy
protocol, then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication
protocols (MD5 or HMAC‐SHA‐96). In security strict mode, if you do not
select SNMPv3 account backward compatibility, make sure to disable des
privacy protocol. If you specify aes as the privacy protocol, make sure that
you have selected HMAC‐SHA‐256 authentication protocol. If you select none
as the authentication protocol, you will get an error message.
You can create or change the privacy password.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

309

Table 159. User Security Model Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

no snmp­server user <1‐17>
Deletes the USM user entries.
Command mode: Global configuration
show snmp­server v3 user <1‐17>
Displays the USM user entries.
Command mode: All

SNMPv3 View Configuration
Note that the first five default vacmViewTreeFamily entries cannot be removed,
and their names cannot be changed.
Table 160. SNMPv3 View Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] snmp­server view <1‐128> mask <1‐32 characters>
This command defines the bit mask, which in combination with the
corresponding tree defines a family of view subtrees.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server view <1‐128> name <1‐32 characters>
This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server view <1‐128> tree <1‐64 characters>
This command defines MIB tree, which when combined with the
corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server view <1‐128> type {included|excluded}
This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of
vacmViewTreeFamilySubtree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define
a family of view subtrees, which is included in or excluded from the MIB view.
Command mode: Global configuration
no snmp­server view <1‐128>
Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
show snmp­server v3 view <1‐128>
Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration.
Command mode: All

310

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

View-based Access Control Model Configuration
The view‐based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application
can use for checking access rights of the user. Access control is needed when the
user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity.
Table 161. View‐based Access Control Model Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

snmp­server access <1‐32> level {noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|
|authPriv}
Defines the minimum level of security required to gain access rights. The level
noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without
authentication and without using a privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv
means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without
using a privacy protocol. The authPriv means that the SNMP message will
be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server access <1‐32> match {exact|prefix}
If the value is set to exact, then all the rows whose contextName exactly
matches the prefix are selected. If the value is set to prefix then the all the
rows where the starting octets of the contextName exactly match the prefix are
selected.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server access <1‐32> name <1‐32 characters>
Defines the name of the group.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server access <1‐32> notify­view <1‐32 characters>
Defines a notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server access <1‐32> prefix <1‐32 characters>
Defines the name of the context. An SNMP context is a collection of
management information that an SNMP entity can access. An SNMP entity
has access to many contexts. For more information on naming the
management information, see RFC2571, the SNMP Architecture document.
The view‐based Access Control Model defines a table that lists the locally
available contexts by contextName.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server access <1‐32> read­view <1‐32 characters>
Defines a read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view.
If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no
access is granted.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

311

Table 161. View‐based Access Control Model Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

snmp­server access <1‐32> security {usm|snmpv1|snmpv2}
Allows you to select the security model to be used.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server access <1‐32> write­view <1‐32 characters>
Defines a write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view. If the
value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no
access is granted.
Command mode: Global configuration
no snmp­server access <1‐32>
Deletes the View‐based Access Control entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
show snmp­server v3 access <1‐32>
Displays the View‐based Access Control configuration.
Command mode: All

SNMPv3 Group Configuration
The following table displays SNMPv3 Group configuration commands.
Table 162. SNMPv3 Group Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

snmp­server group <1‐17> group­name <1‐32 characters>
The name for the access group as defined in the following command:
snmp­server access <1‐32> name <1‐32 characters> on page 309.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server group <1‐17> security {usm|snmpv1|snmpv2}
Defines the security model.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server group <1‐17> user­name <1‐32 characters>
Sets the user name as defined in the following command on page 309:
snmp­server user <1‐17> name <1‐32 characters>
Command mode: Global configuration
no snmp­server group <1‐17>
Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
show snmp­server v3 group <1‐17>
Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration.
Command mode: All

312

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration
These commands are used for configuring the community table entry. The
configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine. This
table is used to configure community strings in the Local Configuration Datastore
(LCD) of SNMP engine.
Table 163. SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

snmp­server community <1‐16> index <1‐32 characters>
Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table.
Command string: Global configuration
snmp­server community <1‐16> name <1‐32 characters>
Defines the user name as defined in the following command on page 309:
snmp­server user <1‐17> name <1‐32 characters>
Command string: Global configuration
snmp­server community <1‐16> tag <1‐255 characters>
Allows you to configure a tag. This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints to
which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server community <1‐16> user­name <1‐32 characters>
Defines a readable string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP
community name in a security model.
Command mode: Global configuration
no snmp­server community <1‐16>
Deletes the community table entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
show snmp­server v3 community <1‐16>
Displays the community table configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

313

SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration
These commands are used to configure the target transport entry. The configured
entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine. This table of
transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages.
Table 164. Target Address Table Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

snmp­server target­address <1‐16> {address|address6}
 name <1‐32 characters>
Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary, but unique identifier, target
address name associated with this entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server target­address <1‐16> name <1‐32 characters>
{address|address6} 
Configures a transport IPv4/IPv6 address that can be used in the generation of
SNMP traps.
Note: IPv6 addresses are not displayed in the configuration, but they do
receive traps.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server target­address <1‐16> parameters­name
<1‐32 characters>
Defines the name as defined in the following command on page 315:
snmp­server target­parameters <1‐16> name <1‐32 characters>
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server target­address <1‐16> port 
Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the
generation of SNMP traps.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server target­address <1‐16> taglist <1‐255 characters>
Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for
a particular operation.
Command mode: Global configuration
no snmp­server target­address <1‐16>
Deletes the Target Address Table entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
show snmp­server v3 target­address <1‐16>
Displays the current Target Address Table configuration.
Command mode: All

314

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration
You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters
table in the SNMP engine. This table contains parameters that are used to generate
a message. The parameters include the message processing model (for example:
SNMPv3, SNMPv2c, SNMPv1), the security model (for example: USM), the
security name, and the security level (noAuthnoPriv, authNoPriv, or
authPriv).
Table 165. Target Parameters Table Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

snmp­server target­parameters <1‐16> level
{noAuthNoPriv|authNoPriv|authPriv}
Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the
SNMP messages using this entry. The level noAuthNoPriv means that the
SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a
privacy protocol. The level authNoPriv means that the SNMP message will
be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol. The
authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with
authentication and using a privacy protocol.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server target­parameters <1‐16> message
{snmpv1|snmpv2c|snmpv3}
Allows you to configure the message processing model that is used to generate
SNMP messages.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server target­parameters <1‐16> name <1‐32 characters>
Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary, but unique, identifier that is
associated with this entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server target­parameters <1‐16> security
{usm|snmpv1|snmpv2}
Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP
messages.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server target­parameters <1‐16> user­name <1‐32 characters>
Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table (page 309) on whose
behalf the SNMP messages are generated using this entry.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

315

Table 165. Target Parameters Table Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

no snmp­server target­parameters <1‐16>
Deletes the targetParamsTable entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
show snmp­server v3 target­parameters <1‐16>
Displays the current targetParamsTable configuration.
Command mode: All

SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration
SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps. A notification typically
monitors a system for particular events or conditions, and generates
Notification‐Class messages based on these events or conditions.
Table 166. Notify Table Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

snmp­server notify <1‐16> name <1‐32 characters>
Defines a locally arbitrary, but unique, identifier associated with this SNMP
notify entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
snmp­server notify <1‐16> tag <1‐255 characters>
Allows you to configure a tag that contains a tag value which is used to select
entries in the Target Address Table. Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTable
that matches the value of this tag is selected.
Command mode: Global configuration
no snmp­server notify <1‐16>
Deletes the notify table entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
show snmp­server v3 notify <1‐16>
Displays the current notify table configuration.
Command mode: All

316

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

System Access Configuration
The following table describes system access configuration commands.
Table 167. System Access Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access http enable
Enables or disables HTTP (Web) access to the Browser‐Based Interface.
The default settings is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[default] access http port []
Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content.
The default setting is HTTP port 80.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access snmp {read­only|read­write}
Enables or disables read‐only/write‐read SNMP access.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access telnet enable
Enables or disables Telnet access.
The default settings is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[default] access telnet port [<1‐65535>]
Sets an optional Telnet server port number for cases where the server listens
for Telnet sessions on a non‐standard port.
Command mode: Global configuration
[default] access tftp­port [<1‐65535>]
Sets the TFTP port for the switch.
The default is port 69.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access tsbbi enable
Enables or disables Telnet/SSH configuration through the Browser‐Based
Interface (BBI).
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

317

Table 167. System Access Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

access user administrator­password
Sets the administrator (admin) password. The administrator has complete
access to all menus, information, and configuration commands on the CN4093,
including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords.
This command will prompt for required information: current admin password,
new password (up to 128 characters) and confirmation of the new password.
Access includes “oper” functions.
Note: You cannot disable the administrator password.
Command Mode: Global configuration
access user operator­password
Sets the operator (oper)password. The operator manages all functions of the
switch. The operator can view all switch information and statistics and can
reset ports.
This command will prompt for required information: current admin password,
new password (up to 128 characters) and confirmation of the new password.
Note: To disable the operator account, set the password to null (no password).
The default setting is disabled (no password).
Command Mode: Global configuration
access user user­password
Sets the user (user) password. The user has no direct responsibility for switch
management. The user view switch status information and statistics, but cannot
make any configuration changes.
This command will prompt for required information: current admin password,
new password (up to 128 characters) and confirmation of the new password.
Note: To disable the user account, set the password to null (no password).
Command Mode: Global configuration
[no] access userbbi enable
Enables or disables user configuration access through the Browser‐Based
Interface (BBI).
Command mode: Global configuration
show access
Displays the current system access parameters.
Command mode: All

318

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Management Network Configuration
These commands are used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access
the switch for management purposes.
Table 168. Management Network Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access management­network 

Adds or removes a defined network through which switch access is allowed
through Telnet, SNMP, RIP, or the Lenovo N/OS browser‐based interface. A
range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address.
Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted‐decimal notation.
Note: If you configure the management network without including the switch
interfaces, the configuration causes the Firewall Load Balancing health checks
to fail and creates a “Network Down” state on the network.
Command mode: Global configuration
access management­network 
 {snmp­ro|snmp­rw}
Adds a defined IPv4 network through which SNMP read‐only or SNMP
read/write switch access is allowed. Specify an IP address and mask address in
dotted‐decimal notation.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access management­network {snmp­ro|snmp­rw}
Clears the IPv4 SNMP read‐only or SNMP read/write access control list for
management purposes.
Command mode: Global configuration
access management­network6 
 {snmp­ro|snmp­rw}
Adds a defined IPv6 network through which SNMP read‐only or SNMP
read/write switch access is allowed.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access management­network6 {snmp­ro|snmp­rw}
Clears the IPv6 SNMP read‐only or SNMP read/write access control list for
management purposes.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access management­network
Displays the current management network configuration and SNMP access
management IP list.
Command mode: All
clear access management­network
Removes all defined management networks.
Command mode: All except User EXEC

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

319

User Access Control Configuration
The following table describes user‐access control commands.
Passwords can be a maximum of 128 characters.
Table 169. User Access Control Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

access user <1‐20>
Configures the User ID.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access user administrator­enable
Enables or disables the default administrator account.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user administrator­password <1‐128 characters>
Sets the administrator (admin) password. The super user administrator has
complete access to all information and configuration commands on the
CN4093, including the ability to change both the user and administrator
passwords.
Note: Access includes “oper” functions.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user operator­password <1‐128 characters>
Sets the operator (oper)password. The operator manages all functions of the
switch. He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset
ports.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user user­password <1‐128 characters>
Sets the user (user) password. The user has no direct responsibility for switch
management. He or she can view switch status information and statistics, but
cannot make any configuration changes.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user eject {|}
Ejects the specified user from the CN4093.
Command mode: Global configuration
clear line <1‐12>
Ejects the user with the corresponding session ID from the CN4093.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
show access user
Displays the current user status.
Command mode: All

320

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

System User ID Configuration
The following table describes user ID configuration commands.
Table 170. User ID Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access user <1‐20> enable
Enables or disables the user ID.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user <1‐20> level {user|operator|administrator}
Sets the Class‐of‐Service to define the user’s authority level. Lenovo N/OS
defines these levels as: User, Operator, and Administrator, with User being the
most restricted level.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user <1‐20> name <1‐8 characters>
Defines the user name of maximum eight characters.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user <1‐20> password
Sets the user (user) password. This command will prompt for required
information: current admin password, new password (up to 128 characters) and
confirmation of the new password.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access user <1‐20>
Deletes the user ID.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access user
Displays the current user ID configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

321

Strong Password Configuration
The following table describes strong password configuration commands.
Table 171. Strong Password Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access user strong­password enable
Enables or disables Strong Password requirement.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user strong­password clear local user
{lockout|fail­attempts} {|all}
Enables locked out accounts or resets failed login counters for all users or for a
specific user.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user strong­password expiry <1‐365>
Configures the number of days allowed before the password must be changed.
The default value is 60.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user strong­password faillock <1‐10>
Configures the number of failed login attempts that trigger the account
lockout.
The default value is 6.
Command mode: Global configuration
access user strong­password faillog <1‐255>
Configures the number of failed login attempts allowed before a security
notification is logged.
The default value is 3.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access user strong­password lockout
Enables or disables account lockout after a specified number of failed login
attempts.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration

322

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 171. Strong Password Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

access user strong­password warning <1‐365>
Configures the number of days before password expiration, that a warning is
issued to users.
The default value is 15.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access user strong­password
Displays the current Strong Password configuration.
Command mode: All

HTTPS Access Configuration
The following table describes HTTPS access configuration commands.
Table 172. HTTPS Access Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access https enable
Enables or disables BBI access (Web access) using HTTPS.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
access https generate­certificate
Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the
key exchange. A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the
first time. The user can create a new certificate defining the information that
they want to be used in the various fields. For example:


Country Name (2 letter code): CA



State or Province Name (full name): Ontario



Locality Name (for example, city): Ottawa



Organization Name (for example, company): Lenovo



Organizational Unit Name (for example, section): Operations



Common Name (for example, user’s name): Mr Smith



Email (for example, email address): info@lenovo.com

You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate. It will take
approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate. Then the switch will
restart SSL agent.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

323

Table 172. HTTPS Access Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[default] access https port []
Defines the HTTPS Web server port number.
The default port is 443.
Command mode: Global configuration
access https save­certificate
Allows the client, or the Web browser, to accept the certificate and save the
certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access
Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration.
Command mode: All

324

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Custom Daylight Saving Time Configuration
Use these commands to configure custom Daylight Saving Time. The DST is
defined by two rules, the start rule and end rule. The rules specify the dates when
the DST starts and finishes. These dates are represented as specific calendar dates
or as relative offsets in a month (for example, ʹthe second Sunday of Septemberʹ).
Relative offset example:
2070901 = Second Sunday of September, at 1:00 a.m.
Calendar date example:
0070901 = September 7, at 1:00 a.m.
Table 173. Custom DST Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] system custom­dst enable
Enables or disables the Custom Daylight Saving Time settings.
Command mode: Global configuration
system custom­dst start­rule 
Configures the start date for custom DST, as follows:
WDMMhh
W = week (0‐5, where 0 means use the calender date)
D = day of the week (01‐07, where 01 is Monday)
MM = month (1‐12)
hh = hour (0‐23)
Note: Week 5 is always considered to be the last week of the month.
Command mode: Global configuration
system custom­dst end­rule 
Configures the end date for custom DST, as follows:
WDMMhh
W = week (0‐5, where 0 means use the calender date)
D = day of the week (01‐07, where 01 is Monday)
MM = month (1‐12)
hh = hour (0‐23)
Note: Week 5 is always considered to be the last week of the month.
Command mode: Global configuration
show custom­dst
Displays the current Custom DST configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

325

sFlow Configuration
Lenovo N/OS supports sFlow version 5. sFlow is a sampling method used for
monitoring high speed switched networks. Use these commands to configure the
sFlow agent on the switch.
Table 174. sFlow Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] sflow enable
Enables or disables the sFlow agent.
Command mode: Global configuration
sflow port <1‐65535>
Configures the UDP port for the sFlow server.
The default value is 6343.
Command mode: Global configuration
sflow server 
Defines the sFlow server address.
Command mode: Global configuration
show sflow
Displays sFlow configuration parameters.
Command mode: All

sFlow Port Configuration
Use the following commands to configure the sFlow port on the switch.
Table 175. sFlow Port Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] sflow polling <5‐60>
Configures the sFlow polling interval, in seconds.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] sflow sampling <256‐65536>
Configures the sFlow sampling rate, in packets per sample.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Interface port

326

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Port Configuration
Use the Port Configuration commands to configure settings for switch ports (INTx)
and (EXTx). If you are configuring management ports (MGT1), see “Management
Port Configuration” on page 339.
Table 176. Port Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

interface port 
Enter Interface port mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] bpdu­guard
Enables or disables BPDU guard, to avoid spanning‐tree loops on ports with
Port Fast Forwarding enabled.
Command mode: Interface port
description <1‐64 characters>
Sets a description for the port. The assigned port name appears next to the port
description on some information and statistics screens.
The default is set to the port number.
Command mode: Interface port
dot1p <0‐7>
Configures the port’s 802.1p priority level.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] dscp­marking
Enables or disables DSCP re‐marking on a port.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] flood­blocking
Enables or disables port Flood Blocking. When enabled, unicast and
multicast packets with unknown destination MAC addresses are blocked from
the port.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] learning
Enables or disables FDB learning on the port.
Command mode: Interface port
port­channel min­links <1‐16>
Set the minimum number of links for this port. If the specified minimum
number of ports are not available, the trunk is placed in the down state.
Command mode: Interface port

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

327

Table 176. Port Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] reflective­relay force
Enables or disables constraint to always keep reflective relay active.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] rmon
Enables or disables Remote Monitoring for the port. RMON must be enabled
for any RMON configurations to function.
Command mode: Interface port
shutdown
Disables the port. (To temporarily disable a port without changing its
configuration attributes, refer to “Temporarily Disabling a Port” on page 333.)
Command mode: Interface port
no shutdown
Enables the port.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] storm­control broadcast level rate <0‐2097151>
Limits the number of broadcast packets per second to the specified value. If
disabled, the port forwards all broadcast packets.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] storm­control multicast level rate <0‐2097151>
Limits the number of multicast packets per second to the specified value. If
disabled, the port forwards all multicast packets.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] storm­control unicast level rate <0‐2097151>
Limits the number of unknown unicast packets per second to the specified
value. If disabled, the port forwards all unknown unicast packets.
Command mode: Interface port

328

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 176. Port Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

switchport mode {access|trunk|private­vlan}
Configures the port’s trunking mode:


access allows association to a single VLAN



trunk automatically adds the port to all created VLANs. To configure a
specific allowed VLAN range for the port use the command:
switchport trunk allowed vlan



private­vlan allows association to a private VLAN

The default mode is access.
Note: When switching from access to trunk mode, the port inherits the access
VLAN as the trunk Native‐VLAN.
Note: When switching from trunk to access mode, the port inherits the trunk
Native‐VLAN as the access VLAN.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
switchport trunk allowed vlan 
Configures the allowed VLANs in trunk mode for the current port or
portchannel. If the allowed range does not have any existing VLANs, the
lowest‐numbered VLAN is created and becomes the Native‐VLAN. If the
allowed range contains an existing VLAN(s), but the Native‐VLAN is not in
the allowed range, the Native‐VLAN is changed to the lowest‐numbered
existing VLAN. If a new VLAN is created and it is part of the allowed VLAN
range, the port will also be added to that VLAN.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
switchport trunk allowed vlan {add|remove} 
Updates the associated VLANs in trunk mode.


add enables the VLAN range in addition to the current configuration. If any
VLAN in the range does not exist, it will not be created and enabled
automatically.



remove eliminates the VLAN range from the current configuration.

Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
switchport trunk allowed vlan {all|none}
Updates the associated VLANs in trunk mode.


all associates the port to all existing regular VLANs and to any other
VLAN that gets created afterwards.



none removes the port from all currently associated VLANs and assigns the
port to the default Native‐VLAN (VLAN 1 for data ports).

Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
no switchport trunk allowed vlan
Assigns the port to all available data VLANs.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

329

Table 176. Port Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

switchport trunk native vlan <1‐4094>
Configures the Port VLAN ID (PVID) or Native‐VLAN used to carry untagged
traffic in trunk mode. If the VLAN does not exist, it will be created and
enabled automatically.
Default value is 1 for data ports and 4095 for the management port.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
switchport access vlan <1‐4094>
Configures the associated VLAN used in access mode. If the VLAN does not
exist, it will be created and enabled automatically.
Default value is 1 for data ports and 4095 for the management port.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
no switchport access vlan
Resets the access VLAN to its default value.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
[no] switchport private­vlan mapping 
Enables or disables a private VLAN promiscuous port to/from a primary
VLAN.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
[no] switchport private­vlan host­association 

Adds or removes a private VLAN host port to/from a secondary VLAN.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
[no] tagpvid­ingress
Enables or disables tagging the ingress frames with the port’s VLAN ID. When
enabled, the PVID tag is inserted into untagged and 802.1Q single‐tagged
ingress frames as outer VLAN ID.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
unicast­bandwidth <10‐100>
Configures the allocated bandwidth percentage for unicast traffic on the port.
The remaining bandwidth is automatically allocated to multicast traffic.
The default value is 50.
Command mode: Interface port

330

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 176. Port Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

unicast­bandwidth global <10‐100>
Configures the allocated bandwidth percentage for unicast traffic on the
egress ports. The remaining bandwidth is automatically allocated to multicast
traffic.
The default value is 50.
Note: This applies to all ports.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] vlan dot1q tag native
Enables or disables VLAN tag persistence. When disabled, the VLAN tag is
removed at egress from packets whose VLAN tag matches the port
PVID/Native‐vlan.
The default setting is disabled.
Note: In global configuration mode, this is an operational command used to
set the VLAN tag persistence on all ports currently tagged at the moment of
execution. VLAN tag persistence will not be set automatically for ports tagged
afterward. Also, as an operational command, it will not be dumped into the
configuration file.
Command mode: Global configuration/Interface port/Interface portchannel
show interface port 
Displays current port parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

331

Port Error Disable and Recovery Configuration
The Error Disable and Recovery feature allows the switch to automatically disable
a port if an error condition is detected on the port. The port remains in the
error‐disabled state until it is re‐enabled manually, or re‐enabled automatically by
the switch after a timeout period has elapsed. The error‐disabled state of a port
does not persist across a system reboot.
Table 177. Port Error Disable Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] errdisable link­flap enable
Enables or disables Link Flap Dampening on the port. For more information,
see “Link Flap Dampening Configuration” on page 288.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] errdisable recovery
Enables or disables automatic error‐recovery for the port.
The default setting is enabled.
Note: Error‐recovery must be enabled globally before port‐level commands
become active.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  errdisable
Displays current port Error Disable parameters.
Command mode: All

332

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Port Link Configuration
Use these commands to set flow control for the port link.
Table 178. Port Link Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] auto
Enables or disables auto‐negotiation on the port.
Command mode: Interface port
duplex {full|half|auto}
Sets the operating mode. The choices include:
– Auto negotiation (default)
– Half‐duplex
– Full‐duplex
Command mode: Interface port
flowcontrol {receive|send} {on|off}
Enables or disables flow control receive or transmit.
Note: For external ports (EXTx) the default setting is no flow control, and
for internal ports (INTx) the default setting is both receive and transmit.
Command mode: Interface port
speed {1000|10000|auto}
Sets the link speed. Some options are not valid on all ports. The choices
include:
– 1000 Mbps
– 10000 Mbps
– any (auto negotiate port speed)
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port 
Displays current port parameters.
Command mode: All

Temporarily Disabling a Port
To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes,
enter the following command at any prompt:
CN 4093# interface port  shutdown

Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port, you do not need to
use a save operation. The port state will revert to its original configuration when
the CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch is reset. See the “Operations
Commands” on page 553 for other operations‐level commands.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

333

Unidirectional Link Detection Configuration
UDLD commands are described in the following table.
Table 179. Port UDLD Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] udld
Enables or disables UDLD on the port.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] udld aggressive
Configures the UDLD mode for the selected port, as follows:


Normal: Detect unidirectional links that have mis‐connected interfaces. The
port is disabled if UDLD determines that the port is mis‐connected. Use the
“no” form to select normal operation.



Aggressive: In addition to the normal mode, the aggressive mode disables
the port if the neighbor stops sending UDLD probes for 7 seconds.

Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  udld
Displays current port UDLD parameters.
Command mode: All

334

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Port OAM Configuration
Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) protocol allows the switch to
detect faults on the physical port links. OAM is described in the IEEE 802.3ah
standard. OAM Discovery commands are described in the following table.
Table 180. Port OAM Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

oam [passive]
Configures the OAM discovery mode, as follows:


Passive: This port allows its peer link to initiate OAM discovery.

If OAM determines that the port is in an anomalous condition, the port is disabled.
Command mode: Interface port
no oam [passive]
Disables OAM discovery on the port.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  oam
Displays current port OAM parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

335

Port ACL Configuration
The following table describes port ACL configuration commands.
Table 181. Port ACL/QoS Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control group <1‐256>
Adds or removes the specified ACL group. You can add multiple ACL groups
to a port.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] access­control list <1‐256>
Adds or removes the specified ACL. You can add multiple ACLs to a port.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128>
Adds or removes the specified IPv6 ACL. You can add multiple ACLs to a
port.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  access­control
Displays current ACL QoS parameters.
Command mode: All

336

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Port WRED Configuration
These commands allow you to configure Weighted Random Early Detection
(WRED) parameters for a selected port. For global WRED configuration, see
“Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration” on page 346.
Table 182. Port WRED Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] random­detect ecn enable
Enables or disables Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN). When ECN is
enabled, the switch marks the ECN bit of the packet (if applicable) instead of
dropping the packet. ECN‐aware devices are notified of the congestion and
those devices can take corrective actions.
Note: ECN functions only on TCP traffic.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] random­detect enable
Enables or disables Random Detection and avoidance.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  random­detect
Displays current Random Detection and avoidance parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

337

Port WRED Transmit Queue Configuration
Use this menu to define WRED thresholds for the port’s transmit queues. Set each
threshold between 1% and 100%. When the average queue size grows beyond the
minimum threshold, packets begin to be dropped. When the average queue size
reaches the maximum threshold, all packets are dropped. The probability of
packet‐drop between the thresholds is defined by the drop rate.
Table 183. Port WRED Transmit Queue Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] random­detect transmit­queue <0‐7> enable
Sets the WRED transmit queue configuration to on or off.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] random­detect transmit­queue <0‐7>
tcp   
Configures the WRED thresholds for TCP traffic.
Note: Use the no form to clear the WRED threshold value.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] random­detect transmit­queue <0‐7>
non­tcp   
Configures the WRED thresholds for non‐TCP traffic.
Note: Use the no form to clear the WRED threshold value.
Command mode: Interface port

338

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Management Port Configuration
You can use these commands to set port parameters for management ports (MGT1
and EXTM). Use these commands to set port parameters for the port link. For
MGT1, the values for speed, duplex, and flow control are fixed, and cannot be
configured.
Table 184. Management Port Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] auto
Enables or disables auto‐negotiation on the port.
Command mode: Interface port
duplex {full|half|auto}
Sets the operating mode. The choices include:
– Full‐duplex
– Half‐duplex
– Auto — for auto negotiation (default)
Command mode: Interface port
flowcontrol {receive|send} {on|off}
Activates or deactivates one type of flow control. The choices include:
– Receive flow control
– Transmit flow control
Command mode: Interface port
shutdown
Disables the port.
Command mode: Interface port
no shutdown
Enables the port.
Command mode: Interface port
speed {10|100|1000|auto}
Sets the link speed. The choices include:
–
–
–
–

10 Mbps
100 Mbps
1000 Mbps
Auto — for auto negotiation

Command mode: Interface port
show interface port 
Displays current port parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

339

Stacking Configuration
A stack is a group of switches that work together as a unified system. The network
views a stack of switches as a single entity, identified by a single network IP
address. The Stacking Configuration menu is used to configure a stack, and to
define the Backup switch.
The Stacking Configuration menu is available only after Stacking is enabled and
the switch is reset. For more information, see “Stacking Boot Options” on page 568.
Table 185. Stacking Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] stack backup 
Defines the backup switch in the stack, based on its configured switch number
(csnum).
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] stack name <1‐63 characters>
Defines a name for the stack.
Command mode: Global configuration
show stack switch­number 
Displays UUID and slot ID for all the configured switches from the stack.
Command mode: All

340

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Stacking Switch Configuration
The following table describes stacking switch configuration commands.
Table 186. Stacking Switch Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

stack switch­number  bay <1‐4>
Binds the selected switch to the stack, based on its bay number in the chassis.
You also must enter the UUID to specify the chassis in which the switch
resides.
Command mode: Global configuration
stack switch­number  bind 
Binds the selected switch to the stack, based on its attached switch number
(asnum).
Command mode: Global configuration
stack switch­number  description <1‐63 characters>
Defines a description for each configured switch number of the stack.
Command mode: Global configuration
stack switch­number  universal­unic­id 
Binds the selected switch to the stack, based on the UUID of the chassis in
which the switch resides. You also must enter the bay number to specify a
switch within the chassis. Following is an example UUID:
uuid 49407441b1a511d7b95df58f4b6f99fe
Command mode: Global configuration
no stack switch­number 
Deletes the selected switch from the stack.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

341

Management Interface Configuration
To provide continuous Management IP reachability in the event of a Master node
failover, an additional floating Management IP address can be set up on the
management IP interface. The floating Management IP address will be used by the
backup switch when taking over management from the failed master node.
To configure the floating Management IP address, use the following commands:
Table 187. Management Interface Options
Command Syntax and Usage

floating ip address  []
Configures the specified IPv4 address as a floating Management IP address.
Command mode: Interface IP
floating ip netmask 
Configures the floating IP subnet mask address.
Command mode: Global configuration
no floating
Removes all floating IP addresses.
Command mode: Interface IP
show interface ip
Displays current IP address floating information.
Command mode: Global configuration

342

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Quality of Service Configuration
Quality of Service (QoS) commands configure the 802.1p priority value and
DiffServ Code Point value of incoming packets. This allows you to differentiate
between various types of traffic, and provide different priority levels.

802.1p Configuration
This feature provides the CN4093 the capability to filter IP packets based on the
802.1p bits in the packetʹs VLAN header. The 802.1p bits specify the priority that
you should give to the packets while forwarding them. The packets with a higher
(non‐zero) priority bits are given forwarding preference over packets with
numerically lower priority bits value.
Table 188. 802.1p Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

qos transmit­queue mapping  
Maps the 802.1p priority of to the Class of Service queue (COSq) priority. Enter
the 802.1p priority value (0‐7), followed by the Class of Service queue that
handles the matching traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
qos transmit­queue weight­cos  
Configures the weight of the selected Class of Service queue (COSq). Enter the
queue number (0‐1), followed by the scheduling weight (0‐15).
Command mode: Global configuration
qos unicast­bandwith <10‐100>
Configures the allocated bandwidth percentage for unicast traffic on the
egress ports. The remaining bandwidth is automatically allocated to multicast
traffic.
The default value is 50.
Note: This applies to all ports.
Command mode: All
show qos transmit­queue
Displays the current 802.1p parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

343

DSCP Configuration
These commands map the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value of incoming packets
to a new value or to an 802.1p priority value.
Table 189. DSCP Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

qos dscp dot1p­mapping  
Maps the DiffServ Code point value to an 802.1p priority value. Enter the
DSCP value, followed by the corresponding 802.1p value.
Command mode: Global configuration
qos dscp dscp­mapping  
Maps the initial DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value to a new value. Enter the
DSCP value (0‐63) of incoming packets, followed by the new value.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] qos dscp re­marking
Enables or disables DSCP re‐marking globally.
Command mode: Global configuration
show qos dscp
Displays the current DSCP parameters.
Command mode: All

344

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Control Plane Protection
To prevent switch instability if the switch is unable to process a high rate of
control‐plane traffic, the switch now supports CoPP. CoPP, allows you to assign
control‐plane traffic protocols to one of 48 queues, and can set bandwidth limits for
each queue.
Table 190. CoPP Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

qos protocol­packet­control packet­queue­map
 
Configures a packet type to associate with each packet queue number. Enter a
queue number, followed by the packet type. You may map multiple packet
types to a single queue. The following packet types are allowed:
– 802.1x (IEEE 802.1x packets)
– application‐cri‐packets (critical packets of various applications, such as
Telnet, SSH)
– arp‐bcast (ARP broadcast packets)
– arp‐ucast (ARP unicast reply packets)
– bgp (BGP packets)
– bpdu (Spanning Tree Protocol packets)
– cisco‐bpdu (Cisco STP packets)
– dest‐unknown (packets with destination not yet learned)
– dhcp (DHCP packets)
– ecp (ECP packets)
– fips (FIPS packets)
– icmp (ICMP packets)
– icmp6 (ICMPv6 packets)
– igmp (IGMP packets)
– ipv4‐miscellaneous (IPv4 packets with IP options and TTL exception)
– ipv6‐nd (IPv6 Neighbor Discovery packets)
– lacp (LACP/Link Aggregation protocol packets)
– lldp (LLDP packets)
– ospf (OSPF packets)
– ospf3 (OSPF3 Packets)
– pim (PIM packets)
– rip (RIP packets)
– system (system protocols, such as tftp, ftp, telnet, ssh)
– udld (UDLD packets)
– vlag (vLAG packets)
– vrrp (VRRP packets)
Command mode: Global configuration
no qos protocol­packet­control packet­queue­map 
Clears the selected packet type from its associated packet queue.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

345

Table 190. CoPP Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

qos protocol­packet­control rate­limit­packet­queue
 <1‐10000>
Configures the number of packets per second allowed for each packet queue.
Command mode: Global configuration
no qos protocol­packet­control rate­limit­packet­queue

Clears the packet rate configured for the selected packet queue.
Command mode: Global configuration
show qos protocol­packet­control information protocol
Displays of mapping of protocol packet types to each packet queue number.
The status indicates whether the protocol is running or not running.
Command mode: All
show qos protocol­packet­control information queue
Displays the packet rate configured for each packet queue.
Command mode: All

Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration
Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) provides congestion avoidance by
pre‐emptively dropping packets before a queue becomes full. CN4093
implementation of WRED defines TCP and non‐TCP traffic profiles on a per‐port,
per COS queue basis. For each port, you can define a transmit‐queue profile with
thresholds that define packet‐drop probability.
These commands allow you to configure global WRED parameters. For port
WRED commands, see “Port WRED Configuration” on page 337.
Table 191. WRED Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] qos random­detect ecn
Enables or disables Explicit Congestion Notification (ECN). When ECN is
enabled, the switch marks the ECN bit of the packet (if applicable) instead of
dropping the packet. ECN‐aware devices are notified of the congestion and
those devices can take corrective actions.
Note: ECN functions only on TCP traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration

346

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 191. WRED Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] qos random­detect enable
Enables or disables Random Detection and avoidance.
Command mode: Global configuration
show qos random­detect
Displays current Random Detection and avoidance parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

347

WRED Transmit Queue Configuration
The following table displays WRED Transmit Queue configuration commands.
Table 192. WRED Transmit Queue Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] qos random­detect transmit­queue <0‐7> enable
Sets the WRED transmit queue configuration to on or off.
Command mode: Global configuration
qos random­detect transmit­queue <0‐7> tcp
  
Configures the WRED thresholds for TCP traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
qos random­detect transmit­queue <0‐7> non­tcp
  
Configures the WRED thresholds for non‐TCP traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
no qos random­detect transmit­queue <0‐7> {tcp|non­tcp}
Clears the specified WRED threshold value.
Command mode: Global configuration

348

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Access Control Configuration
Use these commands to create Access Control Lists and ACL Groups. ACLs define
matching criteria used for IP filtering and Quality of Service functions.
For information about assigning ACLs to ports, see “Port ACL Configuration” on
page 336.
Table 193. General ACL Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control group <1‐256>
Configures an ACL Group. To view command options, see page 366.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256>
Configures an Access Control List. To view command options, see page 350.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128>
Configures an Access Control List. To view command options, see page 355.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control
Displays the current ACL parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

349

Access Control List Configuration
These commands allow you to define filtering criteria for each Access Control List
(ACL).
Table 194. ACL Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control list <1‐256> action {permit|deny|
|set­priority <0‐7>}
Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL definitions. You can
choose to permit (pass) or deny (drop) packets, or set the 802.1p priority
level (0‐7).
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> egress­port
port 
Configures the ACL to function on egress packets.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> statistics
Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control List.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list <1‐256>
Resets the ACL parameters to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐256>
Displays the current ACL parameters.
Command mode: All
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128>
Configures an IPv6 Access Control List. To view command options, see
page 355.
Command mode: Global configuration

350

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Ethernet Filtering Configuration
These commands allow you to define Ethernet matching criteria for an ACL.
Table 195. Ethernet Filtering Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control list <1‐256> ethernet
destination­mac­address  []
Defines the destination MAC address for this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> ethernet
source­mac­address  []
Defines the source MAC address for this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> ethernet ethernet­type
{any|arp|ip|ipv6|mpls|rarp|}
Defines the Ethernet type for this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> ethernet vlan 
[]
Defines a VLAN number and mask for this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> ethernet priority <0‐7>
Defines the Ethernet priority value for the ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list <1‐256> ethernet
Resets Ethernet parameters for the ACL to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list <1‐256> ethernet
Removes Ethernet parameters for the ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐256> ethernet
Displays the current Ethernet parameters for the ACL.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

351

IPv4 Filtering Configuration
These commands allow you to define IPv4 matching criteria for an ACL.
Table 196. IP version 4 Filtering Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control list <1‐256> ipv4 destination­ip­address
 []
Defines a destination IP address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this
destination IP address will match this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> ipv4 source­ip­address
 []
Defines a source IP address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this source IP
address will match this ACL. Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> ipv4 protocol <0‐255>
Defines an IP protocol for the ACL. If defined, traffic from the specified
protocol matches this filter. Specify the protocol number. Listed below are
some of the well‐known protocols.
Number

Name

1
2
6
17
89
112

icmp
igmp
tcp
udp
ospf
vrrp

Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> ipv4 type­of­service <0‐255>
Defines a Type of Service (ToS) value for the ACL. For more information on
ToS, refer to RFC 1340 and 1349.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list <1‐256> ipv4
Resets the IPv4 parameters for the ACL to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐256> ipv4
Displays the current IPv4 parameters.
Command mode: All

352

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration
These commands allow you to define TCP/UDP matching criteria for an ACL.
Table 197. TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control list <1‐256> tcp­udp source­port
<1‐65535> []
Defines a source port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or
UDP source port will match this ACL. Specify the port number. Listed below
are some of the well‐known ports:
Number

Name

20
21
22
23
25
37
42
43
53
69
70
79
80

ftp­data
ftp
ssh
telnet
smtp
time
name
whois
domain
tftp
gopher
finger
http

Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> tcp­udp destination­port
<1‐65535> []
Defines a destination port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified
TCP or UDP destination port will match this ACL. Specify the port number,
just as with source­port above.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> tcp­udp flags 
[]
Defines a TCP/UDP flag for the ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list <1‐256> tcp­udp
Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐256> tcp­udp
Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

353

Packet Format Filtering Configuration
These commands allow you to define Packet Format matching criteria for an ACL.
Table 198. Packet Format Filtering Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control list <1‐256> packet­format ethernet
{ethertype2|llc|snap}
Defines the Ethernet format for the ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> packet­format ip {ipv4|ipv6}
Defines the IP format for the ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> packet­format tagging
{any|none|tagged}
Defines the tagging format for the ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list <1‐256> packet­format
Resets Packet Format parameters for the ACL to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐256> packet­format
Displays the current Packet Format parameters for the ACL.
Command mode: All

354

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

ACL IPv6 Configuration
These commands allow you to define filtering criteria for each IPv6 Access Control
List (ACL).
Table 199. IPv6 ACL Options
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control list6 <1‐128> action {permit|deny|
|set­priority <0‐7>}
Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL definitions. You can
choose to permit (pass) or deny (drop) packets, or set the 802.1p priority
level (0‐7).
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> egress­port port

Configures the ACL to function on egress packets.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> statistics
Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control List.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list6 <1‐128>
Resets the ACL parameters to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list6 <1‐128>
Displays the current ACL parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

355

IPv6 Filtering Configuration
These commands allow you to define IPv6 matching criteria for an ACL.
Table 200. IP version 6 Filtering Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> ipv6 destination­address
 []
Defines a destination IPv6 address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this
destination address will match this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> ipv6 source­address
 []
Defines a source IPv6 address for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this source
address will match this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> ipv6 flow­label <0‐1048575>
Defines the flow label for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this flow label will
match this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> ipv6 next­header <0‐255>
Defines the next header value for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this next
header value will match this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> ipv6 traffic­class <0‐255>
Defines the traffic class for the ACL. If defined, traffic with this traffic class will
match this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list6 <1‐128> ipv6
Resets the IPv6 parameters for the ACL to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list6 <1‐128> ipv6
Displays the current IPv6 parameters.
Command mode: All

356

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IPv6 TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration
These commands allows you to define TCP/UDP matching criteria for an ACL.
Table 201. IPv6 ACL TCP/UDP Filtering Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> tcp­udp source­port <1‐65535>
[]
Defines a source port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified TCP or
UDP source port will match this ACL. Specify the port number. Listed here are
some of the well‐known ports:
Number

Name

20
21
22
23
25
37
42
43
53
69
70
79
80

ftp­data
ftp
ssh
telnet
smtp
time
name
whois
domain
tftp
gopher
finger
http

Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> tcp­udp destination­port
<1‐65535> []
Defines a destination port for the ACL. If defined, traffic with the specified
TCP or UDP destination port will match this ACL. Specify the port number,
just as with source­port above.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> tcp­udp flags 
[]
Defines a TCP/UDP flag for the ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list6 <1‐128> tcp­udp
Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list6 <1‐128> tcp­udp
Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

357

IPv6 Metering Configuration
These commands define the Access Control profile for the selected ACL.
Table 202. IPv6 Metering Options
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control list6 <1‐128> meter action {drop|pass}
Configures the ACL Meter to either drop or pass out‐of‐profile traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
access­control list6 <1‐128> meter committed­rate <64‐40000000>
Configures the committed rate, in kilobits per second. The committed rate
must be a multiple of 64.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list6 <1‐128> meter enable
Enables or disables ACL Metering.
Command mode: Global configuration
access­control list6 <1‐128> meter maximum­burst­size <32‐4096>
Configures the maximum burst size, in kilobits. Enter one of the following
values for mbsize: 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list6 <1‐128> meter
Sets the ACL meter configuration to its default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list6 <1‐128> meter
Deletes the selected ACL meter.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list6 <1‐128> meter
Displays current ACL Metering parameters.
Command mode: All

358

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Management ACL Filtering Configuration
These commands allow you to define matching criteria for a Management ACL.
Table 203. Management ACL Filtering Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control macl <1‐128> ipv4
Enables or disables the Management ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control macl <1‐128> ipv4 
[
]
Sets IPv4 filtering to filter on the destination IP address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control macl <1‐128> ipv4 
[
]
Sets IPv4 filtering to filter on the source IP address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control macl <1‐128> ipv4 protocol <0‐255>
Defines an IP protocol for the MACL. If defined, traffic from the specified
protocol matches this filter. Specify the protocol number. Listed here are some
of the well‐known protocols.
Number

Name

1
2
6
17
89
112

icmp
igmp
tcp
udp
ospf
vrrp

Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list <1‐128> ipv4
Resets the IPv4 parameters for the ACL to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐128> packet­format
Displays the current Packet Format parameters for the ACL.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

359

TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration
The following commands allow you to define TCP/UDP matching criteria for a
Management ACL.
Table 204. Management ACL TCP/UDP Filtering Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control macl <1‐128> tcp­udp source­port <1‐65535>
[]
Defines a source port for the Management ACL. If defined, traffic with the
specified TCP or UDP source port will match this Management ACL. Specify
the port number. Listed here are some of the well‐known ports:
Number

Name

20
21
22
23
25
37
42
43
53
69
70
79
80

ftp­data
ftp
ssh
telnet
smtp
time
name
whois
domain
tftp
gopher
finger
http

Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control macl <1‐128> tcp­udp destination­port
<1‐65535> []
Defines a destination port for the Management ACL. If defined, traffic with the
specified TCP or UDP destination port will match this Management ACL.
Specify the port number, just as with source­port.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list <1‐256> tcp­udp
Resets the TCP/UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐256> tcp­udp
Displays the current TCP/UDP Filtering parameters.
Command mode: All

360

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

VMAP Configuration
A VLAN Map is an Access Control List (ACL) that can be assigned to a VLAN or a
VM group instead of a port. In a virtualized environment where Virtual Machines
move between physical servers, VLAN Maps allow you to create traffic filtering
and metering policies associated with a VM’s VLAN
For more information about VLAN Map configuration commands, see “Access
Control List Configuration” on page 350.
For more information about assigning VLAN Maps to a VLAN, see “VLAN
Configuration” on page 417.
For more information about assigning VLAN Maps to a VM group, see “VM
Group Configuration” on page 534.
Table 205 lists the general VMAP configuration commands.
Table 205. VMAP Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control vmap <1‐128> action {permit|deny|
|set­priority <0‐7>}
Configures a filter action for packets that match the VMAP definitions. You
can choose to permit (pass) or deny (drop) packets, or set the 802.1p priority
level (0‐7).
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> egress­port 
Configures the VMAP to function on egress packets.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> ethernet
destination­mac­address  
Enables or disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on destination
MAC.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> ethernet source­mac­address
 
Enables or disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on source
MAC.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

361

Table 205. VMAP Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> ethernet ethernet­type
{<0x600‐0xFFF>|any|arp|rarp|ip|ipv6|mpls}
Enables or disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on the
encapsulated protocol:


<0x600­0xFFF> filters Ethernet frames with the specified EtherType



any filters all frames



arp filters Address Resolution Protocol frames



rarp filters Reverse Address Resolution Protocol frames



ip filters Internet Protocol version 4 frames



ipv6 filters Internet Protocol version 6 frames



mpls filters Multiprotocol Label Switching frames

Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> ethernet priority <0‐7>
Enables or disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on the IEEE
802.1Q priority code point value.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> ethernet vlan <1‐4094>
Enables or disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on VLAN ID.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> ipv4 destination­ip­address
 
Enables or disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on destination
IP address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> ipv4 source­ip­address
 
Enables or disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on source IP
address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> ipv4 protocol <0‐255>
Enables or disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on protocol.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> ipv4 type­of­service <0‐255>
Enables or disables filtering of VMAP statistics collection based on type of
service.
Command mode: Global configuration

362

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 205. VMAP Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control vmap <1‐128> meter action {drop|pass}
Sets ACL port metering to drop or pass out‐of‐profile traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
access­control vmap <1‐128> meter committed­rate <64‐10000000>
Sets the ACL port metering control rate in kilobits per second.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> meter enable
Enables or disables ACL port metering.
Command mode: All except User EXEC
access­control vmap <1‐128> meter maximum­burst­size <32‐4096>
Sets the ACL port metering maximum burst size in kilobytes. The following
eight values are allowed:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

32
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096

Command mode: Global configuration
access­control vmap <1‐128> mirror port 
Sets the specified port as the mirror target.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control vmap <1‐128> mirror
Turns off ACL mirroring.
Command mode: Global configuration
access­control vmap <1‐128> packet­format ethernet
{ethernet­type2|llc|snap}
Sets to filter the specified ethernet packet format type.
Command mode: Global configuration
access­control vmap <1‐128> packet­format ip {ipv4|ipv6}
Sets to filter the specified IP packet format type.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

363

Table 205. VMAP Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control vmap <1‐128> packet­format tagging
{any|none|tagged}
Sets filtering based on packet tagging. The options are:
– any: Filter tagged & untagged packets
– none: Filter only untagged packets
– tagged: Filter only tagged packets
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control vmap <1‐128> packet­format
{ethernet|ip|tagging}
Disables filtering based on the specified packet format.
Command mode: Global configuration
access­control vmap <1‐128> re­mark dot1p <0‐7>
Sets the ACL re‐mark configuration user update priority.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control vmap <1‐128> re­mark dot1p
Disables the use of dot1p for in‐profile traffic ACL re‐mark configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
access­control vmap <1‐128> re­mark {in­profile|out­profile}
dscp <0‐63>
Sets the ACL re‐mark configuration user update priority.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control vmap <1‐128> re­mark {in­profile|
|out­profile}
Removes all re‐mark in‐profile or out‐profile settings.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> re­mark use­tos­precedence
Enables or disables the use of the TOS precedence for in‐profile traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control vmap <1‐128> statistics
Enables or disables the statistics collection for the VMAP.
Command mode: Global configuration
access­control vmap <1‐128> tcp­udp {source­port|
|destination­port} <1‐65535> []
Sets the TCP/UDP filtering source port or destination port and port mask for
this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration

364

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 205. VMAP Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control vmap <1‐128> tcp­udp flags 
[]
Sets the TCP flags for this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control vmap <1‐128> tcp­udp
Removes TCP/UDP filtering for this ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control vmap <1‐128>
Resets the VMAP parameters to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control vmap <1‐128>
Displays the current VMAP parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

365

ACL Group Configuration
These commands allow you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL group.
Once you create an ACL group, you can assign the ACL group to one or more
ports.
Table 206. ACL Group Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] access­control group <1‐256> list <1‐256>
Adds or removes the selected ACL to/from the ACL group.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control group <1‐256> list6 <1‐128>
Adds or removes the selected IPv6 ACL to/from the ACL group.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control group <1‐256>
Displays the current ACL group parameters.
Command mode: All

366

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

ACL Metering Configuration
These commands define the Access Control profile for the selected ACL or ACL
Group.
Table 207. ACL Metering Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control list <1‐256> meter action {drop|pass}
Configures the ACL meter to either drop or pass out‐of‐profile traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
access­control list <1‐256> meter committed­rate <64‐10000000>
Configures the committed rate, in Kilobits per second. The committed rate
must be a multiple of 64.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> meter enable
Enables or disables ACL Metering.
Command mode: Global configuration
access­control list <1‐256> meter maximum­burst­size <32‐4096>
Configures the maximum burst size, in Kilobits. Enter one of the following
values for mbsize: 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2048, 4096.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list <1‐256> meter
Sets the ACL meter configuration to its default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list <1‐256> meter
Deletes the selected ACL meter.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐256> meter
Displays current ACL Metering parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

367

ACL Re-Mark Configuration
You can choose to re‐mark IP header data for the selected ACL. You can configure
different re‐mark values, based on whether packets fall within the ACL metering
profile, or out of the ACL metering profile.
Table 208. ACL Re‐Marking Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control list <1‐256> re­mark dot1p <0‐7>
Defines 802.1p value. The value is the priority bits information in the packet
structure.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list <1‐256> re­mark dot1p
Disables use of 802.1p value for re‐marked packets.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­control list <1‐256> re­mark use­tos­precedence
Enable or disable mapping of TOS (Type of Service) priority to 802.1p priority
for In‐Profile packets. When enabled, the TOS value is used to set the 802.1p
value.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list <1‐256> re­mark
Sets the ACL Re‐mark configuration to its default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐256> re­mark
Displays current Re‐mark parameters.
Command mode: All

368

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Re-Marking In-Profile Configuration
The following table displays Re‐marking In‐profile configuration commands.
Table 209. ACL Re‐Mark In‐Profile Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control list <1‐256> re­mark in­profile dscp <0‐63>
Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of in‐profile packets to the selected value.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list <1‐256> re­mark in­profile dscp
Disables use of DSCP value for in‐profile traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list <1‐256> re­mark in­profile
Removes all re‐mark in‐profile settings.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐256> re­mark
Displays current re‐mark parameters.
Command mode: All

Re-Marking Out-Profile Configuration
The following table displays Re‐marking Out‐profile configuration commands.
Table 210. ACL Re‐Mark Out‐of‐Profile Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control list <1‐256> re­mark out­profile dscp <0‐63>
Sets the DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) of out‐of‐profile packets to the selected
value. The switch sets the DSCP value on Out‐of‐Profile packets.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list <1‐256> re­mark out­profile
Removes all re‐mark out‐profile settings.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list <1‐256> re­mark
Displays current re‐mark parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

369

IPv6 Re-Marking Configuration
You can choose to re‐mark IPv6 header data for the selected ACL. You can
configure different re‐mark values, based on whether packets fall within or outside
the ACL metering profile.
Table 211. IPv6 General Re‐Mark Options
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark dot1p <0‐7>
Re‐marks the 802.1p value. The value is the priority bits information in the
packet structure.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark dot1p
Disables use of 802.1p value for re‐marked packets.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] no access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark
use­tos­precedence
Enables or disables mapping of TOS (Type of Service) priority to 802.1p
priority for in‐profile packets. When enabled, the TOS value is used to set the
802.1p value.
Command mode: Global configuration
default access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark
Sets the ACL re‐mark parameters to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark
Displays current re‐mark parameters.
Command mode: All

370

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IPv6 Re-Marking In-Profile Configuration
The following table displays IPv6 Re‐marking In‐profile configuration commands.
Table 212. IPv6 Re‐Mark In‐Profile Options
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark in­profile dscp <0‐63>
Re‐marks the DSCP value for in‐profile traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark in­profile dscp
Disables the use of DSCP for the in‐profile traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark in­profile
Removes all re‐mark in‐profile settings.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark
Displays current re‐mark parameters.
Command mode: All

IPv6 Re-Marking Out-Profile Configuration
The following table displays IPv6 Re‐marking Out‐profile configuration
commands.
Table 213. IPv6 Re‐Mark Out‐of‐Profile Options
Command Syntax and Usage

access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark out­profile dscp <0‐63>
Re‐marks the DSCP value on out‐of‐profile packets for the ACL.
Command mode: Global configuration
no access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark out­profile
Removes all re‐marking out‐of‐profile settings.
Command mode: Global configuration
show access­control list6 <1‐128> re­mark
Displays current re‐mark parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

371

Port Mirroring
Port mirroring is disabled by default. For more information about port mirroring
on the CN4093, see “Appendix A: Troubleshooting” in the Lenovo N/OS 8.2
Application Guide.
Note: Traffic on VLAN 4095 is not mirrored to the external ports.
Port Mirroring commands are used to configure, enable, and disable the monitor
port. When enabled, network packets being sent and/or received on a target port
are duplicated and sent to a monitor port. By attaching a network analyzer to the
monitor port, you can collect detailed information about your network
performance and usage.
Table 214. Port Mirroring Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] port­mirroring enable
Enables or disables port mirroring.
Command mode: Global configuration
show port­mirroring
Displays current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports.
Command mode: All

372

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Port Mirroring Configuration
The following table displays Port Mirror configuration commands.
Table 215. Port‐Based Port Mirroring Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

port­mirroring monitor­port  mirroring­port
 {in|out|both}
Adds the port to be mirrored. This command also allows you to enter the
direction of the traffic. It is necessary to specify the direction because:
If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored
direction is ingress or both (ingress and egress), the frame is sent to the
monitoring port.
If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored
direction is egress or both, the frame is sent to the monitoring port.
Note: Up to two monitor ports with 2‐way mirroring or four monitor ports
with 1‐way mirroring are supported in stand‐alone mode. In stacking mode,
the switch supports one monitor port with 2‐way mirroring or two monitor
ports with 1‐way mirroring.
Command mode: Global configuration
no port­mirroring monitor­port 
mirroring­port 
Removes the mirrored port.
Command mode: Global configuration
show port­mirroring
Displays the current settings of the monitoring port.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

373

Layer 2 Configuration
The following table describes basic Layer 2 Configuration commands. The
following sections provide more detailed information and commands.
Table 216. Layer 2 Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

spanning­tree mode disable
Globally turns Spanning Tree off (selects Spanning‐Tree mode “disable”).
All ports are placed into forwarding state. Any BPDU’s received are flooded.
BPDU Guard is not affected by this command.
To enable Spanning‐Tree, select another Spanning‐Tree mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] spanning­tree stg­auto
Enables or disables VLAN Automatic STG Assignment (VASA). When
enabled, each time a new VLAN is configured, the switch will automatically
assign the new VLAN its own STG. Conversely, when a VLAN is deleted, if its
STG is not associated with any other VLAN, the STG is returned to the
available pool.
Note: VASA applies only to PVRST mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] spanning­tree pvst­compatibility
Enables or disables VLAN tagging of Spanning Tree BPDUs.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] spanning­tree loopguard
Enables or disables Spanning Tree Loop Guard.
Command mode: Global configuration
vlan 
Enter VLAN configuration mode. To view command options, see page 417.
Command mode: Global configuration
show layer2
Displays current Layer 2 parameters.
Command mode: All

374

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

802.1X Configuration
These commands allow you to configure the CN4093 as an IEEE 802.1X
Authenticator, to provide port‐based network access control.
Table 217. 802.1X Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] dot1x enable
Globally enables or disables 802.1X.
Command mode: Global configuration
show dot1x
Displays current 802.1X parameters.
Command mode: All

802.1X Global Configuration
The global 802.1X commands allow you to configure parameters that affect all
ports in the CN4093.
Table 218. 802.1X Global Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

dot1x max­request <1‐10>
Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an
EAP‐Request packet to the supplicant (client).
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Global configuration
dot1x mode [force­unauthorized|auto|force­authorized]
Sets the type of access control for all ports:


force­unauthorized ‐ the port is unauthorized unconditionally.



auto ‐ the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the
RADIUS server.



force­authorized ‐ the port is authorized unconditionally, allowing all
traffic.

The default value is force­authorized.
Command mode: Global configuration
dot1x quiet­time <0‐65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before transmitting an
EAP‐Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication
failure in the previous round of authentication.
The default value is 60.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

375

Table 218. 802.1X Global Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] dot1x re­authenticate
Sets the re‐authentication status to on or off.
The default value is off.
Command mode: Global configuration
dot1x re­authentication­interval <1‐604800>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before re‐authenticating a
supplicant (client) when periodic re‐authentication is enabled.
The default value is 3600.
Command mode: Global configuration
dot1x server­timeout <1‐65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for a response from the
RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout.
The default value is 30.
The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access‐Request
packet containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP‐Response packet is
determined by the current setting of
radius­server timeout  (default is 3).
Command mode: Global configuration
dot1x supplicant­timeout <1‐65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP‐Response packet
from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting the EAP‐Request packet
from the authentication server.
The default value is 30.
Command mode: Global configuration
dot1x transmit­interval <1‐65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP‐Response/Identity
frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an
EAP‐Request/Identity frame.
The default value is 30.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] dot1x vlan­assign
Sets the dynamic VLAN assignment status to on or off.
The default value is off.
Command mode: Global configuration

376

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 218. 802.1X Global Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

default dot1x
Resets the global 802.1X parameters to their default values.
Command mode: Global configuration
show dot1x
Displays current global 802.1X parameters.
Command mode: All

802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration
The 802.1X Guest VLAN commands allow you to configure a Guest VLAN for
unauthenticated ports. The Guest VLAN provides limited access to switch
functions.
Table 219. 802.1X Guest VLAN Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] dot1x guest­vlan enable
Enables or disables the 802.1X Guest VLAN.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] dot1x guest­vlan vlan 
Configures the Guest VLAN number.
Command mode: Global configuration
show dot1x
Displays current 802.1X parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

377

802.1X Port Configuration
The 802.1X port commands allows you to configure parameters that affect the
selected port in the CN4093. These settings override the global 802.1X parameters.
Table 220. 802.1X Port Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

dot1x apply­global
Applies current global 802.1X configuration parameters to the port.
Command mode: Interface port
dot1x max­request <1‐10>
Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an
EAP‐Request packet to the supplicant (client).
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Interface port
dot1x mode {force­unauthorized|auto|force­authorized}
Sets the type of access control for the port:


force­unauthorized ‐ the port is unauthorized unconditionally.



auto ‐ the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the
RADIUS server.



force­authorized ‐ the port is authorized unconditionally, allowing all
traffic.

The default value is force­authorized.
Command mode: Interface port
dot1x quiet­time <0‐65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before transmitting an
EAP‐Request/ Identity frame to the supplicant (client) after an authentication
failure in the previous round of authentication.
The default value is 60.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] dot1x re­authenticate
Sets the re‐authentication status to on or off.
The default value is off.
Command mode: Interface port
dot1x re­authentication­interval <1‐604800>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits before re‐authenticating a
supplicant (client) when periodic re‐authentication is enabled.
The default value is 3600.
Command mode: Interface port

378

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 220. 802.1X Port Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

dot1x server­timeout <1‐65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for a response from the
RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout.
The default value is 30.
The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access‐Request
packet containing the supplicant’s (client’s) EAP‐Response packet is
determined by the current setting of the radius­server timeout
command.
Command mode: Interface port
dot1x supplicant­timeout <1‐65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP‐Response packet
from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting the EAP‐Request packet
from the authentication server.
The default value is 30.
Command mode: Interface port
dot1x transmit­interval <1‐65535>
Sets the time, in seconds, the authenticator waits for an EAP‐Response/Identity
frame from the supplicant (client) before retransmitting an
EAP‐Request/Identity frame.
The default value is 30.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] dot1x vlan­assign
Sets the dynamic VLAN assignment status to on or off.
The default value is off.
Command mode: Interface port
default dot1x
Resets the 802.1X port parameters to their default values.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  dot1x
Displays current 802.1X port parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

379

Spanning Tree Configuration
Lenovo Networking OS supports the IEEE 802.1D (2004) Rapid Spanning Tree
Protocol (RSTP), the IEEE 802.1Q (2003) Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP),
and Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (PVRST+). STP is used to prevent
loops in the network topology. Up to 128 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured
on the switch (STG 128 is reserved for management).
Note: When VRRP is used for active/active redundancy, STG must be enabled.
Table 221. Spanning Tree Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

spanning­tree mode [disable|mst|pvrst|rstp]
Selects and enables Multiple Spanning Tree mode (mst), Per VLAN Rapid
Spanning Tree mode (pvrst), or Rapid Spanning Tree mode (rstp).
The default mode is PVRST+.
When you select spanning­tree mode disable, the switch globally turns
Spanning Tree off. All ports are placed into forwarding state. Any BPDU’s
received are flooded. BPDU Guard is not affected by this command.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] spanning­tree pvst­compatibility
Enables or disables VLAN tagging of Spanning Tree BPDUs.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] spanning­tree stg­auto
Enables or disables VLAN Automatic STG Assignment (VASA). When
enabled, each time a new VLAN is configured, the switch will automatically
assign the new VLAN its own STG. Conversely, when a VLAN is deleted, if its
STG is not associated with any other VLAN, the STG is returned to the
available pool.
Note: When using VASA, a maximum number of 128 automatically assigned
STGs is supported.
Note: VASA applies only to PVRST mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
spanning­tree guard loop
Enables STP loop guard. STP loop guard prevents the port from forwarding
traffic if no BPDUs are received. The port is placed into a loop‐inconsistent
blocking state until a BPDU is received.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
spanning­tree guard root
Enables STP root guard. STP root guard enforces the position of the root
bridge. If the bridge receives a superior BPDU, the port is placed into a
root‐inconsistent state (listening).
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel

380

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 221. Spanning Tree Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

spanning­tree guard none
Disables STP loop guard and root guard.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
no spanning­tree guard
Sets the Spanning Tree guard parameters to their default values.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
[no] spanning­tree link­type {p2p|shared|auto}
Defines the type of link connected to the port, as follows:
– auto: Configures the port to detect the link type, and automatically match
its settings.
– p2p: Configures the port for Point‐To‐Point protocol.
– shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a
hub).
The default link type is auto.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
[no] spanning­tree portfast
Enables or disables this port as portfast or edge port. An edge port is not
connected to a bridge, and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is
up. Configure server ports as edge ports (enabled).
Note: After you configure the port as an edge port, you must disable the port
and then re‐enable the port for the change to take effect.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
[no] spanning­tree pvst­protection
Enables or disables PVST Protection on the selected port. If the port receives
any PVST+/PVRST+ BPDUs, it is error disabled.
The default setting for this feature is disabled (no protection).
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

381

Table 221. Spanning Tree Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

show spanning­tree
Displays Spanning Tree information, including the status (on or off), Spanning
Tree mode (RSTP, PVRST, or MSTP), and VLAN membership.
In addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled, you can view the following
STG bridge information:
–
–
–
–
–

Priority
Hello interval
Maximum age value
Forwarding delay
Aging time

You can also see the following port‐specific STG information:
– Port alias and priority
– Cost
– State
For details, see page 74.
Command mode: All
show spanning­tree blockedports
Lists the ports blocked by each STP instance.
Command mode: All
show spanning­tree root
Displays the Spanning Tree configuration on the root bridge for each STP
instance. For details, see page 82.
Command mode: All
show spanning­tree [vlan ] bridge
Displays Spanning Tree bridge information. For details, see page 81.
Command mode: All

382

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

MSTP Configuration
Up to 32 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured in MSTP mode. MSTP is turned
off by default and the default STP mode is PVRST+.
Note: When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned on, VLAN 4095 is moved from
Spanning Tree Group 128 to the Common Internal Spanning Tree (CIST). When
Multiple Spanning Tree is turned off, VLAN 4095 is moved back to Spanning Tree
Group 128.
Table 222. Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] spanning­tree mst <0‐32> enable
Enables or disables the specified MSTP instance.
Command mode: Global configuration
spanning­tree mst forward­time <4‐30>
Configures the forward delay time in seconds. The forward delay parameter
specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from
the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding
state.
The default value is 15.
Command mode: Global configuration
spanning­tree mst max­age <6‐40>
Configures the maximum age interval in seconds. The maximum age
parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a
configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures the MSTP
network.
The default value is 20.
Command mode: Global configuration
spanning­tree mst <0‐32> priority <0‐65535>
Configures the CIST bridge priority for the specified MSTP instance. The bridge
priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the MSTP root
bridge. To make this switch the root bridge, configure the bridge priority lower
than all other switches and bridges on your network. The lower the value, the
higher the bridge priority. The range is 0 to 65535, in steps of 4096 (0, 4096,
8192...).
The default value is 61440.
Command mode: Global configuration
spanning­tree mst max­hops <4‐60>
Configures the maximum number of bridge hops a packet may traverse before
it is dropped.
The default value is 20.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

383

Table 222. Multiple Spanning Tree Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

default spanning­tree mst <0‐32>
Restores the Spanning Tree instance to its default configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
no spanning­tree mst configuration
Returns the MST region to its default values: no VLAN is mapped to any MST
instance. Revision number is reset to 0.
Command mode: Global configuration
spanning­tree mst configuration
Enables MSTP configuration mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] instance <0‐32> vlan 
Maps or removes the specified VLANs to the Spanning Tree instance. If a VLAN
does not exist, it will not be created automatically.
Command mode: MST configuration
[no] name <1‐32 characters>
Configures a name for the MSTP region. All devices within an MSTP region
must have the same region name.
Command mode: MST configuration
[no] revision <0‐65535>
Configures a revision number for the MSTP region. The revision is used as a
numerical identifier for the region. All devices within an MSTP region must
have the same revision number.
Command mode: MST configuration
show spanning­tree mst <0‐32> [information]
Displays the current MSTP configuration for the specified instance.
Command mode: All
show spanning­tree mst configuration
Displays the current MSTP settings.
Command mode: All

384

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

MSTP Port Configuration
MSTP port parameters are used to modify MSTP operation on an individual port
basis. MSTP parameters do not affect operation of RSTP/PVRST.
Table 223. MSTP Port Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

spanning­tree mst <0‐32> cost <0‐200000000>
Configures the port path cost for the specified MSTP instance. The port path
cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment. Port path cost
is based on the port speed, and is calculated as follows:


1Gbps = 20000



10Gbps = 2000

The default value of 0 indicates that the default path cost will be computed for
an auto negotiated link speed.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
[no] spanning­tree mst <0‐32> enable
Enables or disables the specified MSTP instance on the port.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
spanning­tree mst hello­time <1‐10>
Configures the port Hello time.The Hello time specifies how often the root
bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge
that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge Hello value. The range is 1 to 10
seconds.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel
spanning­tree mst <0‐32> port­priority <0‐240>
Configures the port priority for the specified MSTP instance. The port priority
helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port. In a network
topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port
with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment.
The range is 0 to 240, in steps of 16 (0, 16, 32...).
The default value is 128.
Command mode: Interface port/Interface portchannel

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

385

Table 223. MSTP Port Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] spanning­tree pvst­protection
Configures PVST Protection on the selected port. If the port receives any
PVST+/PVRST+ BPDUs, it error disabled. PVST Protection works only in
MSTP mode.
The default setting is disabled.
Note: Not available in stacking.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  spanning­tree mstp cist
Displays the current CIST port configuration.
Command mode: All

RSTP/PVRST Configuration
Table 224 describes the commands used to configure the Rapid Spanning Tree
(RSTP) and Per VLAN Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (PVRST+) protocols.
Table 224. RSTP/PVRST Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] spanning­tree stp  enable
Enables or disables Spanning Tree instance.
The default settings is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
spanning­tree stp  vlan 
Associates a VLAN with a Spanning Tree Group and requires a VLAN ID as a
parameter. If the VLAN does not exist, it will be created automatically, but it
will be disabled by default.
Command mode: Global configuration
no spanning­tree stp  vlan 
Breaks the association between a VLAN and a Spanning Tree Group and
requires a VLAN ID as a parameter.
Command mode: Global configuration
no spanning­tree stp  vlan all
Removes all VLANs from a Spanning Tree Group.
Command mode: Global configuration

386

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 224. RSTP/PVRST Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

default spanning­tree stp 
Restores a Spanning Tree instance to its default configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
show spanning­tree stp  [information]
Displays current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters for the specified
Spanning Tree Group. See page 79 for details about the information
parameter.
Command mode: All

Bridge RSTP/PVRST Configuration
Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STG operation of the switch.
STG bridge parameters include:
Bridge priority
Bridge hello time
 Bridge maximum age
 Forwarding delay



Table 225. Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

spanning­tree stp  bridge forward­delay <4‐30>
Configures the bridge forward delay parameter. The forward delay parameter
specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes
from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the
forwarding state. The range is 4 to 30 seconds.
The default value is 15.
Note: This command does not apply to MSTP.
Command mode: Global configuration
spanning­tree stp  bridge hello­time <1‐10>
Configures the bridge Hello time.The Hello time specifies how often the root
bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit (BPDU). Any bridge
that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge Hello value. The range is 1 to 10
seconds.
The default value is 2.
Note: This command does not apply to MSTP.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

387

Table 225. Bridge Spanning Tree Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

spanning­tree stp  bridge maximum­age <6‐40>
Configures the bridge maximum age. The maximum age parameter specifies
the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge
protocol data unit before it re configures the STG network. The range is 6 to 40
seconds.
The default value is 20.
Note: This command does not apply to MSTP.
Command mode: Global configuration
spanning­tree stp  bridge priority <0‐65535>
Configures the bridge priority. The bridge priority parameter controls which
bridge on the network is the STG root bridge. To make this switch the root
bridge, configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges
on your network. The lower the value, the higher the bridge priority. The range
is 0 to 65535, in steps of 4096 (0, 4096, 8192...).
The default value is 61440.
Command mode: Global configuration
show spanning­tree [vlan ] bridge
Displays the current Spanning Tree parameters either globally or for a specific
VLAN. See page 81 for sample output.
Command mode: All
When configuring STG bridge parameters, the following formulas must be used:

388



2*(fwd‐1) > mxage



2*(hello+1) < mxage

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

RSTP/PVRST Port Configuration
By default, Spanning Tree is turned off for management ports, and turned on for
data ports. STG port parameters include:



Port priority
Port path cost

Table 226. Spanning Tree Port Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] spanning­tree stp  enable
Enables or disables STG on the port.
Command mode: Interface port
spanning­tree stp link­type {auto|p2p|shared}
Defines the type of link connected to the port, as follows:


auto: Configures the port to detect the link type, and automatically match
its settings.



p2p: Configures the port for Point‐To‐Point protocol.



shared: Configures the port to connect to a shared medium (usually a
hub).

Command mode: Interface port
spanning­tree stp  path­cost <1‐200000000, 0 for default)>
Configures the port path cost. The port path cost is used to help determine the
designated port for a segment. Port path cost is based on the port speed, and is
calculated as follows:


1Gbps = 20000



10Gbps = 2000

The default value of 0 indicates that the default path cost will be computed for
an auto negotiated link speed.
Command mode: Interface port
spanning­tree stp  priority <0‐240>
Configures the port priority. The port priority helps determine which bridge
port becomes the designated port. In a network topology that has multiple
bridge ports connected to a single segment, the port with the lowest port
priority becomes the designated port for the segment. The range is 0 to 240, in
steps of 16 (0, 16, 32...).
The default value is 128.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  spanning­tree
stp 
Displays the current STG port parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

389

Forwarding Database Configuration
Use the following commands to configure the Forwarding Database (FDB).
Table 227. FDB Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

mac­address­table aging <0‐65535>
Configures the aging value for FDB entries, in seconds.
The default value is 300.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] mac­address­table mac­notification
Enables or disables MAC Address Notification. With MAC Address
Notification enabled, the switch generates a syslog message when a MAC
address is added or removed from the MAC address table.
Note: This is applicable for internal ports only.
Command mode: Global configuration
show mac­address­table
Display current FDB configuration.
Command mode: All

390

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Static Multicast MAC Configuration
The following options are available to control the forwarding of known and
unknown multicast packets:


All multicast packets are flooded to the entire VLAN. This is the default switch
behavior.



Known multicast packets are forwarded only to those ports specified. Unknown
multicast packets are flooded to the entire VLAN. To configure this option,
define the Multicast MAC address for the VLAN and specify ports that are to
receive multicast packets (mac­address­table multicast).



Known multicast packets are forwarded only to those ports specified. Unknown
multicast packets are dropped. To configure this option:


Define the Multicast MAC address for the VLAN and specify ports that are to
receive multicast packets (mac­address­table multicast).



Enable Flood Blocking on ports that are not to receive multicast packets
(interface port x) (flood­blocking).

Use the following commands to configure static Multicast MAC entries in the
Forwarding Database (FDB).
Table 228. Static Multicast MAC Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] mac­address­table multicast  

Adds or deletes a permenant multicast FDB entry. You can list ports separated
by a space, or enter a range of ports separated by a hyphen ( ‐ ). For example:
mac­address­table multicast 01:00:00:23:3f:01 200
int1­int4
Command mode: Global configuration
no mac­address­table multicast all
Deletes all permenant multicast FDB entries.
Command mode: Global configuration
mac­address­table multicast reload
Reloads all permenant multicast FDB entries.
Command mode: Global configuration
show mac­address­table multicast
Display the current permenant multicast FDB entries.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

391

Static FDB Configuration
Use the following commands to configure static entries in the Forwarding
Database (FDB).
Table 229. FDB Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

mac­address­table static  vlan 
{port |portchannel |
adminkey <1‐65535>}
Adds a permanent FDB entry. Enter the MAC address using the following
format, xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.
For example, 08:00:20:12:34:56.
You can also enter the MAC address as follows: xxxxxxxxxxxx.
For example, 080020123456.
Command mode: Global configuration
no mac­address­table static  
Deletes a permanent FDB entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
show mac­address­table
Display current FDB configuration.
Command mode: All

392

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

ECP Configuration
Use the following commands to configure Edge Control Protocol (ECP).
Table 230. ECP Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ecp retransmit­interval <100‐9000>
Configures ECP retransmit interval in milliseconds.
Default value is 1000.
Command mode: Global configuration
default ecp retransmit­interval
Resets the ECP retransmit interval to the default 1000 milliseconds.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ecp [channels|upper­layer­protocols]
Displays settings for all ECP channels or registered ULPs.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

393

LLDP Configuration
Use the following commands to configure Link Layer Detection Protocol (LLDP).
Table 231. LLDP Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] lldp enable
Globally enables or disables LLDP.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
lldp holdtime­multiplier <2‐10>
Configures the message hold time multiplier. The hold time is configured as a
multiple of the message transmission interval.
The default value is 4.
Command mode: Global configuration
no lldp holdtime­multiplier
Sets the message hold time multiplier to its default value of 4.
Command mode: Global configuration
lldp refresh­interval <5‐32768>
Configures the message transmission interval, in seconds.
The default value is 30.
Command mode: Global configuration
no lldp refresh­interval
Sets the message transmission interval to its default value of 30 seconds.
Command mode: Global configuration
lldp reinit­delay <1‐10>
Configures the re‐initialization delay interval, in seconds. The re‐initialization
delay allows the port LLDP information to stabilize before transmitting LLDP
messages.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Global configuration
no lldp reinit­delay
Sets the re‐initialization delay interval to its default value of 2 seconds.
Command mode: Global configuration
lldp transmission­delay <1‐8192>
Configures the transmission delay interval, in seconds. The transmit delay
timer represents the minimum time permitted between successive LLDP
transmissions on a port.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Global configuration

394

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 231. LLDP Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

no lldp transmission­delay
Sets the transmission delay interval to its default value of 2 seconds.
Command mode: Global configuration
lldp trap­notification­interval <1‐3600>
Configures the trap notification interval, in seconds.
The default value is 5.
Command mode: Global configuration
no lldp trap­notification­interval
Sets the trap notification interval to its default value of 5 seconds.
Command mode: Global configuration
show lldp
Display current LLDP configuration.
Command mode: All

LLDP Port Configuration
Use the following commands to configure LLDP port options.
Table 232. LLDP Port Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

lldp admin­status {tx_only|rx_only|tx_rx}
Configures the LLDP transmission type for the port, as follows:


Transmit only



Receive only



Transmit and receive

The default setting is tx_rx.
Command mode: Interface port
no lldp admin­status
Disables LLDP transmission for the port.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp trap­notification
Enables or disables SNMP trap notification for LLDP messages.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  lldp
Display current LLDP port configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

395

LLDP Optional TLV configuration
Use the following commands to configure LLDP port TLV (Type, Length, Value)
options for the selected port.
Table 233. Optional TLV Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] lldp tlv all
Enables or disables all optional TLV information types.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv dcbx
Enables or disables the Data Center Bridging Capability Exchange (DCBX)
information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv framesz
Enables or disables the Maximum Frame Size information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv linkaggr
Enables or disables the Link Aggregation information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv macphy
Enables or disables the MAC/Phy Configuration information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv mgmtaddr
Enables or disables the Management Address information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv portdesc
Enables or disables the Port Description information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv portprot
Enables or disables the Port and VLAN Protocol ID information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv portvid
Enables or disables the Port VLAN ID information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv powermdi
Enables or disables the Power via MDI information type.
Command mode: Interface port

396

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 233. Optional TLV Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] lldp tlv protid
Enables or disables the Protocol ID information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv syscap
Enables or disables the System Capabilities information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv sysdescr
Enables or disables the System Description information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv sysname
Enables or disables the System Name information type.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] lldp tlv vlanname
Enables or disables the VLAN Name information type.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  lldp
Display current LLDP port configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

397

Trunk Configuration
Trunk groups can provide super‐bandwidth connections between CN4093 or other
trunk capable devices. A trunk is a group of ports that act together, combining their
bandwidth to create a single, larger port. Two trunk types are available: static trunk
groups (portchannels) and dynamic LACP trunk groups (portchannels).
The two trunk types can be configured using the following portchannel ranges:


static portchannels: 1‐64



LACP portchannels: 65‐128

Up to 64 static trunk groups can be configured on the CN4093, with the following
restrictions:


Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group.



Up to 16 ports can belong to the same trunk group.



Configure all ports in a trunk group with the same properties (speed, duplex,
flow control, STG, VLAN and so on).



Trunking from non‐Lenovo devices must comply with Cisco® EtherChannel®
technology and exclude the PAgP networking protocol.

By default, each trunk group is empty and disabled.
Table 234. Trunk Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

portchannel <1‐64> port  [enable]
Adds a physical port or ports to the current trunk group. You can add several
ports, with each port separated by a comma ( , ) or a range of ports, separated
by a dash ( ‐ ). The enable option also enables the trunk group.
Command mode: Global configuration
no portchannel <1‐64> port 
Removes a physical port or ports from the current trunk group.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel <1‐64> enable
Enables or disables the current trunk group.
Command mode: Global configuration
no portchannel <1‐64>
Removes the current trunk group configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
show portchannel <1‐64>
Displays current trunk group parameters.
Command mode: All

398

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IP Trunk Hash Configuration
Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash settings for the CN4093.
Trunk hash parameters are set globally for the CN4093. The trunk hash settings
affect both static trunks and LACP trunks.
To achieve the most even traffic distribution, select options that exhibit a wide
range of values for your particular network. You may use the configuration
settings listed in Table 235 combined with the hash parameters listed in Table 237.
Table 235. Trunk Hash Settings
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] portchannel thash ingress
Enables or disables use of the ingress port to compute the trunk hash value.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash L4port
Enables or disables use of Layer 4 service ports (TCP, UDP, etc.) to compute the
hash value.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
show portchannel hash
Display current trunk hash configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

399

FCoE Trunk Hash Configuration
Use the following commands to configure FCoE Trunk Hash parameters for the
CN4093.
Table 236. FCoE Trunk Hash Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] portchannel thash fcoe cntag­id
Enables or disables FCoE trunk hashing on the cntag id.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash fcoe destination­id
Enables or disables FCoE trunk hashing on the destination id.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash fcoe fabric­id
Enables or disables FCoE trunk hashing on the fabric id.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash fcoe originator­id
Enables or disables FCoE trunk hashing on the originator id.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash fcoe responder­id
Enables or disables FCoE trunk hashing on the responder id.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash fcoe source­id
Enables or disables FCoE trunk hashing on the source id.
Command mode: Global configuration
show portchannel hash
Display current trunk hash configuration.
Command mode: All

400

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Layer 2 Trunk Hash
Layer 2 trunk hash parameters are set globally. You can enable one or both
parameters, to configure any of the following valid combinations:


SMAC (source MAC only)



DMAC (destination MAC only)



SMAC and DMAC

Use the following commands to configure Layer 2 trunk hash parameters for the
switch.
Table 237. Layer 2 Trunk Hash Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] portchannel thash l2hash l2­destination­mac­address
Enables or disables Layer 2 trunk hashing on the destination MAC.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash l2hash l2­source­mac­address
Enables or disables Layer 2 trunk hashing on the source MAC.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash l2hash l2­source­destination­mac
Enables or disables Layer 2 trunk hashing on both the source and destination
MAC.
Command mode: Global configuration
show portchannel hash
Displays the current trunk hash settings.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

401

Layer 3 Trunk Hash
Layer 3 trunk hash parameters are set globally. You can enable one or both
parameters, to configure any of the following valid combinations:


SIP (source IP only)



DIP (destination IP only)



SIP and DIP

Use the following commands to configure Layer 3 trunk hash parameters for the
switch.
Table 238. Layer 3 Trunk Hash Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] portchannel thash l3thash l3­destination­ip­address
Enables or disables Layer 3 trunk hashing on the destination IP address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash l3thash l3­source­ip­address
Enables or disables Layer 3 trunk hashing on the source IP address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash l3thash l3­source­destination­ip
Enables or disables Layer 3 trunk hashing on both the source and the
destination IP address.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] portchannel thash l3thash l3­use­l2­hash
Enables or disables use of Layer 2 hash parameters only. When enabled,
Layer 3 hashing parameters are cleared.
Command mode: Global configuration
show portchannel hash
Displays the current trunk hash settings.
Command mode: All

402

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Virtual Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration
Use the following commands to configure Virtual Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (vLAG) for the CN4093.
Table 239. Virtual Link Aggregation Control Protocol Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] vlag enable
Enables or disables vLAG globally.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] vlag adminkey <1‐65535> enable
Enables or disables vLAG on the selected LACP admin key. LACP trunks
formed with this admin key will be included in the vLAG configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
vlag auto­recovery <240‐3600>
Sets the duration in seconds of the auto‐recovery timer. This timer configures
how log after boot‐up configuration load, the switch can assume the Primary
role from an unresponsive ISL peer and bring up the vLAG ports.
The default value is 300.
Command mode: Global configuration
no vlag auto­recovery
Sets the auto‐recovery timer to the default 300 seconds duration.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] vlag portchannel <1‐64> enable
Enables or disables the vLAG underlying trunk.
Command mode: Global configuration
vlag priority <0‐65535>
Configures the vLAG priority for the switch, used for election of Primary and
Secondary vLAG switches. The switch with lower priority is elected to the role
of Primary vLAG switch.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

403

Table 239. Virtual Link Aggregation Control Protocol Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

vlag startup­delay <0‐3600>
Sets the vLAG startup‐delay value in seconds to the specified value.
The default to 120 seconds.
Note: Startup delay gives vLAG the ability to prevent traffic loss after a reboot.
When a vLAG switch reboots, the vLAG ports are in an errdisabled state. After
ISL is up, the vLAG ports are started one by one after the specified startup
delay time. This specified time allows the switch to get BGP/OSFP ready
through the uplinks so when the vLAG port starts up, all the traffic through
those links flows smoothly. Admin status of the ports is honored by the vlag
startup delay. For example, if the admin status of the vLAG port is down, those
ports will be kept down even after the vLAG start‐up delay.
Command mode: Global configuration
no vlag startup­delay
Sets the vLAG startup‐delay to the default 300 seconds duration.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] vlag tier­id <1‐512>
Sets the vLAG peer ID.
Command mode: Global configuration
show vlag
Display current vLAG configuration.
Command mode: All

404

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

vLAG Health Check Configuration
These commands allow you to configure a health check of synchronization
between vLAG peers.
Table 240. vLAG Health Check Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] vlag hlthchk connect­retry­interval <1‐300>
Sets in seconds the vLAG health check connect retry interval, in seconds.
The default value is 30.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] vlag hlthchk keepalive­attempts <1‐24>
Sets the number of vLAG keep alive attempts.
The default value is 3.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] vlag hlthchk keepalive­interval <2‐300>
Sets the time between vLAG keep alive attempts, in seconds.
The default value is 5.
Command mode: Global configuration
vlag hlthchk peer­ip {|}
Configures the IP address of the vLAG peer.
Command mode: Global configuration

vLAG ISL Configuration
These commands allow you to configure a dedicated inter‐switch link (ISL) for
synchronization between vLAG peers.
Table 241. vLAG ISL Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] vlag isl adminkey <1‐65535>
Enables or disables vLAG Inter‐Switch Link (ISL) on the selected LACP admin
key. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the ISL.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] vlag isl portchannel <1‐64>
Enables or disables vLAG Inter‐Switch Link (ISL) on the selected trunk group.
Command mode: Global configuration
show vlag information
Displays current vLAG parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

405

Link Aggregation Control Protocol Configuration
Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP) for the CN4093.
Table 242. Link Aggregation Control Protocol Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

lacp system­priority <1‐65535>
Defines the priority value for the CN4093. Lower numbers provide higher
priority.
The default value is 32768.
Command mode: Global configuration
lacp timeout {short|long}
Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote
partner. Choose short (3 seconds) or long (90 seconds).
The default value is long.
Note: It is recommended that you use a timeout value of long, to reduce
LACPDU processing. If your CN4093’s CPU utilization rate remains at 100%
for periods of 90 seconds or more, consider using static trunks instead of
LACP.
Command mode: Global configuration
default lacp [system­priority|timeout]
Restores either the VFSM priority value, timeout period or both to their default
values.
Command mode: Global configuration
no lacp <1‐65535>
Deletes a selected LACP trunk, based on its admin key. This command is
equivalent to disabling LACP on each of the ports configured with the same
admin key.
Command mode: Global configuration
portchannel  lacp key <1‐65535>
Enables a static LACP trunk. In this mode, ports sharing the same LACP
admin key can form a single trunk, with the specified trunk ID. The active
trunk is picked based on the ports which occupy first the trunk ID. Member
ports that cannot join this trunk are prohibited from forming secondary LACP
groups. Instead, they are set in a suspend state where they discard all
non‐LACP traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration

406

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 242. Link Aggregation Control Protocol Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

no portchannel 
Deletes the specified static LACP trunk.
Command mode: Global configuration
show lacp
Display current LACP configuration.
Command mode: All

LACP Port Configuration
Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol
(LACP) for the selected port.
Table 243. Link Aggregation Control Protocol Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

lacp key <1‐65535>
Set the admin key for this port. Only ports with the same admin key and oper key
(operational state generated internally) can form a LACP trunk group.
Command mode: Interface port
lacp mode {off|active|passive}
Set the LACP mode for this port, as follows:


off turns LACP off for this port. You can use this port to manually
configure a static trunk.



active turns LACP on and set this port to active. Active ports initiate
LACPDUs.



passive turns LACP on and set this port to passive. Passive ports do not
initiate LACPDUs, but respond to LACPDUs from active ports.

The default value is off.
Command mode: Interface port
lacp priority <1‐65535>
Sets the priority value for the selected port. Lower numbers provide higher
priority.
The default value is 32768.
Command mode: Interface port
lacp suspend­individual
Sets the port in LACP suspended state if it does not receive LACPDUs
anymore.
Note: The default value is individual for internal switch ports and
suspend­individual for external switch ports.
Command mode: Interface port

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

407

Table 243. Link Aggregation Control Protocol Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

no lacp suspend­individual
Sets the port in LACP individual state if it does not receive LACPDUs
anymore.
Command mode: Interface port
port­channel min­links <1‐16>
Set the minimum number of links for this port. If the specified minimum
number of ports are not available, the trunk is placed in the down state.
Command mode: Interface port
default lacp [key|mode|priority|suspend­individual]
Restores the selected parameters to their default values.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  lacp
Displays the current LACP configuration for this port.
Command mode: All

408

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Layer 2 Failover Configuration
Use these commands to configure Layer 2 Failover. For more information about
Layer 2 Failover, see “High Availability” in the Lenovo N/OS Application Guide.
Table 244. Layer 2 Failover Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] failover enable
Globally enables or disables Layer 2 Failover.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] failover vlan
Globally turns VLAN monitor on or off.
When the VLAN Monitor is on, the switch automatically disables only internal
ports that belong to the same VLAN as ports in the failover trigger.
When the VLAN Monitor is off, the switch automatically disables all of the
internal ports.
The default value is off.
Command mode: Global configuration
show failover trigger [information]
Displays current Layer 2 Failover parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

409

Failover Trigger Configuration
The following table displays Failover Trigger configuration commands.
Table 245. Failover Trigger Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] failover trigger <1‐8> enable
Enables or disables the Failover trigger.
Command mode: Global configuration
no failover trigger <1‐8>
Deletes the Failover trigger.
Command mode: Global configuration
failover trigger <1‐8> limit <0‐1024>
Configures the minimum number of operational links allowed within each
trigger before the trigger initiates a failover event. If you enter a value of zero
(0), the switch triggers a failover event only when no links in the trigger are
operational.
Command mode: Global configuration
show failover trigger <1‐8>
Displays the current failover trigger settings.
Command mode: All

Auto Monitor Configuration
The following table displays Auto Monitor configuration commands.
Table 246. Auto Monitor Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] failover trigger <1‐8> amon adminkey <1‐65535>
Adds or removes an LACP admin key to the Auto Monitor. LACP trunks
formed with this admin key will be included in the Auto Monitor.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] failover trigger <1‐8> amon portchannel 
Adds or removes a trunk group to the Auto Monitor.
Command mode: Global configuration

410

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Failover Manual Monitor Port Configuration
Use these commands to define the port link(s) to monitor. The Manual Monitor
Port configuration accepts only external uplink ports.
Note: AMON and MMON configurations are mutually exclusive.
Table 247. Failover Manual Monitor Port Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon monitor adminkey <1‐65535>
Adds or removes an LACP admin key to the Manual Monitor Port
configuration. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the
Manual Monitor Port configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon monitor member

Adds or removes the selected port to the Manual Monitor Port configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon monitor portchannel

Adds or removes the selected trunk group to the Manual Monitor Port
configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
show failover trigger <1‐8>
Displays the current Failover settings.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

411

Failover Manual Monitor Control Configuration
Use these commands to define the port link(s) to control. The Manual Monitor
Control configuration accepts internal and external ports, but not management
ports.
Table 248. Failover Manual Monitor Control Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon control adminkey <1‐65535>
Adds or removes an LACP admin key to the Manual Monitor Control
configuration. LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the
Manual Monitor Control configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon control member

Adds or removes the selected port to the Manual Monitor Control
configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon control portchannel

Adds or removes the selected trunk group to the Manual Monitor Control
configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] failover trigger <1‐8> mmon control vmember 
Adds or removes the selected Unified Fabric Port virtual port(s) to the Manual
Monitor Control configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
show failover trigger <1‐8>
Displays the current Failover settings.
Command mode: All

412

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Hot Links Configuration
Use these commands to configure Hot Links. For more information about Hot
Links, see “Hot Links” in the Lenovo N/OS 8.2 Application Guide.
Table 249. Hot Links Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] hotlinks bpdu
Enables or disables flooding of Spanning‐Tree BPDUs on the active Hot Links
interface when the interface belongs to a Spanning Tree group that is globally
turned off. This feature can prevent unintentional loop scenarios (for
example, if two uplinks come up at the same time).
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] hotlinks enable
Globally enables or disables Hot Links.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] hotlinks fdb­update
Enables or disables FDB Update, which allows the switch to send FDB and
MAC update packets over the active interface.
The default value is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
hotlinks fdb­update­rate <10‐1000>
Configures the FDB Update rate, in packets per second.
Command mode: Global configuration
show hotlinks
Displays current Hot Links parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

413

Hot Links Trigger Configuration
The following table displays Hot Links Trigger configuration commands.
Table 250. Hot Links Trigger Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] hotlinks trigger <1‐200> enable
Enables or disables the Hot Links trigger.
Command mode: Global configuration
hotlinks trigger <1‐200> forward­delay <0‐3600>
Configures the Forward Delay interval, in seconds.
The default value is 1.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] hotlinks trigger <1‐200> name <1‐32 characters>
Defines a name for the Hot Links trigger.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] hotlinks trigger <1‐200> preemption
Enables or disables pre‐emption, which allows the Master interface to
transition to the Active state whenever it becomes available.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
no hotlinks trigger <1‐200>
Deletes the Hot Links trigger.
Command mode: Global configuration
show hotlinks trigger <1‐200>
Displays the current Hot Links trigger settings.
Command mode: All

414

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Hot Links Master Configuration
Use the following commands to configure the Hot Links Master interface.
Table 251. Hot Links Master Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] hotlinks trigger <1‐200> master adminkey <0‐65535>
Adds or removes an LACP admin key to the Master interface. LACP trunks
formed with this admin key will be included in the Master interface.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] hotlinks trigger <1‐200> master port 
Adds or removes the selected port to the Hot Links Master interface.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] hotlinks trigger <1‐200> master portchannel

Adds or removes the selected trunk group to the Master interface.
Command mode: Global configuration
show hotlinks trigger <1‐200>
Displays the current Hot Links trigger settings.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

415

Hot Links Backup Configuration
Use the following commands to configure the Hot Links Backup interface.
Table 252. Hot Links Backup Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] hotlinks trigger <1‐200> backup adminkey <0‐65535>
Adds or removes an LACP admin key to the Backup interface. LACP trunks
formed with this admin key will be included in the Backup interface.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] hotlinks trigger <1‐200> backup port 
Adds or removes the selected port to the Hot Links Backup interface.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] hotlinks trigger <1‐200> backup portchannel

Adds or removes the selected trunk group to the Backup interface.
Command mode: Global configuration
show hotlinks trigger <1‐200>
Displays the current Hot Links trigger settings.
Command mode: All

416

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

VLAN Configuration
These commands configure VLAN attributes, change the status of each VLAN,
change the port membership of each VLAN, and delete VLANs.
Up to 4094 VLANs can be configured on the CN4093. VLANs can be assigned any
number between 1 and 4094, except the reserved VLANs.
Table 253. VLAN Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

vlan 
Enter VLAN configuration mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] cpu
Configures the switch to forward unregistered IP multicast traffic to the MP,
which adds an entry in the IPMC table, as follows:


If no Mrouter is present, drop subsequent packets with same IPMC.



If an Mrouter is present, forward subsequent packets to the Mrouter(s) on
the ingress VLAN.

The default setting is enabled.
Note: If both flood and cpu are disabled, then the switch drops all
unregistered IPMC traffic.
Command mode: VLAN
[no] flood
Configures the switch to flood unregistered IP multicast traffic to all ports.
The default setting is enabled.
Note: If none of the IGMP hosts reside on the VLAN of the streaming server
for a IPMC group, you must enable IGMP flooding to ensure that multicast
data is forwarded across the VLANs for that IPMC group.
Note: If both flood and cpu are disabled, then the switch drops all
unregistered IPMC traffic.
Command mode: VLAN
[no] management
Configures this VLAN as a management VLAN. You must have at least one
internal port in each new management VLAN. Management port (MGT1) is
automatically added to management VLAN.
Command mode: VLAN
name <1‐32 characters>
Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name.
The default VLAN name is the first one.
Command mode: VLAN

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

417

Table 253. VLAN Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

no name
Resets the VLAN name to its default value.
Command mode: VLAN
[no] optflood
Enables or disables optimized flooding. When enabled, optimized flooding
avoids packet loss during the learning period.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: VLAN
protocol­vlan <1‐8>
Configures the Protocol‐based VLAN (PVLAN).
Command mode: VLAN
shutdown
Disables local traffic on the specified VLAN.
Default setting is enabled (no shutdown).
Command mode: VLAN
no shutdown
Enables local traffic on the specified VLAN.
Default setting is enabled (no shutdown).
Command mode: VLAN
stg 
Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group.
Note: For MST, no VLAN assignation is required. VLANs are mapped from
CIST.
Command mode: VLAN
[no] vmap <1‐128> [extports|intports]
Adds or removes a VLAN Map to the VLAN membership. You can choose to
limit operation of the VLAN Map to internal ports only or external ports only.
If you do not select a port type, the VMAP is applied to the entire VLAN.
Command mode: VLAN
show vlan information
Displays the current VLAN configuration.
Command mode: All
Note: All ports must belong to at least one VLAN. Any port which is removed
from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically
added to default VLAN 1. You cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless
the port has VLAN tagging turned on.

418

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Protocol-Based VLAN Configuration
Use the following commands to configure Protocol‐based VLAN for the selected
VLAN.
Table 254. Protocol VLAN Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] protocol­vlan <1‐8> enable
Enables or disables the selected protocol on the VLAN.
Command mode: VLAN
protocol­vlan <1‐8> frame­type {ether2|llc|snap} 
Configures the frame type and the Ethernet type for the selected protocol.
Ethernet type consists of a 4‐digit (16 bit) hex code, such as 0080 (IPv4).
Command mode: VLAN
[no] protocol­vlan <1‐8> member 
Adds or removes a port to the selected PVLAN.
Command mode: VLAN
protocol­vlan <1‐8> priority <0‐7>
Configures the priority value for this PVLAN.
Command mode: VLAN
protocol­vlan <1‐8> protocol 
Selects a pre‐defined protocol, as follows:


decEther2: DEC Local Area Transport



ipv4Ether2: Internet IP (IPv4)



ipv6Ether2: IPv6



ipx802.2: Novell IPX 802.2



ipx802.3: Novell IPX 802.3



ipxEther2: Novell IPX



ipxSnap: Novell IPX SNAP



netbios: NetBIOS 802.2



rarpEther2: Reverse ARP



sna802.2: SNA 802.2



snaEther2: Lenovo SNA Service on Ethernet



vinesEther2: Banyan VINES



xnsEther2: XNS Compatibility

Command mode: VLAN
[no] protocol­vlan <1‐8> tag­pvlan 
Defines a port that will be tagged by the selected protocol on this VLAN.
Command mode: VLAN

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

419

Table 254. Protocol VLAN Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

no protocol­vlan <1‐8>
Deletes the selected protocol configuration from the VLAN.
Command mode: VLAN
show protocol­vlan <1‐8>
Displays current parameters for the selected PVLAN.
Command mode: All

420

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Private VLAN Configuration
Use the following commands to configure Private VLAN.
Table 255. Private VLAN Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

private­vlan association [add|remove] 
Configures Private VLAN mapping between a primary VLAN and secondary
VLANs. Enter the primary VLAN ID. If no optional parameter is specified, the
list of secondary VLANs, replaces the currently associated secondary VLANs.
Otherwise:


add appends the secondary VLANs to the ones currently associated



remove excludes the secondary VLANs from the ones currently associated

Command mode: VLAN
[no] private­vlan community
Enables or disables the VLAN type as a community VLAN.
Community VLANs carry upstream traffic from host ports. A Private VLAN
may have multiple community VLANs.
Command mode: VLAN
[no] private­vlan isolated
Enables or disables the VLAN type as an isolated VLAN.
The isolated VLAN carries unidirectional traffic from host ports. A Private
VLAN may have only one isolated VLAN.
Command mode: VLAN
[no] private­vlan primary
Enables or disables the VLAN type as a Primary VLAN.
A Private VLAN must have only one primary VLAN. The primary VLAN
carries unidirectional traffic to ports on the isolated VLAN or to community
VLAN.
Command mode: VLAN
show vlan private­vlan [type]
Displays private VLAN information. The type option lists only the VLAN
type for each private VLAN: community, isolated or primary.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

421

Layer 3 Configuration
The following table describes basic Layer 3 Configuration commands. The
following sections provide more detailed information and commands.
Table 256. Layer 3 Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

interface ip 
Configures the IP Interface. The CN4093 supports up to 128 IP interfaces. To
view command options, see page 424.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip pim component <1‐2>
Enters Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) component configuration mode.
To view command options, see page 504.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip router­id 
Sets the router ID.
Command mode: Global configuration
route­map <1‐32>
Enter IP Route Map mode. To view command options, see page 433.
Command mode: Global configuration
router bgp
Configures Border Gateway Protocol. To view command options, see
page 463.
Command mode: Global configuration
router ospf
Configures OSPF. To view command options, see page 440.
Command mode: Global configuration
router rip
Configures the Routing Interface Protocol. To view command options, see
page 437.
Command mode: Global configuration
router vrrp
Configures Virtual Router Redundancy. To view command options, see
page 490.
Command mode: Global configuration

422

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 256. Layer 3 Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ipv6 router ospf
Enters OSPFv3 configuration mode. To view command options, see page 449.
Command mode: Global configuration
show layer3
Displays the current IP configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

423

IP Interface Configuration
The CN4093 supports up to 128 IP interfaces. Each IP interface represents the
CN4093 on an IP on your network. The Interface option is disabled by default.
IP Interfaces 127 and 128 are reserved for switch management. If the IPv6 feature is
enabled on the switch, IP Interface 125 and 126 are also reserved.
Note: To maintain connectivity between the management module and the
CN4093, use the management module interface to change the IP address of the
switch.
Table 257. IP Interface Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

interface ip 
Enter IP interface mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] enable
Enables or disables this IP interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip address  []
Configures the IP address of the switch interface, using dotted decimal
notation.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip netmask 
Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface, using dotted decimal
notation.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip6host
Enables or disables the IPv6 Host Mode on this interface.
The default setting is disabled for data interfaces, and enabled for the
management interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 address  [enable]
ipv6 address   [enable]
ipv6 address   anycast [enable]
Configures the IPv6 address of the switch interface, using hexadecimal format
with colons.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 prefixlen 
Configures the subnet IPv6 prefix length.
The default value is 0.
Command mode: Interface IP

424

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 257. IP Interface Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

ipv6 secaddr6 address  
[anycast]
Configures the secondary IPv6 address of the switch interface, using
hexadecimal format with colons.
Command mode: Interface IP
no ipv6 secaddr6
Removes the secondary IPv6 address of the switch interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ipv6 unreachables
Enables or disables sending of ICMP Unreachable messages.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] relay
Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
vlan 
Configures the VLAN number for this interface. Each interface can belong to
one VLAN.
Command mode: Interface IP
no interface ip 
Removes this IP interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
show interface ip 
Displays the current interface settings.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

425

Default Gateway Configuration
The switch can be configured with up to 4 IPv4 gateways. Gateways 1–4 are
reserved for default gateways. Gateway 4 is reserved for switch management.
Default gateway indices are:


1‐2: Data gateways



3: External management gateway



4: Internal management gateway

This option is disabled by default.
Table 258. Default Gateway Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip gateway <1‐4> address  [enable]
Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal
notation. The enable option also enables the IP gateway for use.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip gateway <1‐4> arp­health­check
Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) health checks.
The default setting is disabled.
Note: The arp option does not apply to management gateways.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip gateway <1‐4> enable
Enables or disables the gateway for use.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip gateway <1‐4> interval <0‐60>
The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it’s up. This command sets
the time between health checks. The range is from 0 to 60 seconds.
The default is 2.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip gateway <1‐4> retry <1‐120>
Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this
default gateway inoperative. The range is from 1 to 120 attempts.
The default is 8 attempts.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip gateway <1‐4>
Deletes the gateway from the configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip gateway <1‐4>
Displays the current gateway settings.
Command mode: All

426

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IPv4 Static Route Configuration
Up to 128 IPv4 static routes can be configured.
Table 259. IPv4 Static Route Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip route    []
Adds a static route. You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address,
destination subnet mask, and gateway address. Enter all addresses using
dotted decimal notation.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip route   []
Removes a static route. The destination address of the route to remove must be
specified using dotted decimal notation.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip route destination­address 
Clears all IP static routes with this destination.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip route gateway 
Clears all IP static routes that use this gateway.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip route interval <1‐60>
Configures the ping interval for ECMP health checks, in seconds.
The default value is 1.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip route retries <1‐60>
Configures the number of health check retries allowed before the switch
declares that the gateway is down.
The default value is 3.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip route static
Displays the current IP static routes.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

427

IP Multicast Route Configuration
The following table describes the IP Multicast (IPMC) route commands.
Note: Before you can add an IPMC route, IGMP must be turned on, IGMP
Snooping/Relay must be enabled, and the required VLANs must be added to
IGMP Snooping/Relay.
Table 260. IP Multicast Route Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip mroute   
{primary|backup|host} [|none]
Adds or removes a static multicast route. The destination address, VLAN,
member port of the route and route type (primary, backup or host) must be
specified.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip mroute   adminkey <1‐65535>
{primary|backup|host} [|none]
Adds or removes a static multicast route. The destination address, VLAN,
member port of the route and route type (primary, backup or host) must be
specified.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip mroute   portchannel
 {primary|backup|host} [|none]
Adds or removes a static multicast route. The destination address, VLAN, and
member trunk group of the route must be specified. Indicate whether the route
is used for a primary, backup, or host multicast router.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip mroute all
Removes all the static multicast routes configured.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip mroute
Displays the current IP multicast routes.
Command mode: All

428

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

ARP Configuration
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is the TCP/IP protocol that resides within the
Internet layer. ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address. ARP queries
machines on the local network for their physical addresses. ARP also maintains IP
to physical address pairs in its cache memory. In any IP communication, the ARP
cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in
the ARP cache. Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet.
Table 261. ARP Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip arp rearp <2‐120>
Defines re‐ARP period, in minutes, for entries in the switch arp table. When
ARP entries reach this value the switch will re‐ARP for the address to attempt
to refresh the ARP cache.
The default value is 5.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip arp
Displays the current ARP configurations.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

429

ARP Static Configuration
Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP
entries that are learned dynamically. Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach
the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network. Static ARPs
are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests.
Static ARPs can also be configured on some gateways as a protection against
malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks.
Table 262. ARP Static Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip arp   vlan 
port 
Adds a permanent ARP entry.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip arp  
vlan 
Adds a static multicast ARP entry for Network Load Balancing (NLB).
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip arp [|all]
Deletes a specific permanent ARP entry or all ARP entries.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip arp static
Displays current static ARP configuration.
Command mode: All

430

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IP Forwarding Configuration
The following table displays IP Forwarding configuration commands.
Table 263. IP Forwarding Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip routing
Enables or disables IP forwarding (routing) on the CN4093.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip routing directed­broadcasts
Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip routing icmp6­redirect
Enables or disables IPv6 ICMP re‐directs.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip routing no­icmp­redirect
Enables or disables ICMP re‐directs.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip routing
Displays the current IP forwarding settings.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

431

Network Filter Configuration
The following table displays Network Filter configuration commands.
Table 264. IP Network Filter Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip match­address <1‐256>  
Sets the starting IP address and IP Netmask for this filter to define the range of
IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled.
The default address is 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0.
Note: For Border Gateway Protocol (BGP), assign the network filter to an
access‐list in a route map, then assign the route map to the peer.
Command mode: Global configuration.
[no] ip match­address <1‐256> enable
Enables or disables the Network Filter configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip match­address <1‐256>
Deletes the Network Filter configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip match­address [<1‐256>]
Displays the current the Network Filter configuration.
Command mode: All

432

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Routing Map Configuration
Note: The map number (1‐32) represents the routing map you wish to configure.
Routing maps control and modify routing information.
Table 265. Routing Map Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

route­map <1‐32>
Enter route map configuration mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] access­list <1‐8>
Configures the Access List. For more information, see page 435.
Command mode: Route map
[no] as­path­list <1‐8>
Configures the Autonomous System (AS) Filter. For more information, see
page 436.
Command mode: Route map
[no] as­path­preference <1‐65535>
Sets the AS path preference of the matched route. You can configure up to
three path preferences.
Command mode: Route map
[no] enable
Enables or disables the route map.
Command mode: Route map
[no] local­preference <0‐4294967294>
Sets the local preference of the matched route, which affects both inbound and
outbound directions. The path with the higher preference is preferred.
Command mode: Route map
[no] metric <1‐4294967294>
Sets the metric of the matched route.
Command mode: Route map
[no] metric­type {1|2}
Assigns the type of OSPF metric. The default is type 1.


Type 1—External routes are calculated using both internal and external
metrics.



Type 2—External routes are calculated using only the external metrics.
Type 1 routes have more cost than Type 2.



none—Removes the OSPF metric.

Command mode: Route map

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

433

Table 265. Routing Map Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

precedence <1‐255>
Sets the precedence of the route map. The smaller the value, the higher the
precedence.
The default value is 10.
Command mode: Route map
[no] weight <0‐65534>
Sets the weight of the route map.
Command mode: Route map
no route­map <1‐32>
Deletes the route map.
Command mode: Route map
show route­map [<1‐32>]
Displays the current route configuration.
Command mode: All

434

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IP Access List Configuration
Note: The route map number (1‐32) and the access list number (1‐8) represent the IP
access list you wish to configure.
Table 266. IP Access List Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

access­list <1‐8> action {permit|deny}
Permits or denies action for the access list.
Command mode: Route map
[no] access­list <1‐8> enable
Enables or disables the access list.
Command mode: Route map
[no] access­list <1‐8> match­address <1‐256>
Sets the network filter number. See “Network Filter Configuration” on
page 432 for details.
Command mode: Route map
[no] access­list <1‐8> metric <1‐4294967294>
Sets the metric value in the AS‐External (ASE) LSA.
Command mode: Route map
no access­list <1‐8>
Deletes the access list.
Command mode: Route map
show route­map <1‐32> access­list <1‐8>
Displays the current Access List configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

435

Autonomous System Filter Path Configuration
Note: The rmap number and the path number represent the AS path you wish to
configure.
Table 267. AS Filter Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

as­path­list <1‐8> action {permit|deny}
Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action.
Command mode: Route map
as­path­list <1‐8> as­path <1‐65535>
Sets the Autonomous System filter’s path number.
Command mode: Route map
[no] as­path­list <1‐8> enable
Enables or disables the Autonomous System filter.
Command mode: Route map
no as­path­list <1‐8>
Deletes the Autonomous System filter.
Command mode: Route map
show route­map <1‐32> as­path­list <1‐8>
Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration.
Command mode: All

436

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Routing Information Protocol Configuration
RIP commands are used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters.
This option is turned off by default.
Table 268. Routing Information Protocol Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

router rip
Enter Router RIP configuration mode.
Command mode: Global Configuration
[no] enable
Globally enables or disables RIP.
Command mode: Router RIP
timers update <1‐120>
Configures the time interval for sending for RIP table updates, in seconds.
The default value is 30.
Command mode: Router RIP
show ip rip
Displays the current RIP configuration.
Command mode: All

RIP Interface Configuration
The RIP Interface commands are used for configuring Routing Information
Protocol parameters for the selected interface.
Note: Do not configure RIP version 1 parameters if your routing equipment uses
RIP version 2.
Table 269. RIP Interface Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip rip authentication key 
Configures the authentication key password.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip rip authentication type []
Configures the authentication type.
The default is none.
Command mode: Interface IP

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

437

Table 269. RIP Interface Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip rip default­action {listen|supply|both}
When enabled, the switch accepts RIP default routes from other routers, but
gives them lower priority than configured default gateways. When disabled,
the switch rejects RIP default routes.
The default value is none.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip rip enable
Enables or disables this RIP interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip rip listen
When enabled, the switch learns routes from other routers.
The default value is enabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip rip metric [<1‐15>]
Configures the route metric, which indicates the relative distance to the
destination.
The default value is 1.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip rip multicast­updates
Enables or disables multicast updates of the routing table (using address
224.0.0.9).
The default value is enabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip rip poison
When enabled, the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse. When
disabled, the switch uses only split horizon.
The default value is disabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip rip split­horizon
Enables or disables split horizon.
The default value is enabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip rip supply
When enabled, the switch supplies routes to other routers.
The default value is enabled.
Command mode: Interface IP

438

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 269. RIP Interface Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip rip triggered
Enables or disables Triggered Updates. Triggered Updates are used to speed
convergence. When enabled, Triggered Updates force a router to send update
messages immediately, even if it is not yet time for the update message.
The default value is enabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip rip version {1|2|both}
Configures the RIP version used by this interface.
The default value is version 2.
Command mode: Interface IP
show interface ip  rip
Displays the current RIP configuration.
Command mode: All

RIP Route Redistribution Configuration
The following table describes the RIP Route Redistribution commands.
Table 270. RIP Redistribution Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] redistribute {fixed|static|ospf|eospf|ebgp|ibgp} <1‐32>
Adds or removes the selected routing maps to the RIP route redistribution list.
To add specific route maps, enter routing map numbers, separated by a
comma ( , ). To add or removes all 32 route maps, type all.
The routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the
route redistribution list will be redistributed.
Command mode: Router RIP
redistribute {fixed|static|ospf|eospf|ebgp|ibgp}
export <1‐15>
Exports the routes of this protocol in which the metric and metric type are
specified.
Command mode: Router RIP
no redistribute {fixed|static|ospf|eospf|ebgp|ibgp} export
Stops exporting the routes of the protocol.
Command mode: RIP
show ip rip redistribute
Displays the current RIP route redistribute configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

439

Open Shortest Path First Configuration
The following table describes the OSPF commands.
Table 271. OSPF Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

router ospf
Enter Router OSPF configuration mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip ospf 
Configures the OSPF interface. See page 444 to view command options.
Command mode: Interface IP
area <0‐2>
Configures the OSPF area index. See page 441 to view command options.
Command mode: Router OSPF
area­virtual­link <1‐3>
Configures the Virtual Links used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link. See
page 446 to view command options.
Command mode: Router OSPF
area­range <1‐16>
Configures summary routes for up to 16 IP addresses. See page 443 to view
command options.
Command mode: Router OSPF
default­information <1‐16777214> 
Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area.
Command mode: Router OSPF
no default­information
Removes the default route information.
Command mode: Router OSPF
[no] enable
Enables or disables OSPF on the CN4093.
Command mode: Router OSPF
host <1‐128>
Configures OSPF for the host routes. Up to 128 host routes can be configured.
Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external
networks to perform server load balancing within OSPF. It also makes Area
Border Route (ABR) load sharing and ABR failover possible. See page 447 to
view command options.
Command mode: Router OSPF

440

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 271. OSPF Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

lsdb­limit 
Sets the link state database limit.
Command mode: Router OSPF
message­digest­key <1‐255> md5­key 
Assigns a string to MD5 authentication key.
Command mode: Router OSPF
redistribute
Configures OSPF route redistribution. See page 448 to view command options.
Command mode: Router OSPF
show ip ospf
Displays the current OSPF configuration settings.
Command mode: All

Area Index Configuration
The following table describes the Area Index commands.
Table 272. Area Index Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

area <0‐2> area­id 
Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number.
Command mode: Router OSPF
[no] area <0‐2> authentication­type {password|md5}
None: No authentication required.
Password: Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing
devices can participate.
md5: This parameter is used when MD5 cryptographic authentication is
required.
Command mode: Router OSPF
[no] area <0‐2> enable
Enables or disables the OSPF area.
Command mode: Router OSPF
area <0‐2> spf­interval <1‐255>
Configures the minimum time interval, in seconds, between two successive
SPF (shortest path first) calculations of the shortest path tree using the
Dijkstra’s algorithm.
The default value is 10.
Command mode: Router OSPF

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

441

Table 272. Area Index Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

area <0‐2> stub­metric <1‐65535>
Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value. All routes received via
that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing
decisions.
Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route.
Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for
external routes.
Command mode: Router OSPF
area <0‐2> type {transit|stub|nssa}
Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be established
with the backbone, the area type must be defined as transit.
Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between
routing devices. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be
transit area.
Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed.
Typically, a stub area is connected to only one other area.
NSSA: Not‐So‐Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional
capabilities. For example, routes originating from within the NSSA can be
propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas.
Command mode: Router OSPF
no area <0‐2>
Deletes the OSPF area.
Command mode: Router OSPF
show ip ospf area <0‐2>
Displays the current OSPF configuration.
Command mode: All

442

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPF Summary Range Configuration
The following table describes the OSPF Summary Range commands.
Table 273. OSPF Summary Range Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

area­range <1‐16> address  
Displays the base IP address or the IP address mask for the range.
Command mode: Router OSPF
area­range <1‐16> area <0‐2>
Displays the area index used by the CN4093.
Command mode: Router OSPF
[no] area­range <1‐16> enable
Enables or disables the OSPF summary range.
Command mode: Router OSPF
[no] area­range <1‐16> hide
Hides or shows the OSPF summary range.
Command mode: Router OSPF
no area­range <1‐16>
Deletes the OSPF summary range.
Command mode: Router OSPF
show ip ospf area­range <1‐16>
Displays the current OSPF summary range.
Command mode: Router OSPF

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

443

OSPF Interface Configuration
The following table describes the OSPF Interface commands.
Table 274. OSPF Interface Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip ospf area <0‐2>
Configures the OSPF area index.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip ospf cost <1‐65535>
Configures cost set for the selected path—preferred or backup. Usually the
cost is inversely proportional to the bandwidth of the interface. Low cost
indicates high bandwidth.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip ospf dead­interval <1‐65535>
ip ospf dead­interval <1000‐65535ms>
Configures the health parameters of a hello packet, in seconds or
milliseconds, before declaring a silent router to be down.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip ospf enable
Enables or disables OSPF interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip ospf hello­interval <1‐65535>
ip ospf hello­interval <50‐65535ms>
Configures the interval, in seconds or milliseconds, between the hello
packets for the interfaces.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip ospf message­digest­key <1‐255>
Assigns an MD5 key to the interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip ospf key 
Sets the authentication key to clear the password.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip ospf passive­interface
Sets the interface as passive. On a passive interface, you can disable OSPF
protocol exchanges, but the router advertises the interface in its LSAs so that IP
connectivity to the attached network segment will be established.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip ospf point­to­point
Sets the interface as point‐to‐point.
Command mode: Interface IP

444

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 274. OSPF Interface Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

ip ospf priority <0‐255>
Configures the priority value for the CN4093’s OSPF interfaces.
A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0
specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR) or
Backup Designated Router (BDR).
Command mode: Interface IP
ip ospf retransmit­interval <1‐3600>
Configures the retransmit interval in seconds.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip ospf transit­delay <1‐3600>
Configures the transit delay in seconds.
Command mode: Interface IP
no ip ospf
Deletes the OSPF interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
show interface ip  ospf
Displays the current settings for OSPF interface.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

445

OSPF Virtual Link Configuration
The following table describes the OSPF Virtual Link commands.
Table 275. OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

area­virtual­link <1‐3> area <0‐2>
Configures the OSPF area index for the virtual link.
Command mode: Router OSPF
area­virtual­link <1‐3> dead­interval <1‐65535>
area­virtual­link <1‐3> dead­interval <1000‐65535ms>
Configures the health parameters of a hello packet, in seconds or milliseconds.
The default value is 40.
Command mode: Router OSPF
[no] area­virtual­link <1‐3> enable
Enables or disables OSPF virtual link.
Command mode: Router OSPF
area­virtual­link <1‐3> hello­interval <1‐65535>
area­virtual­link <1‐3> hello­interval <50‐65535ms>
Configures the authentication parameters of a hello packet, in seconds or
milliseconds.
The default value is 10.
Command mode: Router OSPF
[no] area­virtual­link <1‐3> key 
Configures the password (up to eight characters) for each virtual link.
The default setting is none.
Command mode: Router OSPF
area­virtual­link <1‐3> message­digest­key <1‐255>
Sets MD5 key ID for each virtual link.
The default setting is none.
Command mode: Router OSPF
area­virtual­link <1‐3> neighbor­router 
Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor.
The default value is 0.0.0.0.
Command mode: Router OSPF
area­virtual­link <1‐3> retransmit­interval <1‐3600>
Configures the retransmit interval, in seconds.
The default value is 5.
Command mode: Router OSPF

446

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 275. OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

area­virtual­link <1‐3> transit­delay <1‐3600>
Configures the delay in transit, in seconds.
The default value is 1.
Command mode: Router OSPF
no area­virtual­link <1‐3>
Deletes OSPF virtual link.
Command mode: Router OSPF
show ip ospf area­virtual­link <1‐3>
Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings.
Command mode: All

OSPF Host Entry Configuration
The following table describes the OSPF Host Entry commands.
Table 276. OSPF Host Entry Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

host <1‐128> address 
Configures the base IP address for the host entry.
Command mode: Router OSPF
host <1‐128> area <0‐2>
Configures the area index of the host.
Command mode: Router OSPF
host <1‐128> cost <1‐65535>
Configures the cost value of the host.
Command mode: Router OSPF
[no] host <1‐128> enable
Enables or disables OSPF host entry.
Command mode: Router OSPF
no host <1‐128>
Deletes OSPF host entry.
Command mode: Router OSPF
show ip ospf host <1‐128>
Displays the current OSPF host entries.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

447

OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration
The following table describes the OSPF Route Redistribution commands.
Table 277. OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] redistribute {fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp} 
Adds or removes selected routing map to the rmap list.
This option adds or removes a route map to the route redistribution list. The
routes of the redistribution protocol matched by the route maps in the route
redistribution list will be redistributed.
Command mode: Router OSPF
[no] redistribute {fixed|static|rip|ebgp|ibgp} export
metric <1‐16777214> metric­type {type1|type2}
Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS‐external LSAs in which
the metric and metric type are specified. To remove a previous configuration
and stop exporting the routes of the protocol, enter none.
Command mode: Router OSPF
show ip ospf redistribute
Displays the current route map settings.
Command mode: All

OSPF MD5 Key Configuration
The following table describes the OSPF MD5 Key commands.
Table 278. OSPF MD5 Key Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

message­digest­key <1‐255> md5­key <1‐16 characters>
Sets the authentication key for this OSPF packet.
Command mode: Router OSPF
no message­digest­key <1‐255>
Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet.
Command mode: Router OSPF
show ip ospf message­digest­key <1‐255>
Displays the current MD5 key configuration.
Command mode: All

448

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Open Shortest Path First Version 3 Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 commands.
Table 279. OSPFv3 Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ipv6 router ospf
Enter OSPFv3 configuration mode. Enables or disables OSPFv3 routing
protocol.
Command mode: Global configuration
abr­type [standard|cisco|ibm]
Configures the Area Border Router (ABR) type, as follows:


Standard



Cisco



IBM

The default setting is standard.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
as­external lsdb­limit 
Sets the link state database limit.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] enable
Enables or disables OSPFv3 on the switch.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
exit­overflow­interval <0‐4294967295>
Configures the number of seconds that a router takes to exit Overflow State.
The default value is 0.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] nssaAsbrDfRtTrans
Enables or disables setting of the P‐bit in the default Type 7 LSA generated by
an NSSA internal ASBR.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Router OSPF3

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

449

Table 279. OSPFv3 Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

neighbor <1‐256> {address |enable|interface <1‐126>|
|priority <0‐255>}
Configures directly reachable routers over non‐broadcast networks.This is
required for non‐broadcast multiple access (NBMA) networks and optional for
Point‐to‐Multipoint networks.


address configures the neighbor’s IPv6 address.



enable activates a previously disabled neighbor.



interface configures the OSPFv3 interface used for the neighbor entry.



priority configures the priority value used for the neighbor entry. A
priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0
specifies that the neighbor cannot be used as Designated Router.

The default value is 1.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
no neighbor <1‐256> [enable]
Deletes the neighbor entry.
Using the enable option only disables the neighbor, while preserving it’s
settings.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
reference­bandwidth <0‐4294967295>
Configures the reference bandwidth, in kilobits per second, used to calculate
the default interface metric.
The default value is 100,000.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
router­id 
Defines the router ID.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
timers spf {} {}
Configures the number of seconds that SPF calculation is delayed after a
topology change message is received.
The default value is 5.
Configures the number of seconds between SPF calculations.
The default value is 10.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
show ipv6 ospf
Displays the current OSPF configuration settings.
Command mode: All

450

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPFv3 Area Index Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 Area Index commands.
Table 280. OSPFv3 Area Index Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

area  area­id 
Defines the IP address of the OSPFv3 area number.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area  default­metric 
Configures the cost for the default summary route in a stub area or NSSA.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area  default­metric type <1‐3>
Configures the default metric type applied to the route.
Note: This command applies only to area type of Stub/NSSA.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] area  enable
Enables or disables the OSPF area.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area  stability­interval <1‐255>
Configures the stability interval for an NSSA, in seconds. When the interval
expires, an elected translator determines that its services are no longer
required.
The default value is 40.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area  translation­role {always|candidate}
Configures the translation role for an NSSA area, as follows:


always: Type 7 LSAs are always translated into Type 5 LSAs.



candidate: An NSSA border router participates in the translator election
process.

The default setting is candidate.
Command mode: Router OSPF3

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

451

Table 280. OSPFv3 Area Index Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

area  type {transit|stub|nssa} {no­summary}
Defines the type of area. For example, when a virtual link has to be established
with the backbone, the area type must be defined as transit.
Transit area: allows area summary information to be exchanged between
routing devices. Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be
transit area.
Stub area: is an area where external routing information is not distributed.
Typically, a stub area is connected to only one other area.
NSSA: Not‐So‐Stubby Area (NSSA) is similar to stub area with additional
capabilities. For example, routes originating from within the NSSA can be
propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas. External routes from
outside the Autonomous System (AS) can be advertised within the NSSA but
are not distributed into other areas.
Enables or disables the no‐summary option. When enabled, the area‐border
router neither originates nor propagates Inter‐Area‐Prefix LSAs into
stub/NSSA areas. Instead it generates a default Inter‐Area‐Prefix LSA.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
no area 
Deletes the OSPF area.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
show ipv6 ospf areas
Displays the current OSPFv3 area configuration.
Command mode: All

452

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPFv3 Summary Range Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 Summary Range commands.
Table 281. OSPFv3 Summary Range Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

area­range <1‐16> address  
Configures the base IPv6 address and subnet prefix length for the range.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­range <1‐16> area 
Configures the area index used by the switch.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] area­range <1‐16> enable
Enables or disables the OSPFv3 summary range.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] area­range <1‐16> hide
Hides or shows the OSPFv3 summary range.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­range <1‐16> lsa­type {summary|Type7}
Configures the LSA type, as follows:


Summary LSA



Type7 LSA

Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­range <1‐16> tag <0‐4294967295>
Configures the route tag.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
no area­range <1‐16>
Deletes the OSPFv3 summary range.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
show ipv6 ospf area­range
Displays the current OSPFv3 summary range.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

453

OSPFv3 AS-External Range Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 AS‐External Range commands.
Table 282. OSPFv3 AS‐External Range Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

summary­prefix <1‐16> address  
Configures the base IPv6 address and the subnet prefix length for the range.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
summary­prefix <1‐16> aggregation­effect {allowAll|denyAll|
|advertise|not­advertise}
Configures the aggregation effect, as follows:
– allowAll: If the area ID is 0.0.0.0, aggregated Type‐5 LSAs are generated.
Aggregated Type‐7 LSAs are generated in all the attached NSSAs for the
range.
– denyAll: Type‐5 and Type‐7 LSAs are not generated.
– advertise: If the area ID is 0.0.0.0, aggregated Type‐5 LSAs are gener‐
ated. For other area IDs, aggregated Type‐7 LSAs are generated in the
NSSA area.
– not­advertise: If the area ID is 0.0.0.0, Type‐5 LSAs are not generated,
while all NSSA LSAs within the range are cleared and aggregated Type‐7
LSAs are generated for all NSSAs. For other area IDs, aggregated Type‐7
LSAs are not generated in the NSSA area.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
summary­prefix <1‐16> area 
Configures the area index used by the switch.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] summary­prefix <1‐16> enable
Enables or disables the OSPFv3 AS‐external range.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] summary­prefix <1‐16> translation
When enabled, the P‐bit is set in the generated Type‐7 LSA. When
disabled, the P‐bit is cleared.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
no summary­prefix <1‐16>
Deletes the OSPFv3 AS‐external range.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
show ipv6 ospf summary­prefix <1‐16>
Displays the current OSPFv3 AS‐external range.
Command mode: All

454

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPFv3 Interface Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 Interface commands.
Table 283. OSPFv3 Interface Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

interface ip 
Enter Interface IP mode, from Global Configuration mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ipsec dynamic­policy <1‐10>
Adds or removes an IP security dynamic policy to the OSPFv3 interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ipsec manual­policy <1‐10>
Adds or removes an IP security manual policy to the OSPFv3 interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 ospf area 
Configures the OSPFv3 area index.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 ospf area  instance <0‐255>
Configures the instance ID for the interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ipv6 ospf cost <1‐65535>
Configures the metric value for sending a packet on the interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ipv6 ospf dead­interval <1‐65535>
Configures the health parameters of a hello packet, in seconds, before
declaring a silent router to be down.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ipv6 ospf enable
Enables or disables OSPFv3 on the interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ipv6 ospf hello­interval <1‐65535>
Configures the indicated interval, in seconds, between the hello packets, that
the router sends on the interface.
Command mode: Interface IP

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

455

Table 283. OSPFv3 Interface Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ipv6 ospf linklsasuppress
Enables or disables Link LSA suppression. When suppressed, no Link LSAs
are originated.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 ospf network {broadcast|non­broadcast|
|pint­to­multipoint|point­to­point}
Configures the network type for the OSPFv3 interface:


broadcast: network where all routers use the broadcast capability



non­broadcast: non‐broadcast multiple access (NBMA) network
supporting pseudo‐broadcast (multicast and broadcast traffic is configured
manually)



point­to­multipoint: network where multiple point‐to‐point links are
set up on the same interface



point­to­point: network that joins a single pair of routers

The default value is broadcast.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ipv6 ospf passive­interface
Enables or disables the passive setting on the interface. On a passive
interface, OSPFv3 protocol packets are suppressed.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 ospf poll­interval <0‐4294967295>
Configures the poll interval in seconds for neighbors in NBMA networks.
The default value is 120.
Command mode: Interface IP
no ipv6 ospf poll­interval
Configures the poll interval in seconds for neighbors in NBMA and
point‐to‐multipoint networks to its default 120 seconds value.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ipv6 ospf priority 
Configures the priority value for the switch’s OSPFv3 interface.
A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest. A priority value of 0
specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router (DR).
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ipv6 ospf retransmit­interval <1‐1800>
Configures the interval in seconds, between LSA retransmissions for
adjacencies belonging to interface.
Command mode: Interface IP

456

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 283. OSPFv3 Interface Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ipv6 ospf transmit­delay <1‐1800>
Configures the estimated time, in seconds, taken to transmit LS update packet
over this interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
no ipv6 ospf
Deletes OSPFv3 from interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
show ipv6 ospf interface
Displays the current settings for OSPFv3 interface.
Command mode: Interface IP

OSPFv3 over IPSec Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 over IPsec Configuration commands.
Table 284. Layer 3 IPsec Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec enable
Enables IPsec authentication.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec spi <256‐4294967295> {md5|sha1}

Configures the Security Parameters Index (SPI), algorithm, and authentication
key for the Authentication Header (AH). The algorithms supported are:


MD5 (hexadecimal key length is 32)



SHA1 (hexadecimal key length is 40)

Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec default
Resets the Authentication Header (AH) configuration to default values.
Command mode: Interface IP
no ipv6 ospf authentication ipsec spi <256‐4294967295>
Disables the specified Authentication Header (AH) SPI.
Command mode: Interface IP

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

457

Table 284. Layer 3 IPsec Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec enable
Enables OSPFv3 encryption for this interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec spi <256‐4294967295>
esp {3des|aes­cbc|des|null} |null}
{md5|sha1|none} 
Configures the Security Parameters Index (SPI), encryption algorithm,
authentication algorithm, and authentication key for the Encapsulating
Security Payload (ESP). The ESP algorithms supported are:


3DES (hexadecimal key length is 48)



AES­CBC (hexadecimal key length is 32)



DES (hexadecimal key length is 16)

The authentication algorithms supported are:


MD5 (hexadecimal key length is 32)



SHA1 (hexadecimal key length is 40)



none

Note: If the encryption algorithm is null, the authentication algorithm must be
either MD5 or SHA1. (hexadecimal key length is 40). If an encryption
algorithm is specified (3DES, AES‐CBC, or DES), the authentication algorithm
can be none.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec default
Resets the Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) configuration to default
values.
Command mode: Interface IP
no ipv6 ospf encryption ipsec spi <256‐4294967295>
Disables the specified Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) SPI.
Command mode: Interface IP

458

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPFv3 Virtual Link Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 Virtual Link commands.
Table 285. OSPFv3 Virtual Link Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

area­virtual­link <1‐3> area 
Configures the OSPF area index.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­virtual­link <1‐3> dead­interval <1‐65535>
Configures the time period, in seconds, for which the router waits for hello
packet from the neighbor before declaring this neighbor down.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] area­virtual­link <1‐3> enable
Enables or disables OSPF virtual link.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­virtual­link <1‐3> hello­interval <1‐65535)>
Configures the indicated interval, in seconds, between the hello packets, that
the router sends on the interface.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­virtual­link <1‐3> neighbor­router 
Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor. The default setting is 0.0.0.0.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­virtual­link <1‐3> retransmit­interval <1‐1800>
Configures the interval, in seconds, between link‐state advertisement (LSA)
retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to the OSPFv3 virtual link interface.
The default value is five seconds.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­virtual­link <1‐3> transmit­delay <1‐1800>
Configures the estimated time, in seconds, taken to transmit LS update packet
over this interface.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
no area­virtual­link <1‐3>
Deletes OSPF virtual link.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
show ipv6 ospf area­virtual­link
Displays the current OSPFv3 virtual link settings.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

459

OSPFv3 over IPSec for Virtual Link Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 over IPsec for Virtual Link
Configuration commands.
Table 286. Layer 3 IPsec Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

area­virtual­link <1‐3> authentication ipsec
{default|enable|spi <256‐4294967295>}
Sets OSPFv3 authentication mode.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­virtual­link <1‐3> authentication ipsec
spi <256‐4294967295> {md5 |sha1 }
Configures the OSPFv3 security parameter index authentication.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­virtual­link <1‐3> encryption ipsec {default|enable|
|spi <256‐4294967295>}
Sets OSPFv3 encryption.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
area­virtual­link <1‐3> encryption ipsec spi <256‐4294967295>
esp {3des <3des key>|aes­cbc |null} {md5|none|sha1}
Configures the OSPFv3 security parameter index encryption.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
show ipv6 ospf area­virtual­link
Displays the current OSPFv3 virtual link settings.
Command mode: All

460

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

OSPFv3 Host Entry Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 Host Entry commands.
Table 287. OSPFv3 Host Entry Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

host <1‐128> address  
Configures the base IPv6 address and the subnet prefix length for the host
entry.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
host <1‐128> area 
Configures the area index of the host.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
host <1‐128> cost <1‐65535>
Configures the cost value of the host.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] host <1‐128> enable
Enables or disables the host entry.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
no host <1‐128>
Deletes the host entry.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
show ipv6 ospf host [<1‐128>]
Displays the current OSPFv3 host entries.
Command mode: All

OSPFv3 Redistribute Entry Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 Redistribute Entry commands.
Table 288. OSPFv3 Redist Entry Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

redist­config <1‐128> address  
Configures the base IPv6 address and the subnet prefix length for the
redistribution entry.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] redist­config <1‐128> enable
Enables or disables the OSPFv3 redistribution entry.
Command mode: Router OSPF3

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

461

Table 288. OSPFv3 Redist Entry Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

redist­config <1‐128> metric­type asExttype1|asExttype2
Configures the metric type applied to the route before it is advertised into the
OSPFv3 domain.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
redist­config <1‐128> metric­value <1‐16777215>
Configures the route metric value applied to the route before it is advertised
into the OSPFv3 domain.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
[no] redist­config <1‐128> tag <0‐4294967295>
Configures the route tag.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
no redist­config <1‐128>
Deletes the OSPFv3 redistribution entry.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
show ipv6 ospf redist­config
Displays the current OSPFv3 redistribution configuration entries.
Command mode: Router OSPF3

OSPFv3 Redistribute Configuration
The following table describes the OSPFv3 Redistribute commands.
Table 289. OSPFv3 Redistribute Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] redistribute {connected|static} export
  
Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPFv3 AS‐external LSAs in
which the metric, metric type, and route tag are specified. To remove a
previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol, use the
no form of the command.
Command mode: Router OSPF3
show ipv6 ospf
Displays the current OSPFv3 route redistribution settings.
Command mode: All

462

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Border Gateway Protocol Configuration
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a
network to share routing information with each other and advertise information
about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network
with routers on external networks. BGP allows you to decide what is the “best”
route for a packet to take from your network to a destination on another network,
rather than simply setting a default route from your border router(s) to your
upstream provider(s). You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system
or between different autonomous systems. When run within an autonomous
system, itʹs called internal BGP (iBGP). When run between different autonomous
systems, itʹs called external BGP (eBGP). BGP is defined in RFC 1771.
BGP commands enable you to configure the switch to receive routes and to
advertise static routes, fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other
internal and external routers. In the current Lenovo N/OS implementation, the
CN4093 10Gb Converged Scalable Switch does not advertise BGP routes that are
learned from one iBGP speaker to another iBGP speaker.
BGP is turned off by default.
Note: Fixed routes are subnet routes. There is one fixed route per IP interface.
Table 290. Border Gateway Protocol Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

router bgp
Enter Router BGP configuration mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
as <0‐65535>
Set Autonomous System number.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] asn4comp
Enables or disables ASN4 to ASN2 compatibility.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] enable
Globally enables or disables BGP.
Command mode: Router BGP
local­preference <0‐4294967294>
Sets the local preference. The path with the higher value is preferred.
When multiple peers advertise the same route, use the route with the shortest
AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP, or use the local
preference if you are using iBGP.
Command mode: Router BGP

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

463

Table 290. Border Gateway Protocol Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

neighbor <1‐12>
Configures each BGP peer. Each border router, within an autonomous system,
exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks.
To view command options, see page 464.
Command mode: Router BGP
show ip bgp
Displays the current BGP configuration.
Command mode: All

BGP Peer Configuration
These commands are used to configure BGP peers, which are border routers that
exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks. The
peer option is disabled by default.
Table 291. BGP Peer Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

neighbor <1‐12> advertisement­interval <1‐65535>
Sets time, in seconds, between advertisements.
The default value is 60.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] neighbor <1‐12> passive
Enables or disables BGP passive mode, which prevents the switch from
initiating BGP connections with peers. Instead, the switch waits for the peer to
send an open message first.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] neighbor <1‐12> password <1‐16 characters>
Configures the BGP peer password.
Command mode: Router BGP
neighbor  redistribute
Configures BGP neighbor redistribution. To view command options, see
page 468.
Command mode: Router BGP
neighbor <1‐12> remote­address 
Defines the IP address for the specified peer (border router), using dotted
decimal notation.
The default address is 0.0.0.0.
Command mode: Router BGP

464

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 291. BGP Peer Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

neighbor <1‐12> remote­as <1‐65535>
Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer.
Command mode: Router BGP
neighbor <1‐12> retry­interval <1‐65535>
Sets connection retry interval, in seconds.
The default value is 120.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] neighbor <1‐12> route­map in <1‐32>
Adds or removes route map into in‐route map list.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] neighbor <1‐12> route­map out <1‐32>
Adds or removes route map into out‐route map list.
Command mode: Router BGP
neighbor <1‐12> route­origination­interval <1‐65535>
Sets the minimum time between route originations, in seconds.
The default value is 15.
Command mode: Router BGP
neighbor <1‐12> shutdown
Disables this peer configuration.
Command mode: Router BGP
no neighbor <1‐12> shutdown
Enables this peer configuration.
Command mode: Router BGP

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

465

Table 291. BGP Peer Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

neighbor <1‐12> time­to­live <1‐255>
Time‐to‐live (TTL) is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router
whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be
discarded. TTL specifies a certain time span in seconds that, when exhausted,
would cause the packet to be discarded. The TTL is determined by the number
of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded.
This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can
make. This value is used to restrict the number of “hops” the advertisement
makes. It is also used to support multi‐hops, which allow BGP peers to talk
across a routed network.
The default number is set at 1.
Note: The TTL value is significant only to eBGP peers, for iBGP peers the
TTL value in the IP packets is always 255 (regardless of the configured
value).
Command mode: Router BGP
neighbor <1‐12> timers hold­time <0, 3‐65535>
Sets the period of time, in seconds, that will elapse before the peer session is
torn down because the switch hasn’t received a “keep alive” message from the
peer.
The default value is 180.
Command mode: Router BGP
neighbor <1‐12> timers keep­alive <0, 1‐21845>
Sets the keep‐alive time for the specified peer, in seconds.
The default value is 60.
Command mode: Router BGP
neighbor <1‐12> update­source {|
|loopback <1‐5>}
Sets the source interface number for this peer.
Command mode: Router BGP
no neighbor <1‐12>
Deletes this peer configuration.
Command mode: Router BGP
show ip bgp neighbor [<1‐12>]
Displays the current BGP peer configuration.
Command mode: All

466

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

BGP Aggregation Configuration
These commands enable you to configure BGP aggregation to specify the
routes/range of IP destinations a peer router accepts from other peers. All matched
routes are aggregated to one route, to reduce the size of the routing table. By
default, the first aggregation number is enabled and the rest are disabled.
Table 292. BGP Aggregation Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

aggregate­address <1‐16>  
Defines the starting subnet IP address for this aggregation, using dotted
decimal notation.
The default address is 0.0.0.0.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] aggregate­address <1‐16> enable
Enables or disables this BGP aggregation.
Command mode: Router BGP
no aggregate­address <1‐16>
Deletes this BGP aggregation.
Command mode: Router BGP
show ip bgp aggregate­address [<1‐16>]
Displays the current BGP aggregation configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

467

BGP Neighbor Redistribution Configuration
This menu enables you to redistribute routes learned from various routing
information sources into BGP.
Table 293. BGP Redistribution Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] neighbor <1‐12> redistribute default­action
{import|originate|redistribute}
Sets default route action. Defaults routes can be configured as import,
originate, redistribute, or none.
None: No routes are configured.
Import: Import these routes.
Originate: The switch sends a default route to peers if it does not have any
default routes in its routing table.
Redistribute: Default routes are either configured through default gateway
or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer. If the routes are
learned from default gateway configuration, you have to enable static routes
since the routes from default gateway are static routes. Similarly, if the routes
are learned from a certain routing protocol, you have to enable that protocol.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] neighbor <1‐12> redistribute default­metric
<1‐4294967294>
Sets default metric of advertised routes.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] neighbor <1‐12> redistribute fixed
Enables or disables advertising fixed routes.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] neighbor <1‐12> redistribute ospf
Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] neighbor <1‐12> redistribute rip
Enables or disables advertising RIP routes.
Command mode: Router BGP
[no] neighbor <1‐12> redistribute static
Enables or disables advertising static routes.
Command mode: Router BGP
show ip bgp neighbor <1‐12> redistribute
Displays current redistribution configuration.
Command mode: All

468

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol Configuration
Table 294 describes the commands used to configure MLD parameters.
Table 294. MLD Protocol Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ipv6 mld
Enter MLD global configuration mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
default
Resets MLD parameters to their default values.
Command mode: MLD Configuration
[no] enable
Globally enables or disables MLD.
Command mode: MLD Configuration
exit
Exit from MLD configuration mode.
Command mode: MLD Configuration
show ipv6 mld
Displays the current MLD configuration parameters.
Command mode: All

MLD Interface Configuration
Table 295 describes the commands used to configure MLD parameters for an
interface.
Table 295. MLD Interface Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ipv6 mld default
Resets MLD parameters for the selected interface to their default values.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 mld dmrtr {enable|disable}
Enables or disables dynamic Mrouter learning on the interface.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ipv6 mld enable
Enables or disables this MLD interface.
Command mode: Interface IP

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

469

Table 295. MLD Interface Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

ipv6 mld llistnr <1‐32>
Configures the Last Listener query interval, in seconds.
The default value is 1.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 mld qintrval <2‐65535>
Configures the interval for MLD Query Reports, in seconds.
The default value is 125.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 mld qri <1000‐65535>
Configures the interval for MLD Query Response Reports, in miliseconds.
The default value is 10,000.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 mld robust <2‐10>
Configures the MLD Robustness variable, which allows you to tune the switch
for expected packet loss on the subnet. If the subnet is expected to be lossy
(high rate of packet loss), increase the value.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 mld version <1‐2>
Defines the MLD protocol version number.
Command mode: Interface IP
show ipv6 mld interface 
Displays the current MLD interface configuration.
Command mode: All

470

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IGMP Configuration
Table 296 describes the commands used to configure basic IGMP parameters.
Table 296. IGMP Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip igmp aggregate
Enables or disables IGMP Membership Report aggregation.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip igmp enable
Globally enables or disables IGMP.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip igmp
Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters.
Command mode: All
The following sections describe the IGMP configuration options.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015



“IGMP Snooping Configuration” on page 472



“IGMPv3 Configuration” on page 473



“IGMP Relay Configuration” on page 474



“IGMP Relay Multicast Router Configuration” on page 476



“IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration” on page 477



“IGMP Filtering Configuration” on page 474



“IGMP Advanced Configuration” on page 478



“IGMP Querier Configuration” on page 479

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

471

IGMP Snooping Configuration
IGMP Snooping allows the switch to forward multicast traffic only to those ports
that request it. IGMP Snooping prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to all
ports. The switch learns which server hosts are interested in receiving multicast
traffic, and forwards it only to ports connected to those servers.
Table 297 describes the commands used to configure IGMP Snooping.
Table 297. IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip igmp snoop enable
Enables or disables IGMP Snooping.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp snoop source­ip 
Configures the source IP address used as a proxy for IGMP Group Specific
Queries.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip igmp snoop vlan 
Adds or removes the selected VLAN(s) to IGMP Snooping.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip igmp snoop vlan all
Removes all VLANs from IGMP Snooping.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp snoop mrouter­timeout <1‐600>
Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Queries (mrouter). Once
the timeout value is reached, the switch removes the multicast router from its
IGMP table, if the proper conditions are met. The range is from 1 to 600
seconds.
The default is 255.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip igmp snoop
Displays the current IGMP Snooping parameters.
Command mode: All

472

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IGMPv3 Configuration
Table 298 describes the commands used to configure IGMP version 3.
Table 298. IGMP version 3 Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip igmp snoop igmpv3 enable
Enables or disables IGMP version 3.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip igmp snoop igmpv3 exclude
Enables or disables snooping on IGMPv3 Exclude Reports. When disabled, the
switch ignores Exclude Reports.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp snoop igmpv3 sources <1‐64>
Configures the maximum number of IGMP multicast sources to snoop from
within the group record. Use this command to limit the number of IGMP
sources to provide more refined control.
The default value is 8.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip igmp snoop igmpv3 v1v2
Enables or disables snooping on IGMP version 1 and version 2 reports. When
disabled, the switch drops IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip igmp snoop igmpv3
Displays the current IGMP v3 Snooping configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

473

IGMP Relay Configuration
When you configure IGMP Relay, also configure the IGMP Relay multicast routers.
Table 299 describes the commands used to configure IGMP Relay.
Table 299. IGMP Relay Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip igmp relay enable
Enables or disables IGMP Relay.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp relay report <0‐150>
Configures the interval between unsolicited Join reports sent by the switch, in
seconds.
The default value is 10.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip igmp relay vlan 
Adds or removes the VLAN to the list of IGMP Relay VLANs.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip igmp relay
Displays the current IGMP Relay configuration.
Command mode: All

IGMP Filtering Configuration
Table 300 describes the commands used to configure an IGMP filter.
Table 300. IGMP Filtering Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip igmp profile <1‐16>
Configures the IGMP filter. To view command options, see page 475.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip igmp filtering
Enables or disables IGMP filtering globally.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip igmp filtering
Displays the current IGMP Filtering parameters.
Command mode: All

474

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IGMP Filter Definition
Table 301 describes the commands used to define an IGMP filter.
Table 301. IGMP Filter Definition Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip igmp profile <1‐16> action {allow|deny}
Allows or denies multicast traffic for the IP multicast addresses specified.
The default action is deny.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip igmp profile <1‐16> enable
Enables or disables this IGMP filter.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp profile <1‐16> range  
Configures the range of IP multicast addresses for this filter.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip igmp profile <1‐16>
Deletes this filter’s parameter definitions.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip igmp profile <1‐16>
Displays the current IGMP filter.
Command mode: All

IGMP Filtering Port Configuration
Table 302 describes the commands used to configure a port for IGMP filtering.
Table 302. IGMP Filter Port Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip igmp filtering
Enables or disables IGMP filtering on this port.
Command mode: Interface port
[no] ip igmp profile <1‐16>
Adds or removes an IGMP filter to this port.
Command mode: Interface port
show interface port  igmp­filtering
Displays the current IGMP filter parameters for this port.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

475

IGMP Relay Multicast Router Configuration
Table 303 describes the commands used to configure multicast routers for IGMP
Relay.
Table 303. IGMP Relay Mrouter Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> address 
Configures the IP address of the IGMP multicast router used for IGMP Relay.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> attempt <1‐128>
Configures the number of successful ping attempts required before the switch
declares this Mrouter is up.
The default value is 5.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> enable
Enables or disables the multicast router.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> interval <1‐60>
Configures the time interval between ping attempts to the upstream Mrouters,
in seconds.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> retry <1‐120>
Configures the number of failed ping attempts required before the switch
declares this Mrouter is down.
The default value is 4.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2> version <1‐2>
Configures the IGMP version (1 or 2) of the multicast router.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip igmp relay mrouter <1‐2>
Deletes the multicast router from IGMP Relay.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip igmp relay
Displays the current IGMP Relay configuration.
Command mode: All

476

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration
Table 304 describes the commands used to configure a static multicast router.
Note: When static Mrouters are used, the switch continues learning dynamic
Mrouters via IGMP snooping. However, dynamic Mrouters may not replace static
Mrouters. If a dynamic Mrouter has the same port and VLAN combination as a
static Mrouter, the dynamic Mrouter is not learned.
Table 304. IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip igmp mrouter port   
Selects a port/VLAN combination on which the static multicast router is
connected, and configures the IGMP version (1, 2 or 3) of the multicast router.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip igmp mrouter port  

Removes a static multicast router from the selected port/VLAN combination.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip igmp mrouter all
Removes all static multicast routers.
Command mode: Global configuration
clear ip igmp mrouter
Clears the Dynamic router port table.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip igmp mrouter
Displays the current IGMP Static Multicast Router parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

477

IGMP Advanced Configuration
Table 305 describes the commands used to configure advanced IGMP parameters.
Table 305. IGMP Advanced Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip igmp fastleave 
Enables or disables Fastleave processing. Fastleave lets the switch immediately
remove a port from the IGMP port list if the host sends a Leave message and the
proper conditions are met.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp query­interval <1‐600>
Sets the IGMP router query interval, in seconds.
The default value is 125.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp robust <1‐10>
Configures the IGMP Robustness variable, which allows you to tune the
switch for expected packet loss on the subnet. If you expect the subnet to have
a high rate of packet loss, increase the value.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip igmp rtralert
Enables or disables the Router Alert option in IGMP messages.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp timeout <1‐255>
Configures the Query Response Interval. This is a value used to determine the
Group Membership Interval, together with the Robustness Variable and the Query
Interval. The range is from 1 to 255 seconds.
The default value is 10.
Command mode: Global configuration

478

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IGMP Querier Configuration
Table 306. describes the commands used to configure IGMP Querier.
Table 306. IGMP Querier Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip igmp querier enable
Globally enables or disables IGMP Querier.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip igmp querier vlan  enable
Enables or disables the IGMP Querier for the specified VLAN.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp querier vlan  election­type [ipv4|mac]
Sets the IGMP Querier election criteria as IP address or Mac address.
The default setting is IPv4.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp querier vlan  max­response <1‐256>
Configures the maximum time, in tenths of a second, allowed before
responding to a Membership Query message.By varying the Query Response
Interval, an administrator may tune the burstiness of IGMP messages on the
subnet; larger values make the traffic less bursty, as host responses are spread
out over a larger interval.
The default value is 100.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp querier vlan  query­interval <1‐608>
Configures the interval between IGMP Query broadcasts, in seconds.
The default value is 125.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp querier vlan  robustness <1‐10>
Configures the IGMP Robustness variable, which is the number of times that
the switch sends each IGMP message.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp querier vlan  source­ip 
Configures the IGMP source IP address for the selected VLAN.
Command mode: Global configuration

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

479

Table 306. IGMP Querier Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

ip igmp querier vlan  startup­count <1‐10>
Configures the Startup Query Count, which is the number of IGMP Queries
sent out at startup. Each Query is separated by the Startup Query Interval.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp querier vlan  startup­interval <1‐608>
Configures the Startup Query Interval, which is the interval between General
Queries sent out at startup.
The default value is 31 seconds.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip igmp querier vlan  version [v1|v2|v3]
Configures the IGMP version.
The default version is v3.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip igmp querier
Displays the current IGMP Querier parameters.
Command mode: All
show ip igmp querier vlan 
Displays IGMP Querier information for the selected VLAN.
Command mode: Global configuration

480

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IKEv2 Configuration
Table 307 describes the commands used to configure IKEv2.
Table 307. IKEv2 Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ikev2 cookie
Enables or disables cookie notification.
Command mode: Global configuration
ikev2 retransmit­interval <1‐20>
Sets the interval, in seconds, the timeout value in case a packet is not received
by the peer and needs to be retransmitted.
The default value is 20.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ikev2
Displays the current IKEv2 settings.
Command mode: All

IKEv2 Proposal Configuration
Table 308 describes the commands used to configure an IKEv2 proposal.
Table 308. IKEv2 Proposal Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ikev2 proposal
Enter IKEv2 proposal mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
encryption {3des|aes­cbc}
Configures IKEv2 encryption mode.
The default value is 3des.
Command mode: IKEv2 proposal
group {1|2|5|14|24}
Configures the the DH group.
The default group is 24.
Command mode: IKEv2 proposal
integrity {md5|sha1}
Configures the IKEv2 authentication algorithm type.
The default value is sha1.
Command mode: IKEv2 proposal

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

481

IKEv2 Preshare Key Configuration
Table 309 describes the commands used to configure IKEv2 preshare keys.
Table 309. IKEv2 Preshare Key Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ikev2 preshare­key local <1‐32 characters>
Configures the local preshare key.
The default value is ibm123.
Command mode: Global configuration
ikev2 preshare­key remote <1‐32 characters> 
Configures the remote preshare key for the IPv6 address.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ikev2 preshare­key
Displays the current IKEv2 Preshare key settings.
Command mode: Global configuration

IKEv2 Identification Configuration
Table 310 describes the commands used to configure IKEv2 identification.
Table 310. IKEv2 Identification Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ikev2 identity local address
Configures the switch to use the supplied IPv6 address as identification.
Command mode: Global configuration
ikev2 identity local email <1‐32 characters>
Configures the switch to use the supplied email address (such as
“xyz@example.com”) as identification.
Command mode: Global configuration
ikev2 identity local fqdn <1‐32 characters>
Configures the switch to use the fully‐qualified domain name (such as
“example.com”) as identification.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ikev2 identity
Displays the current IKEv2 identification settings.
Command mode: All

482

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IPsec Configuration
Table 311 describes the commands used to configure IPsec.
Table 311. IPsec Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ipsec enable
Enables or disables IPsec.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ipsec
Displays the current IPsec settings.
Command mode: All

IPsec Transform Set Configuration
Table 312 describes the commands used to configure IPsec transforms.
Table 312. IPsec Transform Set Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ipsec transform­set <1‐10> {ah­md5|ah­sha1|esp­3des|
|esp­aes­cbc|esp­md5|esp­null}
Sets the AH or ESP authentication, encryption, or integrity algorithm. The
available algorithms are as follows:


ah­md5



ah­sha1



esp­3des



esp­aes­cbc



esp­des



esp­md5



esp­null



esp



sha1

Command mode: Global configuration
ipsec transform­set <1‐10> transport {ah­md5|ah­sha1|
|esp­3des|esp­aes­cbc|esp­md5|esp­null}
Sets transport mode and the AH or ESP authentication, encryption, or
integrity algorithm.
Command mode: Global configuration
ipsec transform­set <1‐10> tunnel {ah­md5|ah­sha1|esp­3des|
|esp­aes­cbc|esp­md5|esp­null}
Sets tunnel mode and the AH or ESP authentication, encryption, or integrity
algorithm.
Command mode: Global configuration
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

483

Table 312. IPsec Transform Set Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

no ipsec transform <1‐10>
Deletes the transform set.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ipsec transform­set <1‐10>
Displays the current IPsec Transform Set settings.
Command mode: All

IPsec Traffic Selector Configuration
Table 313 describes the commands used to configure an IPsec traffic selector.
Table 313. IPsec Traffic Selector Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ipsec traffic­selector <1‐10> {permit|deny}
{any|icmp|tcp} {|any}
Sets the traffic selector to permit or deny the specified type of traffic.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ipsec traffic­selector <1‐10>
Resets the specified traffic selector to its default settings.
Command mode: Global configuration

IPsec Dynamic Policy Configuration
Table 314 describes the commands used to configure an IPsec dynamic policy.
Table 314. IPsec Dynamic Policy Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ipsec dynamic­policy <1‐10>
Enter IPsec dynamic policy mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
peer 
Sets the remote peer IP address.
Command mode: IPsec dynamic policy
pfs {enable|disable}
Enables/disables perfect forward security.
Command mode: IPsec dynamic policy

484

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 314. IPsec Dynamic Policy Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

sa­lifetime <120‐86400>
Sets the IPsec SA lifetime in seconds.
The default value is 86400.
Command mode: IPsec dynamic policy
traffic­selector <1‐10>
Sets the traffic selector for the IPsec policy.
Command mode: IPsec dynamic policy
transform­set <1‐10>
Sets the transform set for the IPsec policy.
Command mode: IPsec dynamic policy
show ipsec dynamic­policy <1‐10>
Displays the current IPsec dynamic policy settings.
Command mode: All

IPsec Manual Policy Configuration
Table 315 describes the commands used to configure an IPsec manual policy.
Table 315. IPsec Manual Policy Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ipsec manual­policy <1‐10>
Enter IPsec manual policy mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
in­ah auth­key 
Sets inbound Authentication Header (AH) authenticator key.
Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key
lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1 and 16 characters for MD5
encryption.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
in­ah spi <256‐4294967295>
Sets the inbound Authentication Header (AH) Security Parameter Index (SPI).
Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key
lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1 and 16 characters for MD5
encryption.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

485

Table 315. IPsec Manual Policy Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

in­esp auth­key 
Sets the inbound Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) authenticator key.
Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key
lengths are fixed to 8 characters for DES and to 24 characters for 3DES and
AES‐CBC encryption.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
in­esp cipher­key 
Sets the inbound Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) cipher key.
Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key
lengths are fixed to 8 characters for DES and to 24 characters for 3DES and
AES‐CBC encryption.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
in­esp spi <256‐4294967295>
Sets the inbound Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) Security Parameter
Index (SPI).
Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key
lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1 and 16 characters for MD5
encryption.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
out­ah auth­key 
Sets the outbound Authentication Header (AH) authenticator key.
Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key
lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1 and 16 characters for MD5
encryption.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
out­ah spi <256‐4294967295>
Sets the outbound Authentication Header (AH) Security Parameter Index
(SPI).
Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key
lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1 and 16 characters for MD5
encryption.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
out­esp auth­key 
Sets the outbound Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) authenticator key.
Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key
lengths are fixed to 8 characters for DES and to 24 characters for 3DES and
AES‐CBC encryption.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy

486

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 315. IPsec Manual Policy Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

out­esp cipher­key 
Sets the outbound Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) cipher key.
Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key
lengths are fixed to 8 characters for DES and to 24 characters for 3DES and
AES‐CBC encryption.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
out­esp spi <256‐4294967295>
Sets the outbound Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) Security Parameter
Index (SPI).
Note: For manual policies, when peering with a third‐party device, key
lengths are fixed to 20 characters for SHA1 and 16 characters for MD5
encryption.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
peer 
Sets the remote peer IP address.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
traffic­selector <1‐10>
Sets the traffic selector for the IPsec policy.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
transform­set <1‐10>
Sets the transform set for the IPsec policy.
Command mode: IPsec manual policy
show ipsec manual­policy <1‐10>
Displays the current IPsec manual policy settings.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

487

Domain Name System Configuration
The Domain Name System (DNS) commands are used for defining the primary
and secondary DNS servers on your local network, and for setting the default
domain name served by the switch services. DNS parameters must be configured
prior to using hostname parameters with the ping, traceroute, and tftp
commands.
Table 316. Domain Name Service Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip dns domain­name 
Sets the default domain name used by the switch.
For example: mycompany.com
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip dns primary­server 
You are prompted to set the IPv4 address for your primary DNS server, using
dotted decimal notation.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip dns secondary­server 
You are prompted to set the IPv4 address for your secondary DNS server,
using dotted decimal notation. If the primary DNS server fails, the configured
secondary will be used instead.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip dns ipv6 primary­server 
You are prompted to set the IPv6 address for your primary DNS server, using
hexadecimal format with colons.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip dns ipv6 secondary­server 
You are prompted to set the IPv6 address for your secondary DNS server,
using hexadecimal format with colons. If the primary DNS server fails, the
configured secondary will be used instead.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip dns ipv6 request­version {ipv4|ipv6}
Sets the protocol used for the first request to the DNS server, as follows:


IPv4



IPv6

Command mode: Global configuration
show ip dns
Displays the current Domain Name System settings.
Command mode: All

488

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration
The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) Relay commands are used to let hosts get their
configurations from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The
BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP
address to two DHCP/BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured
on the CN4093.
BOOTP relay is turned off by default.
Table 317. Global BOOTP Relay Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip bootp­relay server <1‐4> address 
Sets the IP address of the selected global BOOTP server.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip bootp­relay enable
Globally enables or disables BOOTP relay.
Command mode: Global configuration

BOOTP Relay Broadcast Domain Configuration
These commands allow you to configure a BOOTP server for a specific broadcast
domain, based on its associated VLAN.
Table 318. BOOTP Relay Broadcast Domain Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip bootp­relay bcast­domain <1‐10> enable
Enables or disables BOOTP Relay for the broadcast domain. When disabled,
BOOTP Relay is performed by one of the global BOOTP servers.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip bootp­relay bcast­domain <1‐10> server <1‐4>
address 
Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip bootp­relay bcast­domain <1‐10> vlan 
Configures the VLAN of the broadcast domain. Each broadcast domain must
have a unique VLAN.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip bootp­relay bcast­domain <1‐10>
Deletes the selected broadcast domain configuration.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ip bootp­relay
Displays the current parameters for the BOOTP Relay broadcast domain.
Command mode: All
© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

489

VRRP Configuration
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) support on the CN4093 provides
redundancy between routers in a LAN. This is accomplished by configuring the
same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP‐capable
routing device. One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master, based on a
number of priority criteria, and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP
address. If the master fails, one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing
authority and take control of the virtual router IP address.
By default, VRRP is disabled. Lenovo N/OS has extended VRRP to include virtual
servers as well, allowing for full active/active redundancy between switches. For
more information on VRRP, see the “High Availability” chapter in the Lenovo N/OS
8.2 Application Guide.
Table 319. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

router vrrp
Enter Router VRRP configuration mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] enable
Globally enables or disables VRRP on this switch.
Command mode: Router VRRP
group
Configures VRRP virtual routers groups. To view command options, see
page 495.
Command mode: Router VRRP
holdoff <0‐255>
Globally sets the time, in seconds, VRRP waits from when the master switch
goes down until elevating a new switch to be the master switch.
Command mode: Router VRRP
[no] hot­standby
Enables or disables hot standby processing, in which two or more switches
provide redundancy for each other.
By default, this option is disabled.
Command mode: Router VRRP
interface 
Configures VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the
virtual routers. To view command options, see page 498.
Command mode: Router VRRP

490

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 319. Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

tracking­priority­increment
Configures weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels
during the master router election process. To view command options, see
page 499.
Command mode: Router VRRP
virtual­router <1‐128>
Configures virtual routers for the switch. To view command options, see
page 492.
Command mode: Router VRRP
show ip vrrp
Displays the current VRRP parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

491

Virtual Router Configuration
These commands are used for configuring virtual routers for this switch. A virtual
router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address. On each VRRP‐capable
routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router
will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address.
Virtual routers are disabled by default.
Table 320. VRRP Virtual Router Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] virtual­router <1‐128> address 
Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation.
This is used in conjunction with the VRID (above) to configure the same
virtual router on each participating VRRP device.
The default address is 0.0.0.0.
Command mode: Router VRRP
[no] virtual­router <1‐128> enable
Enables or disables this virtual router.
Command mode: Router VRRP
virtual­router <1‐128> interface 
Selects a switch IP interface. If the IP interface has the same IP address as the
addr option above, this switch is considered the “owner” of the defined
virtual router. An owner has a special priority of 255 (highest) and will always
assume the role of master router, even if it must pre‐empt another virtual
router which has assumed master routing authority. This pre‐emption occurs
even if the preem option below is disabled.
The default value is 1.
Command mode: Router VRRP
[no] virtual­router <1‐128> preemption
Enables or disables master preemption. When enabled, if this virtual router
is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this
virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control. Note
that even when preemption is disabled, this virtual router will always
pre‐empt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address
and virtual router addr are the same).
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Router VRRP

492

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 320. VRRP Virtual Router Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

virtual­router <1‐128> priority <1‐254>
Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server. The priority value can
be any integer between 1 and 254.
During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest
virtual router priority number wins. If there is a tie, the device with the highest
IP interface address wins. If this virtual router’s IP address is the same as the
one used by the IP interface, the priority for this virtual router will
automatically be set to 255 (highest).
When priority tracking is used, this base priority value can be modified
according to a number of performance and operational criteria.
The default value is 100.
Command mode: Router VRRP
virtual­router <1‐128> timers advertise <1‐255>
Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be
any integer between 1 and 255 seconds.
The default value is 1.
Command mode: Router VRRP
virtual­router <1‐128> track
Enables the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool
of virtual routers. To view command options, see page 494.
Command mode: Router VRRP
virtual­router <1‐128> virtual­router­id <1‐255>
Defines the virtual router ID (VRID). This is used in conjunction with the
[no] virtual­router <128> address  command below to
define a virtual router on this switch. To create a pool of VRRP‐enabled
routing devices which can provide redundancy to each other, each
participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router.
The VRID for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is
not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255.
The default value is 1.
Note: All VRID values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual
router’s IP interface belongs.
Command mode: Router VRRP
no virtual­router <1‐128>
Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration.
Command mode: Router VRRP
show ip vrrp virtual­router <1‐128>
Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

493

Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration
These commands are used for modifying the priority system used when electing
the master router from a pool of virtual routers. Various tracking criteria can be
used to bias the election results. Each time one of the tracking criteria is met, the
priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through the
VRRP Tracking commands.
Criteria are tracked dynamically, continuously updating virtual router priority
levels when enabled. If the virtual router preemption option is enabled, this virtual
router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that
of the current master.
Some tracking criteria apply to standard virtual routers, otherwise called “virtual
interface routers.” A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP
address is the same as any configured virtual server IP address.
Table 321. VRRP Priority Tracking Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] virtual­router <1‐128> track interfaces
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each
other IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active
when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the
virtual routers with the most available routes as the master.
This command is disabled by default.
Command mode: Router VRRP
[no] virtual­router <1‐128> track ports
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each
active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and
is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most
available ports as the master.
This command is disabled by default.
Command mode: Router VRRP
[no] virtual­router <1‐128> track virtual­routers
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each
virtual router in master mode on this switch. This is useful for making sure
that traffic for any particular client/server pairing are handled by the same
switch, increasing routing and load balancing efficiency.
This command is disabled by default.
Command mode: Router VRRP
show ip vrrp virtual­router <1‐128> track
Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.
Command mode: All

494

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Virtual Router Group Configuration
Virtual Router Group commands are used for associating all virtual routers into a
single logical virtual router, which forces all virtual routers on the CN4093 to either
be master or backup as a group. A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID
and an IP address. On each VRRP‐capable routing device participating in
redundancy for this virtual router, a virtual router will be configured to share the
same virtual router ID and IP address.
Note: This option is required to be configured only when using at least two
CN4093s in a hot‐standby failover configuration, where only one switch is active at
any time.
Table 322. VRRP Virtual Router Group Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

group advertisement <1‐255>
Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements. This can be
any integer between 1 and 255 seconds.
The default value is 1.
Command mode: Router VRRP
[no] group enable
Enables or disables the virtual router group.
Command mode: Router VRRP
group interface 
Selects a switch IP interface.
The default switch IP interface number is 1.
Command mode: Router VRRP
group preempt­delay­time <0‐255>
Configures the preempt delay interval (in seconds). This timer is configured
on the virtual router group and prevents the switch from transitioning back to
Master state until the preempt delay interval has expired. Ensure that the
interval is long enough for OSPF or other routing protocols to converge.
The default is 0 seconds.
Command mode: Router VRRP
[no] group preemption
Enables or disables master pre‐emption. When enabled, if the virtual router
group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master, this
virtual router will pre‐empt the lower priority master and assume control.
Note that even when preemption is disabled, this virtual router will always
pre‐empt any other master if this switch is the owner (the IP interface address
and virtual router address are the same).
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Router VRRP

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

495

Table 322. VRRP Virtual Router Group Configuration Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

group priority <1‐254>
Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group. This can be any
integer between 1 and 254.
During the master router election process, the routing device with the highest
virtual router priority number wins.
Each virtual router group is treated as one entity regardless of how many
virtual routers are in the group. When the switch tracks the virtual router
group, it measures the resources contained in the group (such as interfaces,
VLAN ports, real servers). The priority is updated as a group. Every virtual
router in the group has the same priority.
The owner parameter does not apply to the virtual router group. The group
itself cannot be an owner and therefore the priority is 1‐254.
The default value is 100.
Command mode: Router VRRP
group track
Enables the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool
of virtual router groups. To view command options, see page 497.
Command mode: Router VRRP
group virtual­router­id <1‐255>
Defines the virtual router ID (VRID).
The VRID for standard virtual routers (where the virtual router IP address is
not the same as any virtual server) can be any integer between 1 and 255. All
VRID values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router’s IP
interface (see interface below) belongs.
The default virtual router ID is 1.
Command mode: Router VRRP
no group
Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration.
Command mode: Router VRRP
show ip vrrp group
Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group.
Command mode: All

496

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration
Note: If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled, the tracking option will be
available only under group option. The tracking setting for the other individual
virtual routers will be ignored.
Table 323. Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] group track interfaces
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each
other IP interface active on this switch. An IP interface is considered active
when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN. This helps elect the
virtual routers with the most available routes as the master.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Router VRRP
[no] group track ports
When enabled, the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each
active port on the same VLAN. A port is considered “active” if it has a link and
is forwarding traffic. This helps elect the virtual routers with the most
available ports as the master.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Router VRRP
show ip vrrp group track
Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

497

VRRP Interface Configuration
Note: The interface represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters
must be configured.
These commands are used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the
IP interfaces used with the virtual routers.
Table 324. VRRP Interface Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

interface  authentication {password|none}
Defines the type of authentication that will be used: none (no authentication)
or password (password authentication).
Command mode: Router VRRP
[no] interface  password 
Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long. This password will
be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password
authentication is chosen (see interface authentication above).
Command mode: Router VRRP
no interface 
Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface. The IP
interface itself is not deleted.
Command mode: Router VRRP
show ip vrrp interface 
Displays the current configuration for this IP interface’s authentication
parameters.
Command mode: All

498

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

VRRP Tracking Configuration
These commands are used for setting weights for the various criteria used to
modify priority levels during the master router election process. Each time one of
the tracking criteria is met (see “VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking
Commands” on page 494), the priority level for the virtual router is increased by a
defined amount.
Table 325. VRRP Tracking Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

tracking­priority­increment interfaces <0‐254>
Defines the priority increment value for active IP interfaces detected on this
switch.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Router VRRP
tracking­priority­increment ports <0‐254>
Defines the priority increment value for active ports on the virtual router’s
VLAN.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Router VRRP
tracking­priority­increment virtual­routers <0‐254>
Defines the priority increment value (0 through 254) for virtual routers in
master mode detected on this switch.
The default value is 2.
Command mode: Router VRRP
show ip vrrp tracking­priority­increment
Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values.
Command mode: All
Note: These priority tracking options only define increment values. These options
do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the
VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Commands (see page 494) are enabled.

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

499

Protocol Independent Multicast Configuration
The following table displays Protocol Independent Multicast configuration
commands:
Table 326. PIM Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ip pim component <1‐2>
Enter PIM component mode. See page 501 to view options.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip pim enable
Globally enables or disables PIM.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip pim pmbr enable
Enables or disables PIM border router.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
ip pim regstop­ratelimit­period <0‐2147483647>
Configures the register stop rate limit, in seconds.
The default value is 5.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip pim static­rp enable
Enables or disables static RP configuration.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Global configuration
clear ip pim mroute
Clears PIM multicast router entries.
Command mode: Global configuration

500

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

PIM Component Configuration
Use these commands to configure a PIM Component:
Table 327. PIM Component Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

ip pim component <1‐2>
Enter PIM component mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
mode {dense|sparse}
Configures the operational mode of the PIM router (dense or sparse).
Command mode: PIM Component
show ip pim component [<1‐2>]
Displays the current PIM component configuration settings.
Command mode: All

RP Candidate Configuration
Use these commands to configure a PIM router Rendezvous Point (RP) candidate.
Table 328. RP Candidate Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

rp­candidate holdtime <0‐255>
Configures the hold time of the RP candidate, in seconds.
Command mode: PIM Component
[no] rp­candidate rp­address 
 
Adds or removes an RP candidate.
Command mode: PIM Component

RP Static Configuration
Use these commands to configure a static PIM router Rendezvous Point (RP).
Table 329. RP Static Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] rp­static rp­address  

Adds or removes a static RP.
Command mode: PIM Component

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

501

PIM Interface Configuration
The following table displays PIM Interface configuration commands:
Table 330. PIM Interface Configuration Options
Command Syntax and Usage

interface ip 
Enter Interface IP mode.
Command mode: Global Configuration
[no] ip pim border­bit
Enables or disables the interface as a border router.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip pim cbsr­preference <0‐255>
Configures the candidate bootstrap router preference.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip pim component­id <1‐2>
Defines the component ID for the interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip pim dr­priority <0‐4294967294>
Configures the designated router priority.
The default value is 1.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip pim enable
Enables or disables PIM on the interface.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip pim hello­interval <0‐65535>
Configures the time interval, in seconds, between PIM Hello packets.
The default value is 30.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip pim hello­holdtime <1‐65535>
Configures the time period for which a neighbor is to consider this switch to be
operative (up).
The default value is 105.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip pim join­prune­interval <0‐65535>
Configures the interval between Join Prune messages, in seconds.
The default value is 60.
Command mode: Interface IP

502

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 330. PIM Interface Configuration Options (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

ip pim lan­delay <0‐32767>
Configures the LAN delay value for the router interface, in seconds.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip pim lan­prune­delay
Enables or disables LAN delay advertisements on the interface.
The default setting is disabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
ip pim neighbor­addr  {allow|deny}
Allows or denies PIM access to the specified neighbor. You can configure a list
of up to 72 neighbors that bypass the neighbor filter. Once you configure the
interface to allow a neighbor, you can configure the interface to deny the
neighbor.
Command mode: Interface IP
[no] ip pim neighbor­filter
Enables or disables the PIM neighbor filter on the interface. When enabled,
this interface does not accept any PIM neighbors, unless specifically permitted
using the following command:
ip pim neighbor­addr 
Command mode: Interface IP
ip pim override­interval <0‐65535>
Configures the override interval for the router interface, in seconds.
Command mode: Interface IP
show ip pim interface [|detail]
Displays the current PIM interface parameters.
Command mode: All
show ip pim neighbor­filters
Displays the configured PIM neighbor filters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

503

IPv6 Default Gateway Configuration
The switch supports IPv6 default gateways.


Gateway 1 is used for data traffic.



Gateways 3 and 4 are used for management traffic.

Table 331 describes the IPv6 Default Gateway Configuration commands.
Table 331. IPv6 Default Gateway Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip gateway6 <1,3‐4> address  [enable]
Configures the IPv6 address of the default gateway, in hexadecimal format
with colons (such as 3001:0:0:0:0:0:abcd:12). The enable option also
enable the default gateway.
Command mode: Global configuration
[no] ip gateway6 <1,3‐4> enable
Enables or disables the default gateway.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip gateway6 <1,3‐4>
Deletes the default gateway.
Command mode: Global configuration
show ipv6 gateway6 <1,3‐4>
Displays the current IPv6 default gateway configuration.
Command mode: All

504

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

IPv6 Static Route Configuration
Table 332 describes the IPv6 static route configuration commands.
Table 332. IPv6 Static Route Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip route6   
[]
Adds an IPv6 static route.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip route6  
Removes the selected route.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip route6 [destination­address |
|gateway |interface <1‐128>|all]
Clears IPv6 static routes. You are prompted to select the routes to clear, based
on the following criteria:


destination­address: Destination IPv6 address of the route



gateway: Default gateway address used by the route



interface: Interface used by the route



all: All IPv6 static routes

Command mode: Global configuration
show ipv6 route static
Displays the current static route configuration.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

505

IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Configuration
Table 333 describes the IPv6 Neighbor Discovery cache configuration commands.
Table 333. IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Cache Configuration Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

ip neighbors   vlan 
port 
Adds a static entry to the Neighbor Discovery cache table.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip neighbors { |all}
Deletes the selected entry from the static Neighbor Discovery cache table.
Command mode: Global configuration
no ip neighbors all [if <1‐128>|interface port
|vlan ]
Clears the selected static entries in the Neighbor Discovery cache table.
Command mode: Global configuration

IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Configuration
The following table describes the Neighbor Discovery prefix configuration options.
These commands allow you to define a list of prefixes to be placed in Prefix
Information options in Router Advertisement messages sent from an interface.
Table 334. IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Commands
Command Syntax and Usage

interface ip <1‐127>
Enters Interface IP mode.
Command mode: Global configuration
ipv6 nd prefix { } [no­advertise]
Adds a Neighbor Discovery prefix to the interface.
The default setting is enabled.
To disable the prefix and not advertise it in the Prefix Information options in
Router Advertisement messages sent from the interface use the
no­advertise option.
Additional prefix options are listed in this table.
Command mode: Interface IP
no ipv6 nd prefix { } [interface|all]
Removes the selected Neighbor Discovery prefix(es). If you specify an
interface number, all prefixes for the interface are removed.
Command mode: Interface IP

506

CN4093 Command Reference for N/OS 8.2

Table 334. IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Prefix Commands (continued)
Command Syntax and Usage

ipv6 nd prefix { } no­autoconfig
Disables the autonomous flag. When enabled, the autonomous flag indicates
that the prefix can be used for stateless address configuration.
The default setting is enabled.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 nd prefix { } off­link
[no­autoconfig]
Disables the on‐link flag. When enabled, the on‐link flag indicates that this
prefix can be used for on‐link determination. When disabled, the
advertisement makes no statement about on‐link or off‐link properties of the
prefix.
The default setting is enabled.
To clear the off‐link flag, omit the off‐link parameter when you issue this
command.
Command mode: Interface IP
ipv6 nd prefix { }
valid­lifetime <0‐4294967295> [infinite|variable}
prefered­lifetime <0‐4294967295> [infinite|variable}
Configures the Valid Lifetime and (optionally) the Preferred Lifetime of the
prefix, in seconds.
The Valid Lifetime is the length of time (relative to the time the packet is sent)
that the prefix is valid for the purpose of on‐link determination.
The default value is 2592000.
The Preferred Lifetime is the length of time (relative to the time the packet is
sent) that addresses generated from the prefix via stateless address
autoconfiguration remain preferred.
The default value is 604800.
Note: The Preferred Lifetime value must not exceed the Valid Lifetime value.
Command mode: Interface IP
show ipv6 prefix {}
Displays current Neighbor Discovery prefix parameters.
Command mode: All

© Copyright Lenovo 2015

Chapter 4: Configuration Commands

507

IPv6 Prefix Policy Table Configuration
The following table describes the configuration options for the IPv6 Prefix Policy
Table. The Prefix Policy Table allows you to override the default address selection
criteria.
Table 335. IPv6 Prefix Policy Table Options
Command Syntax and Usage

[no] ip prefix­policy
Source Exif Data: 
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Lenovo
Create Date                     : 2015:04:03 12:46:35Z
Modify Date                     : 2015:04:08 19:17:43-07:00
Subject                         : ISCLI—Industry Standard CLI Command Reference for Lenovo Networking OS
Language                        : en
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format                          : application/pdf
Description                     : ISCLI—Industry Standard CLI Command Reference for Lenovo Networking OS
Title                           : CN4093 Command Reference for Lenovo Networking OS 8.2
Creator                         : Lenovo
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.13 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 10.0.2
Metadata Date                   : 2015:04:08 19:17:43-07:00
Document ID                     : uuid:924fbff5-d8ac-430c-98fe-3429d4fcb845
Instance ID                     : uuid:9bc9fbd9-3fed-46d9-b572-70332e21367d
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 652
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu